WATER POLLUTION CONTROL RESEARCH SERIES • 16070ENS06/71
AIRPHOTO ANALYSIS OF OCEAN
OUTFALL DISPERSION
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
-------
WATER POLLUTION CONTROL RESEARCH SERIES
The Water Pollution Control Research Series: describes
results and progress in the control and abatement of
in our Nation's vircers. They prcvJ.de a central sourC
information on the research; development and demonst*
activities in the Environmental Protection Agency, th
inhouse research and grants and contracts with Federal
State, arid local agencies, research institutions, and
industrial organisations.
Inquiries pertaining to Water Pollution Control Re sea
Reports should be directed to the Chief, Publication
(Water), Research Information Division, R8;!4, Environrri
Protection Agency, Washington, D.C. 204oO.
-------
AIRPHOTO ANALYSIS
OF
OCEAN OUTFALL DISPERSION
by
Oregon State University
Fred J. Burgess, Principal Investigator
Dean, School of Engineering
Wesley P. James, Research Associate
Corvallis, Oregon 97331
f
for the
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
Program No. 16070 ENS
June, 1971
Environmental Protection Agency
Library, R^^icn V
1 North iVaokar Drive
Chicago, Illinois 60606
-------
EPA Review Notice
This report has been reviewed by the
Water Quality Office, EPA, and ap-
proved for publication. Approval
does not signify that the contents
necessarily reflect the views and
policies of this office, nor does
mention of commercial products con-
stitute endorsement for use.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGMCY
For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 20402 - Price $-'.25
11
-------
ABSTRACT
Aerial photography was taken of the ocean outfall waste plume at New-
port, Oregon, during the summers of 1968, 1969, and the period extend-
ing from September 1970 through May 1971. Computerized techniques to
analyze the photos were developed by combining the principles of photo-
grammetry and photo interpretation. This remote sensing system involv-
ing multispectral photography was utilized to yield waste concentra-
tions, water currents and diffusion coefficients.
Conventional boat sampling of the waste field was conducted concurrent-
ly with the photography during the 1968 and 1969 field seasons. The
waste concentrations determined by the two methods were compared by
matching ground coordinates. The correlation coefficient for the com-
parison ranged from 0.85 to 0.95. The photographic technique is more
comprehensive than conventional boat sampling and permits waste con-
centrations to be measured throughout the plume in one instant. Dis-
crepancies between concentrations determined by boat sampling and con-
centrations determined from aerial photography appear to be due pri-
marily to changing and shifting of the waste field during the two hour
boat sampling period.
Procedures were developed to evaluate proposed ocean outfall sites by
using dye drops from an airplane. Diffusion coefficients and water
current velocities were determined from aerial photography. A minimum
of two photographic flights over the area were required to show the
transport and spread of the dye patches.
When the hydrography of the receiving water allowed the formation of a
surface plume, the water current velocity was found to be the dominant
factor in the resulting plume pattern. The steady state form of the
Fickian diffusion equation with a unidirectional transport velocity was
not applicable to the majority of the observations. The equation for a
line source in a uniform stream provided the x and y velocity components
for a two-dimensional diffusion model with the losses to the lower
layers being considered by including a decay coefficient. The second
model was found to be more applicable to the diffusion process.
Characteristic airphoto pattern elements are given for visual interpre-
tation of the photography. Wind velocity, sea state, current velocity,
wave height and diffusion coefficients can be estimated from the aerial
photography.
Key Words: Ocean outfall, aerial photography, remote sensing, marine
disposal, diffusion, water currents.
iii
-------
CONTENTS
Section
I Conclusions
II Recommendations
III Introduction
IV Background
V Rationale
VI Diffusion Studies
VII Sampling Procedures
VIII Dye Patch Studies
IX Data Processing
X Sampling Results
XI Discussion of the Results
XII Summary
XIII Acknowledgments
XIV References
XV Publications
XVI Appendices
1
3
5
7
13
43
47
55
59
77
153
175
179
181
185
187
-------
FIGURES
Page
1. Camera filtered to absorption band of rhodamine WT dye. 8
2. Camera filtered to fluorescence band of rhodamine
WT dye. 8
3. Infrared black and white photo of algal bloom in a lake. 11
4. Infrared black and white photo of a waste plume. 11
5. Spectral distribution of radiant energy. 14
6. Direct sunlight and skylight on a horizontal plane. 17
7. Sunlight reflection from a sloping water surface. 18
8. Light penetration into the sea. 19
9. Typical attenuation coefficients. 21
10. Volume scattering function. 22
11. Variation in the scattering angle. 23
12. Effect of contaminant on the scattering function. 24
13. Light from the sea. 26
14. Depth of light return from the sea. 28
15. Typical spectral signature. 31
16. Geometry of exposure calculation. 32
17. Typical characteristic curve of an aerial positive film. 34
18. Spectral response curves. 37
19. Aerial view of Newport area. 48
20. Sketch of the Newport outfall. 49
21. Multiple camera unit. 53
22. Dye patch on July 7, 1969. 56
23. Data processing flow diagram. 60
vi
-------
24. Waste concentrations from boat sampling on August 12,
1969. 61
25. Surface water temperature on August 12, 1969. 61
26. Water temperature profiles on August 12, 1969. ^2
27. Flow diagram for photographic processing. °
28. Symbolic plots from two flights August 16, 1968. 67
29. Isoconcentration plot, flight on August 16, 1968. ^7
30. Digitizing aerial film. 73
7 3
31. Scanning densitometer.
32. Infrared black and white photo on July 7, 1969. 79
33. Plume on July 8, 1969 at 15:21 from 4000 feet. 79
34. Temperature profiles July 7 and 8, 1969. 80
35. Plume July 8, 1969 at 15:56 from 4000 feet. 81
36. Plot of residuals - 1968. 86
37. Plot of residuals - 1969. 87
38. Comparison of boat and photo values on August 8, 1968. 88
39. Comparison of boat and photo values on August 16, 1968. 89
40. Comparison of boat and photo values July 8, 1969. 90
41. Comparison of boat and photo values August 12, 1969. 91
42. Chart of the outfall area at Newport, Oregon. 99
43. Aerial photo of outfall area on September 9, 1970 from
8000 feet at 14:30. 100
44. Data for September 9, 1970. 101
45. Aerial photo of outfall area on September 23, 1970
from 8000 feet at 15:30. 102
46. Data for September 23, 1970. 103
VII
-------
Page
47. Aerial photo of outfall area on September 30, 1970
from 5000 feet at 14:54. 104
48. Data for September 30, 1970. 105
49. Aerial photo of outfall area on October 7, 1970 from
3000 feet at 14:32. 106
50. Data for October 7, 1970. 107
51. Aerial photo of outfall area on October 12, 1970
from 4000 feet at 14:10. 108
52. Data for October 12, 1970. 109
53. Aerial photo of outfall area December 21, 1970
from 6000 feet at 13:15. 110
54. Data for December 21, 1970. 11:L
55. Aerial photo of outfall area on December 23, 1970
from 3000 feet at 11:25. 112
56. Data for December 23, 1970. 113
57. Aerial photo of outfall area on December 31, 1970
from 3000 feet at 12:10. 114
58. Data for December 31, 1970. 115
59. Aerial photo of outfall area on January 2, 1971
from 4000 feet at 11:40. 116
60. Data for January 2, 1971. 117
61. Aerial photo of outfall area on February 6, 1971
from 6000 feet at 11:55. 118
62. Data for February 6, 1971 AM. 119
63. Aerial photo of outfall area on February 6, 1971
from 4000 feet at 14:18. 12°
64. Data for February 6, 1971 PM. 121
65. Aerial photo of outfall area on March 16, 1971
from 4250 feet at 12:20. 122
viii
-------
Page
66. Data for March 16, 1971. 123
67. Aerial photo of outfall area on March 17, 1971
from 4000 feet at 14:25. 124
68. Data for March 17, 1971. 125
69. Aerial photo of outfall area on March 18, 1971
from 8000 feet at 11:42. 126
70. Data for March 18, 1971. 127
71. Aerial photo of outfall area on March 19, 1971
from 8000 feet at 11:27. 128
72. Data for March 19, 1971 AM. 129
73. Aerial photo of outfall area on March 19, 1971
from 6000 feet at 13:50. 130
74. Data for March 19, 1971 PM. 131
75. Aerial photo of outfall area on March 24, 1971
from 6000 feet at 16:00. 132
76. Data for March 24, 1971. 133
77. Aerial photo of outfall area on April 12, 1971
from 6000 feet at 14:45. 134
78. Data for April 12, 1971. 135
79. Aerial photo of outfall area on April 15, 1971
from 4000 feet at 14:07. 136
80. Data for April 15, 1971. 137
81. Aerial photo of outfall area on April 21, 1971
from 4000 feet at 13:46. 138
82. Data for April 21, 1971. 139
83. Aerial photo of outfall area on April 26, 1971
from 6000 feet at 14:20 140
84. Data for April 26, 1971. 141
85. Aerial photo of outfall area on May 7, 1971
from 4000 feet at 15:13. 142
IX
-------
Page
86. Data for May 7, 1971. 143
87. Aerial photo of outfall area on May 10, 1971
from 4000 feet at 16:10. 144
88. Data for May 10, 1971. 145
89. Aerial photo of outfall area on May 13, 1971
from 6000 feet at 14:10. 146
90. Data for May 13, 1971. !47
91. Aerial photo of outfall area on May 14, 1971
from 4000 feet at 14:48. 148
92. Data for May 14, 1971. 149
93. Photos of sea conditions. 150
94. Plume patterns for a unidirectional transport velocity. 154
95. Isoconcentration plot, August 8, 1968. 155
96. Geometry for a line source in a uniform stream. 153
97. Plots of a source in a uniform stream. 160
98. Potential flow solutions for a line source. 161
99. Isoconcentration plots from diffusion model. 163
100. Typical diurnal thermoclines. 165
101. Development of current velocity profile. 166
102. Mottled photo pattern from surface waves. 173
-------
TABLES
Nci. Page
1 Preliminary diffusion coefficients, flight 1,
August 16, 1968. 70
2 Nonsteady-state diffusion coefficients, August 16, 1968. 71
3. 1968-1969 sampling summary for Newport. 78
4. Summary of the 1968 vertical aerial photography. 83
5. Summary of the 1969 oblique aerial photography. 84
6. Wind scales and sea descriptions. 151
7. Summary of the 1970-71 data. 152
8. Preliminary diffusion coefficients, flight 2,
August 8, 1968. 157
9. Sea state due primarily to wind. 168
10. Sea state due primarily to swell. 169
11. Sea state due to wind and swell. 170
12, Conditions in fully developed seas. 172
XI
-------
SECTION I
CONCLUSIONS
1. Aerial photography provides an effective method for a comprehensive
analysis of the dispersion of wastes that are discharged into the
ocean.
2. Aerial photographs showing the transport and spread of dye patches
will provide detailed design information for evaluating proposed
ocean outfall sites throughout the year.
3. Characteristic airphoto pattern elements can be utilized to esti-
mate wind velocity, sea state, water current velocities and diffusion
coefficients in the nearshore areas.
4. In addition to being technically feasible, aerial photography has
been shown to be an economically feasible method for acquiring ocean
outfall design data prior to discharge.
5. The surface water current is a dominant factor in the resulting
plume pattern. The currents were primarily generated by the wind with
tide playing a minor role.
6. A two dimensional Fickian diffusion model was usually adequate to
explain the resulting plume pattern. The surface spreading of the
waste field was considered in the model by including the equations for
a line source in a uniform stream while vertical diffusion was con-
sidered by including a decay coefficient.
7. There was no indication that the diffusion coefficients varied
to the 4/3 power of the scale.
-------
SECTION II
RECOMMENDATIONS
1. It is recommended that aerial photography be used to obtain in-
formation for evaluation of requests for waste discharge permits that
involve ocean outfalls.
2. It is recommended that aerial photography be used in establishing
surveillance programs and in conducting surveillance programs on
operating waste discharge outfalls.
3. It is recommended that future studies be conducted to establish
the importance of both the vertical diffusion coefficient and the
vertical stability on the waste disposal process. Such a study should
include continuous recording of wind, water current profiles for
several locations, and wave profiles in order to better understand the
response of the sea to the wind forces. The effect of the scale of
the turbulence on the rate of diffusion needs additional study.
4. It is also recommended that a critical analysis of actual field
conditions versus the original design predictions be made for the
several ocean outfalls in Oregon and at Eureka, California. Such a
study will indicate areas of design deficiencies and will improve the
technology of ocean outfall disposal.
-------
SECTION III
INTRODUCTION
The objective of this research is to develop a remote sensing tool for
the evaluation of dispersion of wastes from existing or proposed ocean
outfalls. Photogrammetric and photo interpretation methods are used to
determine dispersion patterns, diffusion coefficients, waste concentra-
tions and nearshore currents. This study is unique in that the aerial
photography is not only used to determine the position of points and
the size of objects as in normal photogrammetry, but the photograph is
also used as an energy sensor. The amount of light reflected from an
object is recorded by the photograph as the film density of the image.
The light scattered from within the sea is measured from the film with
a photo densitometer and can be related to certain water quality
parameters.
An ocean outfall is a pipeline that is used for discharging waste into
the ocean. The pipeline extends into the receiving body of water and
usually terminates with a diffuser section where the flow is divided
into a number of small jets.
The discharging jets of waste are subjected to momentum forces and to
a buoyant force which is proportional to the density difference be-
tween the effluent and the receiving water. As the jet of liquid
rises towards the surface, it mixes with the ambient fluid and both
its momentum and buoyance per unit volume decrease. The mixing
causes a waste field to be formed either at the surface or submerged
below the sea surface depending on the hydrography of the site and
initial dilution.
If there is little density stratification in the receiving water, the
effluent, being less dense than sea water, will rise to the surface to
form a surface waste field. After the initial dilution due to jet
diffusion, the waste is transported from the site by current action
and continues to mix and spread by natural turbulence in the receiving
body.
The conventional method of studying the waste field from an outfall
has been by boat sampling with the tracer technique. The use of this
method for water quality studies has been enhanced by the development
of highly sensitive instruments and new dye tracers during the past
several years.
The use of radioactive tracers has been limited by handling problems
and misunderstanding by the public. The use of fluorescent dyes as
tracers avoids these objections and gives satisfactory results in most
quality studies. Fluorescein dye has been used for the past 50 years
but has the disadvantage of a high photochemical decay rate (Wilson,
1968). Rhodamine B has a low decay rate but tends to adhere to sus-
pended particles. This may result in a low recovery of the dye.
-------
Rhodamine WT and pontacyl pink dyes both have low sorptive tendency,
but the pontacyl pink is about four times as expensive as the rhoda-
mine WT solution.
The general procedure for tracing waste discharged from an existing
outfall is to meter the dye tracer into the pipeline. Complete mix-
ing of the tracer and waste is required. By knowing the tracer injec-
tion rate and the waste discharge rate, the tracer concentration
within the pipeline can be determined. This mixture passes through
the diffusers and forms the waste field. Tracer concentrations in the
waste plume are measured by sampling from a boat. The waste concentra-
tion at any point in the waste field can then be computed from the
samples on the basis of the dye concentration.
Ocean outfall sewers for the disposal of waste along the Pacific
Northwest coastline are, in general, located on the relatively shallow
coastal shelf which is subjected to heavy seas. Sampling from a boat
in these areas is dangerous at all times and impossible much of the
time due to rough water. The use of aerial photography and photo-
grammetric methods presents a possible method for overcoming this
difficulty. From two to eight hours of continuous sampling from a
boat is required to adequately define the waste field in the vicinity
of an ocean outfall. The waste field is usually shifting thus making
a comprehensive study nearly impossible by conventional methods. The
aerial photographic technique presents a method where concentrations
throughout the waste field can be measured in one instant. Consider-
ation of these factors suggest that photogrammetry can be a most
useful tool for water quality investigations. Prior to this time the
use of aerial photography for water quality studies has been limited
to identifying pollution sources, but has not been used for making
quantitative measurements from the photographs.
The field work was conducted at the Georgia-Pacific Kraft pulp mill
outfall at Newport because of its convenient location. This site
provided an additional advantage since the natural color of the
waste effluent was visible on aerial photography. However, the re-
sults of this study are not limited to Kraft pulp mill outfalls. If
the effluent from an outfall has the same light scattering and light
absorption properties as the receiving water, dye can be added to
the effluent to distinguish the waste field from the receiving body
of water,. The natural color characteristics of the Kraft pulp waste
will vary with time while the addition of dye to a colorless waste
will give greater control over the test.
In order to obtain design information at proposed outfall locations,
aerial photography is taken of dye patches. The dye markers are
dropped from the aircraft at selected locations in the waste disposal
area. Current velocities and diffusion coefficients are determined
from the change in position and size of the dye patches between two
photographic flights over the proposed site.
-------
SECTION IV
BACKGROUND
Both the color of the waste and the amount of light scattered from
below the water surface can be recorded on aerial photography. Most
black and white film used today for aerial photography is panchro-
matic film which is sensitive to the 400-70Q1 nm region of the spec-
trum. By using lens filters on the camera, the exposure can be
limited to a selected region of the spectrum. Generally the film-
filter combination is sketched to give maximum contrast between the
object and background. For example, when aerial photography is taken
of a rhodamine WT dye patch in the ocean, high contrast can be ob-
tained by either filtering the camera to the band of maximum light
absorption of the dye or filtering the camera to the maximum fluores-
cence of the dye as shown in figures 1 and 2. For the first case, on
a positive black and white print, the sea would appear light in tone
while the dye patch would appear dark. However, if the camera is
filtered to maximum fluorescence, the dye patch would be light in
tone while the sea would appear dark.
Blue light with a wave length of about 480 nm has the greatest penetra-
tion in the deep ocean waters. In the turbid coastal waters the
greatest penetration occurs at about 530 nm (Jerlov, 1968). As the
composition, size or concentration of particles in the water vary,
the band of greatest penetration and color of the sea may also change.
Photography can, under certain conditions, be used to distinguish
water masses, to delineate current patterns, to identify upwelled
water along the coast and to track river plumes in the ocean.
Color photography divides the visible spectrum into three bands. The
composition of the light is recorded as blue, green, and red colors on
a positive transparency or print. For many applications of aerial
photography the three bands are adequate. However, the color film has
been designed to reproduce a natural land scene which is visually
similar to the original view. The film may not give the best results
possible if it is used for other than its designed purpose. Strandberg
(1966, 1967) of Itek Data Analysis Center has published numerous
examples of color photographs for water quality analysis. In these
examples it was possible to detect the sources of pollution; however,
no attempt was made to measure pollution concentration.
Color infrared film is sometimes called false color film. The blue,
green and red colors on the photograph result from exposures to the
green, red and infrared bands of the spectrum, respectively (Fritz,
1967). Besides military uses, the film has been used extensively in
the detection of disease and insect pests in forest and agriculture
1 -9
Nanometers, 10 meters
-------
Figure 1. Camera filtered to absorption band of rhodamine WT dye.
Figure 2. Camera filtered to fluorescence band of rhodamine WT dye.
-------
crops (American. . ., 1960). It also has been used advantageously in
geological and soils interpretation. When using this film a yellow
filter is needed to eliminate the blue light, thereby reducing the
degrading effect of haze. As skylight reflection on the water surface
is also predominantly blue, infrared color photography of underwater
details will appear clearer than with ordinary color photography.
Generally, the infrared layer on the film is underexposed when photo-
graphing a water body.
Narrow band filters permit the selection of the region of the spectrum
that has minimum interference and maximum subject contrast. Inter-
ference filters have several advantages over absorption filters includ-
ing high peak transmittance and sharp cutoffs. However, the peak wave
length of an interference filter is a function of the angle of inci-
dence of the radiation impinging on the filter. If it is desired to
record essentially the same band or region of the spectrum on the edges
of the frame as in the center of the picture, interference filters can
only be used with cameras having a narrow angle field of view. The
color characteristics of waste from the Kraft pulp process vary causing
the optimum film-filter combinations required to study the effluent
plume to change. The same film-narrow band filter combinations used to
study one waste can probably not be used to study a plume of a differ-
ent waste or to study fluorescent dye concentrations in a dye patch.
Multiband camera systems have been developed by several organizations
(Yost and Wenderoth> 1967; Molineux, 1965). This system has a number
of film-filter combinations to take simultaneous photographs in
several regions in the spectrum. This method not only allows the
selection of several film-filter combinations for optimum results, but
permits the proper exposure of each spectral band. For an example, on
a normal color photograph of the sea, the blue sensitive layer is
generally over exposed while the red sensitive is generally under
exposed. A multiband camera system would allow the proper exposure of
each band.
In research at the Allen Hancock Foundation it was found that high
optical absorbance of millipore-filtered water to light at a wave-
length of 230 nm is related to the concentration of sewage. In their
study (Allen. . ., 1964), the ultraviolet absorbance was suggested as
a possible method of tracing the sewage field by direct sampling with-
out using a tracer. A film sensitive to the ultraviolet region of the
spectrum might be used to trace the sewage field. However, the ultra-
violet is also the region of maximum atmospheric interference.
Infrared film is sensitive to both the blue and infrared regions of
the spectrum. It is, therefore, necessary to use lens filters in
order to limit the exposure to the infrared region. Infrared photog-
raphy will record energy in the 700-900 nm region. At normal
temperatures the energy in this region is predominantly reflected
energy, not emitted energy, and is not related to temperature. Due to
-------
the high attenuation of water in the infrared band, water surfaces on
an infrared black and white photograph will normally appear black. The
high contrast between the water and land is used to advantage when
mapping the water line of a body of water. Algae have high reflectance
in this band and infrared photography is used to monitor blooms. The
photo in figure 3 shows the aerial distribution of the algal bloom in
the lake. Concentration and total mass can be estimated from the
photography. An infrared photo of the waste field from an ocean out-
fall is shown in figure 4. When taking black and white photographs
of water, the exposure is about two stops greater than ordinary land
detail. As a result, the shore in figure 3 and the four boats in
figure 4 are overexposed.
Objects at normal temperature radiate thermal infrared rays at a wave
length greater than can be recorded on ordinary infrared film. Suit-
able equipment is now available for measuring surface water tempera-
tures by remote sensing. Infrared scanning of 4.5 - 5.5 micron
wavelength has been used successfully by the U.S. Geological Survey to
locate fresh water springs in Hawaii (Fisher, Davis, and Sousa, 1966).
In this study the sea water temperature averaged 73.5 degrees F while
the fresh water temperature was between 60 and 70 degrees F. Scanning
in the 8-14 micron wavelength would be most suitable for water surface
temperatures as this is the region of maximum radiation and the region
relatively free of reflected sunlight interference. It is expected
that temperature differences of 0.2 degrees C can be detected by
scanning in this region (Ory, 1965). The temperature of the waste may
provide a suitable tracer for a thermal effluent discharge. For
cooler industrial wastes the use of heat as a tracer is unlikely since
the thermal resolution of the scanning equipment is about the same
magnitude as the expected maximum difference in temperature within the
waste field. In the ocean, vertical thermal stratification will exist
under certain conditions. Warm wastes discharged from the diffuser
of an ocean outfall will mix with the colder subsurface water and by
the time the mixture reaches the surface, the resulting plume tempera-
ture may be greater than, less than, or equal to the surrounding
ocean temperature.
Surface currents have been measured successfully with aerial photog-
raphy by a number of investigators. The Coast and Geodetic Survey has
been using aerial photography to measure surface tidal currents for
more than ten years (Keller, 1963). Waldichuk (1966) found long strips
of buoyant paper provided an economical target for surface current
measurement as long as the sea was not so rough that the paper would
buckle and twist. A study by the Water Pollution Research Board of
England (1964) indicated that drift cards released over the outlet of
an ocean outfall did not in general follow the sewage field but were
deflected by the wind; however, drift poles and surface floats with
drogues at about five feet did follow the waste plume.
Romanousky (1966), from the Center for Oceanographic Research and
Studies in Paris, has studied diffusion of wastewaters by photographing
10
-------
Figure 3. Infrared black and white photo of algal bloom in a lake.
Figure 4. Infrared black and white photo of a waste plume.
11
-------
dye releases from a balloon. Fresh water with rhodamine B or fluores-
cein dye added was pumped through a pipe to the bottom of the sea. The
fresh water discharge rose to the surface where it spread under the in-
fluence of surface mixing and was then photographed. Ichiye and
Plutchak (1966) of Columbia University have taken aerial photographs of
rhodamine B dye patches and have found that the dye concentrations
measured by a shipborne Turner fluorometer correlated very well with
densitometer readings on the aerial negative.
Scherz (1967) at the University of Wisconsin has conducted work on
pollution detection with aerial photography. In this work, aerial
photographs were taken of various pollution sources using different
film-filter combinations and the optimum film-filter was selected by
visual observation. Cornell Aeronautical Laboratory (Neumaier et al.,
1967) under project Aqua-Map has conducted studies on the reflectance
of various polluted waters using test panels submerged below the water
surface. Both laboratory studies with reflection spectrometer and
field surveys with aerial cameras have been conducted. Their study
indicated that industrial waste effluents can in some cases be identi-
fied photographically.
12
-------
SECTION V
RATIONALE
Photographic films used in aerial photography are sensitive to the
visible and near visible light. The main source of this light is the
sun. Both the amount and composition of the light scattered from
within the water are utilized in the study to determine the waste
concentration in the effluent plume. The amount of light is recorded
as the film density of the photographic image while the composition of
the scattered light is determined from the film-filter combinations
used for the photography. If the light scattering or light absorp-
tion properties of a waste are a function of the wave length of light,
the ratio of the light return in the band of maximum absorption is a
sensitive indicator of the waste concentration. However, if the waste
is either black or white, the difference in the light returned in two
bands divided by the sum will provide a sensitive indicator of the
waste concentration. By using the ratio of light returned, the
relationship between the film densities and the waste or dye concen-
tration will be simplified as shown in the following sections.
Sun Energy
Energy from the sun passes through the atmosphere to the sea. Upon
reaching the water surface, the radiation is either reflected or trans-
mitted through this interface. The refracted light is transmitted,
scattered, or absorbed in the sea. Some of the scattered light is
directed upwards and passes through the sea-air interface. A part of
the light emerging from the sea reaches the aerial camera and exposes
the photographic film.
The upper limit of the atmosphere receives energy at an average rate
of about 0.135 watts per square cm perpendicular to the radiation.
This value fluctuates about ±5% during a yearly period due to the
eccentricity of the earth's orbit about the sun. The extraterrestrial
energy spectrum of the sun's radiation is shown in figure 5 (Hutchin-
son, 1957).
The normal spectrum of solar radiation that reaches the sea surface is
also shown in figure 5. Solar radiation, when passing through the
atmosphere, is reduced by scattering and absorption. The amount of
radiation received at the earth's surface (H) 2 can be estimated by
H = H exp(-KL) (1)
where K is the attenuation coefficient which varies with wave length,
H is the incoming radiation at the outer atmosphere and L is the
Terms in this chapter are defined where first used. Definition of
these terms are also listed in Appendix A.
13
-------
.7
.6'
C9
UJ .4'
.3'
.2-
.1-
0
A- Solar energy distribution
outside atmospere
B-Approximate distribution in
direct solar radiation
at ground
.2 .4
Ultra-
violet
.6 .8 1.0 1.2 1.4
Visible Near Infra-Red
1.6
Figure 5. Spectral distribution of radiant energy.
14
-------
light path length (Elterman and Toolin, 1965).
Absorption of light depends on the composition of the air, mainly water
vapor, carbon dioxide and ozone, and the wave length of light. It can
be seen in figure 5, that there are several zones of selective absorp-
tion. The ultraviolet part of the sun's radiation with a wave length
of 290 nm or less is completely cut off by the atmospheric ozone layer
and oxygen before it reaches the earth's surface. In the near infra-
red region (0.7 to 5 microns), the selective absorption is primarily
due to water vapor and carbon dioxide (Holter, 1967).
The attenuation depends not only on the turbidity in the atmosphere
but also on the length of path through the atmosphere. The length of
the light path varies approximately as the secant of the zenith angle
(i). Hence, the zenith angle (i) is involved in reducing illumination
in two ways. First, the intensity on a horizontal surface is cos(i)
times the intensity on a plane normal to the radiation. Second, the
path traversed by radiation through the atmosphere is greater for large
angles than for the small angles. The irradiance on a horizontal plane
at sea surface is
H = H cos(i) exp(-Asec(i)) (2)
where A is the extinction optical thickness and includes Rayleigh
attenuation, aerosol attenuation, and ozone absorption for a standard
atmosphere (Elterman and Toolin, 1965).
In clean, dry, air, molecular scattering is of primary importance.
The scattering of very small particles of molecular dimensions is in-
versely proportional to the fourth power of the wavelength (Jensen,
1968) and, therefore, affects the shorter wavelengths more than the
longer wavelengths. This is the reason most black and white aerial
photography is taken with the minus-blue filter. As the particle
sizes in the atmosphere increase, the wavelength of maximum scatter
becomes less selective and extends into the green, yellow, etc.,
regions of the spectrum. Hence, the color of the sky changes toward
cloud white as the particles increase from molecular to aerosol size.
As a result, aerial photography taken under turbid atmospheric con-
ditions requires filtering out of more of the spectrum, including
green and possibly yellow light to produce a noticeable effect
(Tarkington, 1966). Photographs taken in the near infrared wave-
lengths are better able to penetrate haze.
Light Reflection
Since the reflected light from the water surface will not contribute
information on the material in the water, it should be reduced to a
minimum. The incident light includes both direct sunlight and dif-
fused skylight. The reflection of direct sunlight will be partially
polarized and can be reduced from exposing the film by the proper
15
-------
orientation of a polarized filter. On a cloudless day, the skylight
will be predominantly blue and the surface reflection of diffused
light can be reduced with a minus blue filter. Figure 6 shows the
effect of the sun's altitude on the irradiance of skylight and direct
sunlight (Jones and Condit, 1948).
The height of the sun above the horizon is critical for vertical aerial
photography of a water surface. The maximum height determines the
amount of reflected light reaching the film while the minimum height
determines light penetration into the sea. If the sea surface were
calm, a single mirror-like reflection of the sun would appear. As
the sea surface is generally not smooth, the zenith angle of the sun
must be greater than half the angular coverage of the camera to avoid
photographing the sun spot glare. The width of the glitter pattern
about the sun's reflection is an indication of the maximum slope of the
sea surface. Cox and Munk (1955) have studied roughness of the sea
surface by analyzing photographs of the sun's glitter. As shown in
figure 7, a sloping water surface will require that the minimum zenith
angle of the sun be at least half the angular coverage of the aerial
camera plus twice the water surface slope if vertical photography is
to be free of sun's glare. The slope of waves can vary from 0° to
over 90° for breaking waves. It is, therefore, necessary to select
a reasonable value of slope which will eliminate most of the sun
spot glare for the expected sea conditions during photography. Studies
(Cox and Munk, 1954) have indicated that for a 3-knot wind the maxi-
mum slope is about 15° and about 25° for an 18-knot wind. For photo-
graphing underwater objects Faas (1960) suggests that the slope 18.5°
be used. This would indicate that the sun's zenith angle at the time
of photography be at least 37° plus half the angular coverage of the
aerial camera, if the sun's glitter is to be avoided on vertical
photography. An alternate solution is to mount the camera to take
oblique photography.
The light reaching the water surface is either reflected from or re-
fracted through the air-sea interface. As shown in figure 8, the
incident light (H ) is divided into that which penetrates the sea
(H ) and that which is reflected from the interface. If i is the
angle of incidence of the incoming radiation and j is the angle of
refraction, then sin(i)/sin(j) is equal to the index of refraction for
water or about 4/3. The reflectivity of an optically flat water
surface is theoretically obtained for unpolarized light from Fresnel's
law (Jerlov, 1968) which gives the ratio (p ) of reflected energy to
incoming radiation and is
tan (i+j) sin (i+j)
where the ^erms inside the brackets are for the components of light
parallels and perpendicular to the plane of incidence. A plot of the
percent reflectivity for angles of incidence from 0 to 90 degrees is
16
-------
Direct Sunlight
10 20 30 40 50 60 7O 80 90
Solar Altitude (90°-i)
Figure 6. Direct sunlight and skylight on a horizontal plane.
17
-------
QJ
O
Cfl
CD
00
fi
•H
04
o
s
o
S-i
M-l
fi
o
•rl
4J
O
0)
H
M-l
d)
C
3
I—
-------
Hs
100
u
£50
C9
o:
o
Calm
_Rough Sea
Surface
0 20 40 60 80
Figure 8. Light penetration into the sea.
19
-------
shown in figure 8. It can be seen that the reflectivity increases
rapidly when the angle of incidence exceeds 60 degrees. The irradi-
ance (H ) below the sea surface and normal to the beam is
w
Hw = (1 - pa) Hs sec(j) (4)
Light Attenuation in the Sea
The radiation that penetrates the surface of the sea is progressively
diminished by extinction as it travels through the water. The attenua-
tion of light is caused by scattering and absorption. By applying
Lambert's and Beer's laws for monochromatic light the intensity HZ at
some depth z below the sea surface is given by
Hz = HW exp(-Cz sec(j)) (5)
C = a + bW (6)
where C is the attenuation coefficient for sea water and waste, 'a' is
the sea water attenuation coefficient, b is the waste absorption coeffi-
cient and W is the waste concentration. The attenuation coefficients
for sea water and Kraft pulp waste are shown in figure 9. Minimum
attenuation of sea water occurs at about 540 nm while the minimum for
the waste is about 700 nm.
Light Scattering in the Sea
The attenuation coefficients of both sea water and the waste can be
divided into attenuation due to absorption and attenuation due to
scattering. The scattering of light in a turbid medium is caused by
reflection and diffraction light rays by small particles of suspended
matter and colloidal solutions. As in the atmosphere, if the size of
the particles is small compared to the wavelength of light, then the
intensity of the scattering light is inversely proportional to the
wavelength to the ntn power. The exponent n decreases with increasing
particle size from the value of four for pure water to approaching zero
for coarse suspended matter (Jensen, 1968). Thus for solutions with
small particles, the blue light has the maximum scatter, while for
solutions with larger particles all colors are scattered about, the same
amount.
By definition of the volume scattering function 3(a), the scattered
light intensity (dJ) from an incremental volume dV is
dJ = Hz3(a)dV (7)
where a is the angle between the incident beam and the scattered light.
Figure 10 shows the variation in the volume scattering function for both
sea water and pure water (Jerlov, 1964). It can be seen that the curve
20
-------
1.1
1.0
£.9
.8
.6
(J
1-5
rd
EM
£.3
.2
.1
Hz= Hw
bw)z sec( j))
0 400
z = depth in meters
w = waste concentration ml/I
j = angle of refraction
a)
Water
from
The Oceans
500 600 700
Wavelength
800 nm
Figure 9. Typical attenuation coefficients.
21
-------
10°
io2
103
10
\=465 nm
0°
40°
80
120° 160°
a
Figure 10. Volume scattering function.
for pure water is symmetrical with a minimum at ex equal to 90 degrees.
The scattering function for sea water varies greatly with a.
The variation of the scattering angle (a) on an aerial photograph is
shown in figure 11. The angle between the incoming direct light in the
sea and the scattered light reaching the camera changes with position;
hence, the intensity of scattered light from below the sea surface will
also vary. For a vertical photograph taken with a 6-inch aerial camera
when the sun's zenith angle is 55 degrees, the angle "a" would vary
from about 110 degrees to 170 degrees.
Figure 12 is a plot of data taken from work by Tyler and Richardson
(1958). In this study a nephelometer was used to measure the radiant
intensity scattered from a volume for various scattering angles (ex) . A
22
-------
00
c
cfl
00
c
•H
o
CO
C
•H
O
•H
4J
cfl
•H
J-i
cfl
Q)
S-i
3
00
•H
23
-------
£40
c
o
u30
If 20
Q:
0 123456
Contaminant Concentration
7
8
0
100'
120° 140°
Observation Angle (a)
Figure 12. Effect of contaminant on the scattering function.
24
-------
contaminant of skim milk was added at various concentrations. The light
scattering for the various solutions is directly related to concentra-
tion of the contaminant.
For scattering by large particles, the intensity of the scattered light
is proportional to the particle surface area that is exposed to the
incident beam (Jerlov, 1968). If the particle size is uniform, then
the intensity of the scattered light is proportional to the waste con-
centration. In the upper plot in figure 12 the volume scattering
function is shown as a linear function of the waste concentration. From
the lower plot in figure 12, it can be seen that the function 3 (a) can
be approximated by
B(a) = 3Q(a)(l + K'W) (8)
where $ (a) is the volume scattering function of the sea water, K1 is
a constant for a particular waste and W is the waste concentration.
As shown in figure 13, if R is the distance from the volume element
(dV) to the point where the scattered light strikes the surface and
dfi is the solid angle formed at the surface by dV, then
dV = R2 dfidR (9)
In addition, the emerging ray of scattered light from the incremental
volume will be augmented by diffused light of almost uniform intensity
in all directions. As the intensity of the light which is scattered
for the second time, will be approximately three orders of magnitude
less than that of the direct lighting, the addition of the rescattered
light to the emerging ray will not be considered. The intensity of
the emerging ray dJ will be reduced by the absorption and scattering of
the water and particles. From the inverse square law, the irradiance
from the scattering volume incident on a normal plane to the beam at
the surface is
dH = -^ exp(-CR) (10)
By combining equations and integrating, the irradiance at the surface
is
cos(i) (1 - pa) exp(-A sec(i))dfi
a cos(i~) cos(j)
(1 + K'W) exp(-(a+bW)(sec(j) + sec(i2»z) dz (11)
If the waste concentration is a known function of the depth (z), then
equation 11 can be integrated numerically. However, if the waste field
forms a relatively stable layer at the surface and the waste concentra-
25
-------
to
0)
6
o
60
•H
26
-------
tion is approximately uniform throughout the depth of this layer,
then equation 11 can be integrated directly.
If the waste concentration is not a function of depth and
exp(-(a + bW) z(sec(j) + sec(i2) approaches zero, equation 11 reduces
to
(1 + K'W) HoB (a) cos(i)(l - pa) exp(-A sec(i))
a ~ (a+bW) cos(i2) cos(j)(sec(i?) + sec(j))
Evaluation of exp(-Cz(sec(j) + sec(i2))) is shown in figure 12 for the
green, red, and infrared regions of the spectrum. The expression was
evaluated for values of the angles j and io other than those listed
in figure 14; however, the expression was relatively insensitive to
changes in these angles. Average values of attenuation coefficients
were selected from figure 9. It can be seen from the upper plot in
figure 14 that 90% of the light returned in the infrared region is
from the upper half meter of water. In the red and green bands the
depth above which 90% of the light is returned is a function of the
waste concentration. From the lower plot in figure 14, it can be seen
that in the open sea 50% of the light in the red and green bands is
returned from the upper two and four meters, respectively.
Radiance from the Sea
From equation 12 the radiance (Nw) from the scattering volume below
the sea surface is
Nw = dt (13)
The light spreads into a larger solid angle when passing through the
sea-air interface (Jerlov, 1968) and the radiance in air is
Na = ^| (1 - pw) (14)
n
where n is the refractive index of water and pw is the reflectivity of
light at the interface.
In addition to the upward radiance from the sea, the light reaching
the photographic sensor includes skylight reflection, direct sunlight
reflection and path radiance intensity. Reflectance of skylight from
a rough sea surface can be approximated by a Lambert reflector while
the direct sunlight is reflected specularly. Skylight radiance
reflected from the surface is given by
N sky = ps HTrSky (15)
27
-------
7.5
c
L.
Z5
-+->
QL
Percent Light Return
(1-exp(-CZ(sec(j)
i2=10°
j -30°
5 10 15 20
Waste Concentration
25
ml/I
30
0
5 10 15 20
Waste Concentration
25
ml/I
30
Figure 14. Depth of light return from the sea.
28
-------
where ps is reflectivity of the skylight and was found by Burt (1953)
to be approximately 0.066. The skylight irradiance (Hsky) is a func-
tion of solar altitude, atmospheric scattering and wave length of light.
Path radiance intensity is a function of the length of sight ray,
angle between sight and sun rays, atmospheric condition and wave length.
For a clear atmosphere, skylight irradiance will be due predominantly
to Rayleigh scattering and will have greatest influence on the shorter
wave lengths. The reflection of direct sunlight is mathematically
easier to estimate in magnitude by Fresnel's equations but its direction
is difficult to predict without knowing the surface configuration of
the sea. Since the Fresnel's equations are nearly independent of wave
length, the magnitude of direct sunlight reflection will be proportion-
al to each other in spectral bands of the sensor.
If N is the radiance from the sea surface and the path radiance is
neglected then the radiance at the sensor is
Nc = N exp(-E sec(J2)) (16)
where E is the extinction optical thickness for the attenuation by the
atmosphere from the sea to the camera. E is, therefore, a function of
flying height and wave length. N includes the skylight reflection
(N sky) , direct sunlight reflection (Nd) , and upward radiance from the
sea and the waste (Na) or
N = Nsky + Nd + Na (17)
By combining equations 12, 13, 14, 15, and 17 the radiance N is equal
to
(1 - pw)(l + K'W)g (a) Ho exp(-A sec(i)) cos(i)(l - pa)
- . - 2 -
n (a + bW) cos(j) cos(i~) (sec(i?) + sec(j))
The first term on the right is the skylight reflection, the second
term is direct sunlight reflection and the last term is the uplighting
from the sea (Na) .
Equation 18 can be expanded by writing the equation for each of the
spectral bands. The subscripts g and r refer to the bands of maximum
absorption and scatter, respectively.
H skv (1 + K'W)
Ng = Vs -P + SNd + V (6XP(-Ag Sec(1)))a +b W Bo(a)
& o
29
-------
Hskv (1 + KrW)
Nr = K7PS -r" + K8Nd + V (eXP('Ar ^c(i)))a +/w B (a) (20)
r r
A typical spectral signature of both the open sea and the waste field
is shown in figure 15. The effect of skylight, direct sunlight, and
waste on the spectral signature is shown in the figure. Whenever
possible direct sunlight reflection from the water surface should be
avoided as it will cause interference with the data processing. Hence,
the second term on the right of the three equations is zero. As sky-
light is predominantly blue
K4 - 0, K? ~ 0
Rewriting equations 19 and 20
(1 + K'W)
Ng = V a + b\ eXp(-Ag sec(i)) (21)
(1 + K'W)
Nr = K9Y + b^ exP("Ar sec(i)) (22)
r r
Where Y is a constant for the two bands at a point on the photograph
and is equal to
H (1 - pw)(l - pa) cos(i)3 (a)
Y = -2 ^ (23)
n cos(j) cos(i?)(sec(i2) + sec(j))
The Y term can be eliminated by taking the ratio (Rp) of the radiance
in the two bands
1 + K'W a + b W
R = Kin T 4. vTIT S . uST7 exp(-(A_ - A ) sec(i)) (24)
p 10 1 + K W ar + brW r g
where K..,. is a constant.
1 + K'W
•v*
- 77777 is the scattering coefficient ratio and shows the effect of
1 + K W
g
scattering on the composition of the scattered light. As the particle
size is relatively large compared to the wavelength of light, the
scattered light is of nearly the same composition as the incident light.
Therefore, this term is approximately equal to one.
30
-------
u
c
Spectral Signature
of Waste Field'
Signature
of Sea
Direct Sun
Light Reflection
I
400 500 600 700
A in nm
Figure 15. Typical spectral signature.
a + b W
The term ° ° represents the change in light composition due to
r r
the selective absorption of the waste and the sea water.
exp(-(A - A ) sec(i)) is the atmospheric attenuation ratio and
shows
the effect of the sun's altitude on the incident light composition.
From equation 24, the ratio at the sea surface (Rph) is
a + b W
Rph = Rp exp((Ar - A ) sec(i)) = K aS + b§y (25)
g ar r
photographic Measurement of Light
The aerial photograph is a light detector and can be used to measure
the light return from objects. As shown in figure 16, J2 is the angle
between the ray to the camera and the vertical. If the angle between
31
-------
Figure 16. Geometry of exposure calculation.
-------
the ray and the camera axis is represented by c, then by geometry
dA = dA'
Z£
f
cos(c)
cos(J2)
(26)
where dA is the area on the sea surface included in the densitometer
aperture area dA' on the photographic film, Zo is the flying height
and f is the focal length of the camera. The solid angle subtended by
the lens of diameter D is
D cos(j2)
Zo
cos(c)
The radiant flux (dp1) collected by the camera lens is
dp' = N dA cos(j9) dfi
(27)
(28)
The irradiance of the film image is
, , TR N cos (c)
H' = ^=K17 L—2
QA X (FNO)
(29)
where K „ is a constant, FNO is the relative aperture of the lens
(f/D), TR is the lens transmittance and N is the object radiance
at the camera.
The photographic exposure (EX) is the product of image irradiance (H')
or the rate at which energy is incident upon a unit area of the film
and the time (TIM) during which it acts. The equation
EX = H' x TIM
(30)
indicates that there are many combinations of H' and TIM that will
give the same exposure. This is known as the Reciprocity Law and is
correct for normal aerial photography where extremes in exposure
times are not employed.
The density of a film is defined as the common logarithm of the re-
ciprocal of the transmittance or the logarithm of the ratio of inci-
dent light on the film and the transmitted light through the film. The
relationship between film density and exposure is shown by the charac-
teristic curves of a film. The curve is a plot of log exposure against
film density for a particular development. A typical characteristic
curve is shown in figure 17 (American..., 1968).
The characteristic curve can be divided in three parts; the lower
part of the curve AB which is concaved upward is known as the toe, the
33
-------
3
l
B
0
-3
-2 -1
Log Exposure
0
Figure 17. Typical characteristic curve of an aerial positive film.
the straight line portion of the curve EC, and the top part of the
curve CD which is concaved downward and is known as the shoulder re-
gion. The toe of the characteristic curve approaches a horizontal line
at some value of density greater than zero. This value represents the
density of the base of the film.
The slope of the straight line portion of the characteristic curve is
known as the film gamma. The greater the gamma the greater the con-
trast or the greater the difference in densities on a given photograph.
The gamma is a characteristic of the film but varies within limits
with different development time. The speed or exposure index of the
film is indicated by the horizontal position of the characteristic
curve along the exposure axis.
If the exposure of the film is on the straight line portion of the D
or E curve, then the film density can be expressed by
-------
D(x, y) = M + G In (EX) (31)
D(x, y) is the film density at the point on the photo with film coordi-
nates x and y, M is a constant representing the film speed, G is the
gamma or contrast of the film and EX is the exposure.
Combining equations 30 and 31 and solving for the image irradiance
H' = ~- exp((D(x,y) - M)/G) (32)
The radiance from the sea as measured at the camera station is deter-
mined from equations 29 and 32
K , (FNO)2 exp((D(x, y) - M)/G)
N = — (33)
C (TIM)(TR) cos (c)
By including the atmospheric attenuation, but neglecting light path
radiance in the atmosphere, the radiance at the sea surface (N) is
equal to
K (FNO)2
N = — T exp(D(x,y)/G + E sec(j2))
(TIM)(TR) cos (c)
(34)
where the term exp(-M/G) has been included in the constant (Ki5). The
factor exp(E sec(J2)) compensates for the atmospheric attenuation of
the light from the sea surface to the camera. Writing equation 34 for
two spectral bands:
K (FNO)2 exp(D (x,y)/G + E sec(J2))
N = — s J* g (35)
S (TIM)(TR ) cos (c)
O
K (FNO)2 exp(D (x,y)/G_ + E sec(j?))
N = — ~ — (36)
r (TIM)(TR ) cos (c)
The ratio (R) of the radiance in the two bands is obtained by dividing
equation 36 by 35
N
R = TT = K19 exP((Mx>y)/Gr ~ D (x,y))/G + (E - E ) sec(j )) (37)
p IN _L;/ L Lg g L g £-
For the color films used on this project the gamma (G) was nearly the
same in the spectral bands. As in equation 25, the value of Rph is
35
-------
defined as
Rph = R exp(A - A )sec(i)
= K exp((D (x,y)/G - D (x,y))A; + (E - E ) sec(j?)
J-J L L g g L g Z
+ (A - A ) sec(i)) (38)
where angle i is the angle of incidence for the direct sunlight and A
and Ag are the extinction optical thickness of a standard atmosphere
for the maximum absorption and scatter bands respectively.
If Rpho is the ratio of the radiance from the sea for the two bands
where no waste is present and this value is adjusted for the atmospher-
ic attenuation as in equation 38, Rpho can be estimated by the follow-
ing regression model for any point on the photograph.
Rpho = BQ + Bj^ SUNR + e (39)
In this equation B~ and B.. are regression coefficients to be deter-
mined by a least squares fit of the model to the data points outside
the waste field. SUNR is the angle between the ray from the sea to
the camera station and the direct sunlight reflected from a horizontal
surface.
The ratio anomaly (RA) is defined as
RA = Rph - Rpho (40)
and is the variation in the ratio of two bands of light returned from
within the sea due to the presence of waste. The value of the ratio
anomaly is determined from equations 38 and 39 .
Waste Concentrations from Aerial Photography
The relationship between the photographic value RA and the concentra-
tion W can be developed from equation 25 as
(a b - a b )W
- K
10 a(r + brW)
Evaluation of the term in the brackets of equation 41 is shown in
figure 18. The relationship between the photographic value RA and
the waste concentration is a function of the sea water attenuation
coefficients and the waste absorption coefficients. Average values of
these coefficients were selected from figure 9. The upper curve in
figure 18 is for the ratio of red to green radiance. For comparison
36
-------
f(a,b) =
(arbg- agbr)W
_
arbrW
Curve No.
1
2
3
Band Subscripts
r g
red green
infrared green
infrared red
Evaluated For
green at 550nm
red at 650 nm
infrared at 75Onm
03"
0
10 15 20 25
Waste Concentration mi/1
Figure 18. Spectral response curves,
37
-------
two other curves were included. The lower curve is for the ratio of
infrared to red and the center curve is for the ratio of infrared to
green. While the ratio of red to green radiance is the most sensitive
to changes in waste concentration, it is also the ratio with the
greatest interference to skylight reflection and light path radiance.
Curves such as those shown in figure 18 are useful in predicting the
response of different film-filter combinations for measuring waste
concentrations; however, interference must be considered. If the two
regions of the spectrum are measured with two cameras, the camera set-
tings can be adjusted for optimum exposure in each band. By using high
contrast, developer and/or film, the sensitivity of the film density to
the waste concentration can be increased.
From equation 41 the waste concentration can be expressed as
W =
(RA) + C2(RA) + ...
(42)
where GI and C are coefficients. A stepwise regression analysis of
this model has shown that only the first two terms are significant.
The F level to enter the first term ranges between 500 to 1000 while
the F level to enter the second term generally ranges from 1 to 5.
Photographic Orientation
Photographic orientation is accomplished by a non-linear solution to
the collinearity condition equations (Keller and Tewinkel, 1966).
Corrections are generally not required for atmospheric refraction,
earth curvature, film shrinkage or lens distortion. The relationship
between photo coordinates and ground coordinates is
x - x
P 0
yp - yo
- f
= K[RM]
X
P
Y
P
Z
P
- Y
c
- Y
c
- Z
c
(43)
where x and y are photo coordinates of image point p, f is the camera
focal length, x and y are photo coordinates of the principal point,
K is a scale factor, the X, Y, and Z subscripted p and c refer to
ground coordinates of the object and camera station respectively, KM is
the rotational matrix. The matrix is defined as
IBM] =
mil m!2 m!3
m21 m22 m23
m31 m32 m33
(44)
38
-------
where
mil = cos(4>) cos(K )
3.
m!2 = cos(W ) sin(K ) + sin(W ) sin() cos(K )
O 3- O cl
m!3 = sin(W ) sin(K ) - cos(W ) sin(<(>) cos(K )
O cl O SL
m21 = -cosW sin(K )
m22 = cos(W ) cos(K ) - sin(W ) sin(4>) sin(K )
O 3. O 3.
m23 = sin(W ) cos(K ) + cos(W ) sin()
o
m33 = cos(W ) cos()
The three parameters W , cj> and K are the photographic rotations about
o a
the X, Y and Z axis, respectively.
The collinearity equations are obtained by dividing the first and
second rows of equation 43 by the third row hereby eliminating the
scale factor.
x - x mil (X -X ) + m!2 (Y -Y ) + m!3 (Z -Z )
-JB ° = P c P c P c (45)
-f m31 (X -X ) + m32 (Y -Y ) + m33 (Z -Z ) ^ DJ
p c p c7 p c'
y - y m21 (X -X ) + m22 (Y -Y ) + m23 (Z -Z )
12 _£ = P z P z P c
-f m31 (X -X ) + m32 (Y -Y ) + m33 (Z -Z ) v '
p c' P c' P c'
These equations insure that the camera station, image and object lie on
a straight line. For each point two collinearity equations can be
written. As there are six unknowns (X >^c'^c'^o' $ arid K) a minimum of
three noncollinear control points are required for their solution.
However, a least squares solution permits the use of an unlimited
number of control points.
Solution to the equations is obtained based on a set of initial approx-
imations which are adjusted iteratively until the adjustments become
small. The collinearity equations are linearized by the Taylor series
with the expansion terminated at the first derivative.
When the initial approximations of B. are close to the actual
39
-------
parameters values (B)
f(B) = F(BJ + T 2±gU- AB, (47)
Letting Y = f(B) - f(B.) (48)
then Y = T Z. AB. + e
1=1 X 1
which is a linear form of the collinearity equations. The least
squares solution in matrix notation is
B = [Z^r1 ZTY (50)
The initial approximations of the parameters (B.) are replaced by
This iterative process is continued until the solution converges, that
is, until all AB's are less than some prespecified amount. In this
space resection problem no test is made on the linear adjustments but
solution is terminated when the angular adjustments are less than
about two seconds of arc.
By knowing the photo orientation, it is possible to determine the
position vectors for any point on the photograph. The position vector
(X) based on the state plane coordinate system axis is related to the
photographic vector (X ) by the equation
X = [RM]'1^ (52)
The ground coordinate of any point on the photograph can be computed
from the unit position vector and the camera station coordinate
determined from the photographic orientation.
In order to compute the required angle between this position vector
and the light rays, the sun's position must be determined. The alti-
tude (h) and azimuth (Az) from true north of the sun are determined
from
sin(h) = sin(L) sin(D) + cos(L) cos(D) cos(t) (53)
40
-------
Tan(Az) = sin(t)/(cos(L) tan(D) - sin(L) cos(t)) (54)
where L = latitude
D = declination of the sun
t = hour angle of the sun
The vector representation of the light ray from the sun is
X = cos(h) sin(AZ)i + cos(h) cos(AZ) j - sin(h) k (55)
s
AZ represents the azimuth of the sun from grid north and differs from
the azimuth from true north by the state plane coordinate mapping angle.
The position vector as defined by equation 52 and the sun ray vector as
defined by equation 55 are based on the same coordinate system.
41
-------
SECTION VI
DIFFUSION STUDIES
Numerous investigators have employed solutions to the diffusion equa
tions for the estimation of waste concentrations in the waste plume
that occurs at an outfall location. If the scale of the current
eddies is much smaller than the dimensions of the waste field, then
the Fickian form of diffusion equation can be applied. The basic
equation is :
iK _ 3 ( ^W 3_ ,n 3W x . 3_ , D .3Ws r !_ ,„ wx
3T ~ "3Y C 3Y)+ 3X CDx3XJ 3Z Cz 3Z} " L 3Y CVyW'
+ x (VxW) + z (VZW) ] + S <56)
where V is velocity, W is waste concentration, D is eddy diffusivity.
The first three terms on the right are the diffusion terms, the next
three are convection terms and S represents the sources and sinks.
Solutions to the equations have required various assumptions such as
steady state condition, no vertical or longitudinal mixing and unidi-
rectional transport velocity in the x direction. With these assump-
tions, the equation becomes:
TT 8W 3 /T_ 9W-. I7 /r-7\
Vx W = W (Dy 3Y> + aW (57)
Where "a" is a first order decay constant and "aW" represents a sink or
loss in the system.
Investigators such as Pearson (1955-1967) , Brooks (1960) and others
have reported solutions to the diffusion equation for various condi-
tions. Pearson points out that for point and line sources, steady
unidirectional current, uniform mixing of the waste over a depth, d
and continuous uniform flow from the source, solutions to the diffusion
equation in terms of the minimum dilution, Som, along the centerline
axis of the waste sea water plume are as follows:
Point Source
2.35
where Som is the minimum dilution along axis of waste plume at distance
X from source; D is the assumed diffusivity, ft^/sec; X is the
distance from source, feet; Vx is the average velocity of water mass,
ft/sec; Q is the waste discharge, MGD; and d is the assumed mixing
depth, ft.
43
-------
Including the decay function for bacterial dieaway for disappearance,
and expressing the waste concentration in terms of coliform concen-
tration, the above expression becomes:
0.425 QC
MPN = ° (59)
d/D V X exp(aXV )
y x x
where MPN is the most probable number of organisms per ml on plume
centerline at X; C0 is the concentration of organisms in waste, MPN/ml;
and a is the bacterial dieaway (decay) constant, sec~l.
Line Source
0.622 V bd
v
Som = Q erf [(b/4) /Vx/D X ] (60)
where b is equal to the width of diffuser source, feet and
1.55 Q C erf [(b/4) /V /D X ]
b d V exp (aX/V ) (61)
X X
Pearson (1967) further points out that: "The above equations assume a
constant eddy diffusivity; correspondingly, the value of Dy employed
must be representative of the overall or average scale of the diffusion
phenomenon.
Brooks has reported a solution to the diffusion equation with a var-
iable coefficient of diffusivity. It is assumed that the diffusivity
coefficient, D , varies as the four-thirds power of the scale of the
V / / *}
diffusion phenomenon, D = a I4' , where a is a constant. Brooks'
equation for a line source is as follows:
C = C e~at erf
m o
2BX/(3b))3-l
3/2 (62)
Where:
C = initial coliform concentration
o
C = maximum coliform concentration at time, t
m x
t = time of travel = —
x
12D
44
-------
a = decay constant
D = eddy diffusivity at source (X = 0)
b = initial width of sewage field
Considering the foregoing solutions to the diffusion equation, the four
characteristics of the receiving waters which have the major effect on
waste concentration are the following:
1. V , average current speed
X
2. D , eddy diffusivity
3. d, average mixing depth
4. a, decay or dieaway constant of pollutant
The Allen Hancock Foundation conducted an investigation on the dilution
and dispersion of a waste field in the sea (1965). In their study
rhodamine B dye was introduced as slugs from a point source, continuous
plume from a point source and continuous plume from a volume source.
Dye concentration was measured with a Turner fluorometer. The mathe-
matical models used for analysis of data were statistical models based
on Gaussian distribution. The basic three-dimensional model for the
dye slug was
W(x,y,z,t) =
M
r- 2- 2- 2-.1/2
[a a a ]
x y z
exp -
X
2o
- 2
(63)
where W is the average concentration of a point X, Y, Z, and time t,
M is the amount of dye initially discharged from an instantaneous
point source and a , a , a 2 are the average values of the variances
of the concentration distribution.
One of the two dimensional models used describe a continuous plume from
point source neglecting diffusion in the direction of motion was
W(x,y,z) =
,- 2- 2,1/2 T7
TT(O a ) V
y z x
exp -
(64)
where Q is the continuous steady rate of discharge of material, Vx is
the mean current velocity. The variances are a function of diffusion
time or distance from the source, i.e., by making the substitution
t = X/VX the variances can be expressed approximately as functions of
distance.
45
-------
For volume source the basic equation was
W(x,y,z)
_ 20
ir V [2a 2 + a 2(0)]1/2 [25 2 + a 2(0)]1/2
x y y z z
exp 5 + (65)
Y2
2a 2 + a 2
y y
2
(0) 2a 2 + a 2 (0)
Z Z
-2
where a (0) is the variance of the initial waste concentration distri-
bution.
Several of the conclusions of this investigation are listed below.
1. The rate of vertical diffusion can contribute significantly to
the overall diffusion process at wind speeds greater than eight
knots and/or low water column stability.
2. The rate of longitudinal and lateral diffusion appeared to be
influenced by wind speed but not by water column stability.
3. The "4/3 law" relating the lateral coefficient of eddy diffusion
as a function of average eddy scale did not hold in the particular
oceanic areas studied.
Vertical mixing does occur in the waste field as well as horizontal
mixing. As indicated by Wiegel (1964), vertical mixing is difficult
to study in the laboratory because of limitations of tank size. In
these studies the wind drags the surface water to the down wind end of
the tank producing a hydraulic head which causes a flow in the oppo-
site direction.
Laboratory studies have indicated that wind drag on the water surface
produces very little mixing. However, when wind generated waves
appear, extremely rapid mixing occurs as wind waves are rotational
in the generating area. On the other hand, there is some indication
that swell is not important to the mixing process as it is apparently
nearly irrotational (Wiegel, 1964).
Masch (1961) conducted a wave study in a wave tank and developed the
following relationship for the coefficient of eddy diffusivity:
D = 0.0038 (Vs + Qw)3'2
where Vs is the surface current and Qw is the water particle orbit
speed (Qw = H/T, H = significant wave height and T = average wave
period.
46
-------
SECTION VII
SAMPLING PROCEDURES
In order to achieve the goals of this research project, the Kraft pulp
mill outfall at Newport, Oregon was selected as the study site. The
Georgia-Pacific pulp and paper plant at Toledo produces about 900 tons
of pulp per day. Waste from the process is pumped through an eight-
mile pipeline to the outfall at Newport. Flow rates vary from six to
twelve million gallons per day. The aerial photograph of the Newport-
Toledo area shown in figure 19 was taken looking east with the ocean
in the foreground. The location of the outfall in this figure was
sketched on the photo and is shown in white. The 21-inch diameter
outfall was rebuilt and extended to 3500 ft. offshore in 1965. The
outfall terminates with a wye diffuser in about 40 feet of water at
low tide. A sketch of the outfall is shown in figure 20. Thirteen
outlet ports are located at 20-foot intervals on each leg of the wye
section. The three-inch diameter ports discharge horizontally into
the sea. The ports are oriented so that they discharge alternately on
opposite sides of the header.
Three different field procedures were used on the project. During the
1968 and 1969 field seasons, work was carried out by conducting simul-
taneous studies of the waste plumes by aerial photographic methods and
by conventional boat sampling. Concentrations in the plume were deter-
mined by metering rhodamine WT tracer into the pipeline and measuring
the tracer concentration in the waste field with a fluorometer aboard
the survey boat.
During the first field season, two fluorometers were used to sample
from one foot and five feet below the water surface. Since there was
no significant difference in the concentration at these two depths,
only one fluorometer was used during the following field season. A
ten-foot sampling probe for the fluorometer intake was constructed
for the 1969 field season. Sample intake ports were located along the
length of a sampling probe mounted on the side of the boat. The probe
was designed to hang vertically at five knots. By a sliding valve
arrangement in the body of the probe, the sampling depth could be
selected from one to ten feet below the water surface. Boat sampling
was discontinued during the 1970-71 field season and field work con-
tinued throughout the fall, winter, and spring when boat operations
were impossible due to rough sea conditions most of the time.
Vertical aerial photography was taken with a single camera by a com-
mercial aerial photography firm during the 1968 field season. As the
firm was located approximately 100 miles from the study area, schedul-
ing of the photography was difficult. After the 1968 field season,
the project purchased three aerial cameras and the photography was
taken with the cameras mounted obliquely in a rented four-passenger
aircraft.
47
-------
Figure 19. Aerial view of Newport area.
48
-------
v-
x" \
\
*0°/-'
^
x
\
w)/
jg*;
?00/-
^
""\
\ ^
^
\& \
o, o *
81 JrT^
\^>^l\
/V «5 ^J ^
x^"^ V -^ O
""^ V V
S, ^ N fo
|\| ^ °
& \ -?f ^
^° ^\
x^.l) QJ d)
> «J v"\ -K.
, ^ 4^
^J \
>^x § x
-^ ^ N
^. ° QJ
c, ^ J^
\K (J ^
i^ ^ I/
a ^J^T
j^r (Ki ^
x'x Hj xt n
/^^, c, . £
0 ^ ^
^ ^ A-
toQ ^
H
^(
a)
M-l
4-1
3
o
4-)
!-<
O
ft
&
01
a
Q)
4-1
M-l
O
f:
O
4-1
Q)
^j
r-b
CD
O
CM
01
J-l
3
00
•r(
PR
49
-------
Shore Control
Accurate control for positioning the boat and orientation of the
photography was essential. Concentrations computed from the photo-
graphs are compared to those measured by sampling from the boat. Since
the comparison requires matching of ground coordinates, an accurate
control network was established, thus eliminating the possibility of
discrepancies in concentration being due to error in positioning.
Shore control for boat location and photograph orientation was provided
by a ten-mile tellurometer traverse between two USC & GS triangulation
stations. The traverse extended from a triangulation station on the
south to station Yaquina Head Lighthouse on the North. Six traverse
stations were established and marked with three quarter-inch steel
rods 30 inches long. Horizontal angles were treasured with a Wild T-3
theodolite. Initially the distances were to be measured with a geodim-
eter but due to poor visibility, a tellurometer was used. As the
tellurometer measures slope distance, the station elevations were
determined by reciprocal vertical angles. The established stations
were marked with white cloth for photo identification.
Buoy Control
During the 1968 field season vertical, color photography was taken by
a commercial aerial mapping firm. Photography was taken at scales of
1:6,000 and 1:12,000 using precise mapping cameras. In addition to
the shore control, control buoys were required in the water for photo-
graphic orientation of the low altitude photography. The buoys were
positioned so that each photo would contain a minimum of three control
points for photographic orientation. Control buoys were four-foot
sqViare plywood floats three inches deep attached to 500 Ib concrete
anchors. The floats were constructed of a two-inch thick sheet of
polyurthene between two sheets of half-inch plywood. To hold the
flo^t together a metal flashing was fastened around the edge and an
eye'bolt was placed through the center of the float. The mooring line
was attached to the eye bolt. This line consisted of a ten-foot
length of half-inch chain attached to each end of a half-inch poly-
prophylene rope. A swivel was placed between the top section of chain
and the rope. The weight of the chain added stability to the anchor-
ing system. In addition, the top 10-foot section of chain prevented
vandalism by boaters. The scope of the mooring line was made as short
as possible to minimize movement of the float about the anchor yet
long enough to prevent movement of the anchor during normal summer
months. The mooring line was made equal to the depth of water at
MLLW plus 20 feet. Summer storms did take out three of the near-
shore buoys which were set in less than 20 feet of water.
The small scale photography taken during the 1968 field season was
intended to be used for buoy location by analytical strip bridging.
However, it was found more convenient to triangulate the position of
50
-------
the buoys from the shore stations.
The oblique camera mounting used after the first field season reduced
the requirement for horizontal control in the water. The large camera
photographs included the horizon and two horizontal control points
could be identified on shore. In addition, one buoy was desired near
the outfall to provide a strong fix for the photographic orientation.
During the 1969 field season, two temporary buoys were set near the
outfall on each day that field work was conducted. The buoy floats
were four feet square, two inches thick polyurthene board which were
fiberglassed and painted orange. The 60-lb anchors were adequate to
hold the floats in position for the sea conditions encountered during
the field work. Since boat operations were stopped during the 1970-71
field season, control buoys were not used during this period and photo
control was provided by identification of at least three shore stations
on the photography.
Water Currents
During the 1968 field season, the survey boat would set two four foot
square floats with drogues attached to measure the water currents.
The drogues extended from one half foot below the water surface to
five feet and were constructed of herculite material fitted over a con-
duit frame to form a cross banner 4-1/2 ft in length and in width. A
ten pound weight was attached to the lower end of the drogue. The
positions of the current floats were determined from the aerial
photography. In addition, during the 1969 field season 500 ml of 20%
rhodamine WT dye in a plastic bag were dropped from the aircraft. The
change in location and size of the resulting dye patch provided infor-
mation on both the current velocity and the diffusion coefficients.
When boat sampling was discontinued after the 1969 field season, floats
with drogues attached were no longer used but dye markers were used to
determine water currents and diffusion coefficients.
Continuous Boat Sampling
Cooperative arrangements were made with Georgia-Pacific Corporation to
maintain a nearly constant waste discharge rate while field work was
in progress. In addition, they provided the project with a dye tracer
injection station installed on their outfall line near the beach. The
station was equipped with a tap to the pipeline for injecting the
tracer. A positive displacement pump was employed for continuous tracer
injection into the pipeline. Pressure in the pipeline at the station
varied from zero at low tide to about five psi at high tide for the
pipeline flow rates encountered during the study.
Measurement of waste concentrations in the ocean was accomplished by
metering a dye tracer, rhodamine WT 20% solution, into the outfall
pipeline on shore to produce a dye concentration of about one part per
million in the effluent at the point of discharge. Dye concentrations
51
-------
in the waste plume were measured with a Turner III Fluorometer aboard
the survey boat. The fluorometer was equipped with a flow through
sample cell and continuous readings were recorded with a chart record-
er. The sample was drawn through the instrument with a pump on the
discharge side of the fluorometer. By knowing the tracer injection
rate and the effluent flow rate, the waste concentration was calculated
from the measured tracer concentration. In order to eliminate the
effect of temperature on the tracer fluorescence the instruments were
standardized in the field.
While continuous sampling was underway, the fluorometer operator would
mark each position, record position number, indicate any fluorometer
scale change and any sampling depth change on the chart record. The
boat's position was determined at one-minute intervals by triangulation.
Simultaneous horizontal angles were measured from two shore stations
with Wild T-2 Theodolites. The radio operator aboard the boat would
signal the theodolite operators when the position was to be taken.
Aerial Photography
One of the primary problems encountered in processing the 1968 vertical
photography was the direct sunlight reflection from the water surface.
Photography after 1968 was taken with an oblique camera mounting to
avoid the sun spot. Prior to the 1969 field season, three cameras
were purchased and mounted in the baggage compartment of a small high
wing aircraft. This eliminated the need for advance scheduling of
commercial aerial photography and allowed flexible planning of the
changing weather and sea conditions. The camera package shown in
figure 21 consisted of a K-17 mapping camera and two 70 mm cameras.
Multiple cameras allowed the selection of optimum film, filter and
exposure combinations for several photographic bands. The mapping
camera, because of its large angular coverage, permitted photographic
orientation of the two smaller cameras. Films from the two 70 mm
cameras were used for detailed analyses and measurements of the waste
field. Polarizing filters on the 70 mm cameras reduced the skylight
reflection from the water surface.
The cameras were synchronized to take simultaneous pictures with a
timing device consisting of a capacitor in parallel with a variable
resistor. The cameras were lined up end to end without their maga-
zines and the variable resistor was adjusted until a light could be
seen through the cameras when the shutters were activated at 1/100
of a second.
When the aerial photography was taken with a single vertical mapping
camera, normal color film was used. Both Ektachrome 8442 film and
Anscochrome D200 film were tested. There was no significant difference
in the results of the two films. When aerial photography was taken
with the three camera unit, generally the K-17 was loaded with black
and white film, type 2402, with a Wratten 25A filter, while one 70 mm
52
-------
o
^
•H
C
•H
ct)
•H
C
cfl
0)
o
-------
Hassel'blad camera was loaded with normal color film, type 2448, and
the second Hasselblad camera was loaded with infrared black and white
film, type 5424. Because of the variable light scattering and absorb-
ing characteristics of the pulp mill effluent, a broad band photographic
system was used.
The photographic film was developed by project personnel in accordance
with the film manufacturer's directions. The aerial film from the
mapping camera was 9-1/2 inches wide and 100 ft long, and was processed
with a Morse B-5 rewind processor while the 70 mm film was processed
with a Nikor reel and tank processor.
54
-------
SECTION VIII
DYE PATCH STUDIES
During the 1969 field season, several dye drops were made from the air-
craft. The three pictures shown in figure 22 were taken July 7, 1969
using panchromatic film type 8401 with a Wratten 25A filter. While
this is not the best film-filter combination for observing the dye
patch, the change in shape of the dye patch can be seen. The dye was
dropped at 12:19 and the first photo was taken at 12:25 from 3000 ft
at which time the size of the dye field was 160 ft by 40 ft. The
photo in figure 22b was taken at 13:13 from 4000 ft. After 54 minutes
from the time the dye was dropped, the dye patch had grown to approxi-
mately 70 ft wide and an overall curved length of 1000 ft. The light
reflection in 22b could have been reduced with a polarizing filter.
The photo in figure 22c was taken an hour and a half later at 14:43
from 5000 ft. The dye field at this time is 2100 ft long and 1300 ft
wide.
The example given in figure 22 was an extreme example of elongation,
curvature and striation of a dye patch. The wind was downward and to
the right in the pictures at 5 to 12 knots with a swell height of 4 to
6 ft and a water current velocity of 0.4 ft/sec. Most dye patches
observed have been elongated in a direction nearly parallel to that of
the water flow. Striations and curvature of the dye patch are common.
However, in most experiments the overall shape of the patch resembles
an ellipse.
The elongation of the dye patch in the direction of flow suggests
dispersion due to a vertical velocity gradient can, at times, be an
important consideration. The upper layers of water are first influen-
ced by a change in wind velocity or direction and vertical velocity
gradients would be expected. Wind waves and swell both have specific
orientation that suggest diffusion will occur at different rates in a
horizontal plane.
The basic diffusion equation given as equation 56 is reduced to a two
dimensional model.
8W
•T—
at
y9Y2
+ D
+ aW
(67)
A solution is
W(x, y, t) =
exp -
X
? 2
2o 2a
x y
(68)
where the coordinate axis is assumed to move with the dye patch. In
55
-------
At 12:25 from 3000 ft
At 13:13 from 4000 ft
At 14:43 from 5000 ft
Figure 22. Dye patch on July 7, 1969.
56
-------
the equation W represents the dye concentration, X and Y are the
coordinates from the centroid of the dye patch parallel and transverse
to the direction of flow, D and Dy are the longitudinal and lateral
diffusion coefficients, "a" is a first order decay coefficient which
includes the loss to the lower layers due to vertical diffusion and
ax^ and Oy^ represent the variances in the X and Y directions. The
relationship between the change in variance and the diffusion coeffi-
cient is given by
2
D =
1 Ao
2 At
(69)
The diffusion coefficient is equal to one half the change in variance
(Ao ) divided by the time interval (At).
Dividing equation 68 by the maximum concentration at the centroid
(Wmax), taking the log of each side and multiplying by 2 the equation
becomes
x
x
= 2 In
W
max
W
(70)
by letting
2 2
a = 2o In
x
W
max
W
(71)
? 2
b = 2a In
x
W
max
W
(72)
equation 70 reduces to that of an ellipse
X
(73)
where a and b are the major and minor semi axis of an ellipse fitted
to a line of equal concentration about the dye patch. Since the edge
of the dye patch is generally characterized by relatively steep con-
centration gradients, the visible boundary of the patch was assumed
to have a concentration of W max/2. With this assumption equations
71 and 72 reduce to
2 2
a = 0.72a
x e
(74)
2 2
a = 0.72 b
Y e
(75)
57
-------
By using equation 69, 74 and 75 the diffusion coefficients are re-
lated to the change in size of the dye patch between photographic
flights over the area. Since the dye patches seldom form a perfect
ellipse, the major and minor semi axes of the edge of the patch
(ae and be) can not be measured directly from the aerial photography,
The procedures employed in determining diffusion coefficients from
the aerial photography are given in Section IX on Data Processing.
58
-------
SECTION IX
DATA PROCESSING
The general scheme for processing the boat and photographic data during
both the 1968 and 1969 field seasons is shown in figure 23. Data pro-
cessing included reduction of shore angles to state plane coordinates,
conversion of fluorometer strip chart records to waste concentrations
and reduction of photographic information. A comparison was made be-
tween the waste concentrations determined by boat sampling with those
determined from aerial photography by matching ground coordinates.
During the 1970-71 field season only aerial photography required pro-
cessing. Aerial film taken during this period was not digitized using
the densitometer. The processing techniques were modified to achieve
the research objective of the original proposal, which was to develop
a remote sensing tool for the evaluation of dispersion of wastes from
existing or proposed ocean outfalls. Since the 1968 and 1969 field
seasons were concerned with existing outfall sites, the final year of
the project was concerned with the development of simplified pro-
cedures for proposed outfall sites.
1968-1969 Boat Data
Angles from the shore stations to the photo control buoys and the boat
were reduced to state plane coordinates. Boat positions were indexed
by time for matching with waste concentration. Since theodolite
sightings were made on the boat's mast, a correction was applied to
determine the position of the fluorometer intake ports.
The fluorometer records were processed by 1) a least squares fit to
the standardization data, 2) a shift of the index on the fluorometer
reading to account for the time delay for the sample to pass from the
intake port to the fluorometer, 3) reduction of the fluorometer read-
ing to concentration of tracer and concentration of effluent, and
4) interpolating the ground coordinates from the processed shore con-
trol data.
Waste concentrations determined by boat sampling were displayed on a
three dimensional plot. Figure 24 is a typical display of the boat
sampling data where the grid represents the X and Y state plane co-
ordinates and the Z axis represents the waste concentration in milli-
liters/liter. The waste concentration is represented by the length
of a line drawn parallel to the z-axis. The state plane coordinate
position of any sample point can be scaled from the grid to the base
of the vertical line. The solid line on the plot is the boat's track.
The plume in the plot extends upward and to the right.
The surface water temperature was also recorded along the boat's
track and displayed on a three dimensional plot as shown in figure 25.
59
-------
SHORE
ANGLES
BOAT
RECORDS
AERIAL
FILM
SAMPLING
COMPUTE
DENSIT-
METER
1. POSITIONS
2. FLUORO. STD.
3. WASTE CONC.
WASTE
i
CONC.
PHOTOGRAPHY
COMPUTE
1. ORIENTATION
2.WASTE CONC.
3. COM PARE W/BOAT
4. DIFFUSION COEF.
LINE PRINTER
PLOTTER PROGRAMS
Figure 23. Data processing flow diagram.
60
-------
AIRPHSTS GNCiLYSIS SF SCEAN QLJTFCiLL D I SPERS 1 SN
PLST SF UIGSTE CSNCENTROT[BNS ML^L FRSn
Figure 24. Waste concentrations from boat sampling on August 12, 1969,
ONOLY5I5 QF QCEfiN QUTF(^LL D I SPERS 1BN
Figure 25. Surface water temperature on August 12, 1969.
61
-------
In order to be able to show a smaller temperature variation, the values
plotted in figure 25 were the surface temperatures minus nine degrees.
The outfall in figures 24 and 25 is located near coordinates 1069400E,
375600N where the waste concentration is a maximum and the surface water
temperature is a minimum. The temperature of the waste while in the
pipeline is about 40°C. The waste discharged from the outfall ports
mixes by jet diffusion with the colder subsurface water and the result-
ing mixture at the surface in this case was colder than the surrounding
sea water.
A temperature profile taken over the outfall and one taken north of the
waste field on August 12, 1969 are shown in figure 26. The temperature
of the water near the bottom is 7.5°C while that near the surface over
the outfall is 8.4°C and north of the waste field is 10°C.
TEMPERATURE IN DEGREES C
10
15
U'
10-
h-
x20-
i
i
Q_
LJ
Q
30-
40-
i
»
>
\
>
>
0'
10
10
h-
LL
x 20
f-
Q_
UJ
30
40J
15
Over Outfall
Open Sea
Figure 26. Water temperature profiles on August 12, 1969.
62
-------
A detailed description including the computer program for processing
the boat sampling data is given in Appendix C of the Water Pollution
Control Research Series, 12040EBY on "Aerial Photographic Tracing of
Pulp Mill Effluent in Marine Waters" by Burgess and James. Detailed
description of the three dimensional plotting program was given in
Appendix D of the "First Annual Progress Report" on this project
(Burgess and James, 1969).
1968 Photographic Data
During the 1968 field season, color aerial photography was taken with
a single vertical aerial mapping camera. The photographic film was
converted to digital data with a McBeth model TD-102 photo densitom-
eter. The densitometer can measure the density of the three layers of
the color photo. Wratten filters numbers 92, 93, and 94 are utilized
to measure the red, green and blue film densities, respectively.
The aerial film holder was attached to an x - y coordinatograph which
measured the photo coordinates to i 0.001 inches. At the same time,
the film densities were measured with a digital voltmeter. Both the
voltmeter and coordinatograph were connected to a digitizer which in
turn was connected to a card punch. One card was required for each
point and contained the photo identification number, point number, x
and y coordinates and the film densities for the three spectral bands
of the color photo. The position of each data point was selected
manually. The three film densities on each card were measured at the
same point on the photograph.
A generalized flow diagram of the photographic data processing is
shown in figure 27. The photographic analysis phase of the data pro-
cessing began with the photographic orientation which was accomplished
by a non-linear least square solution to the collinearity condition
equations. After the last photograph has been oriented, the water
currents are computed. The sun altitude and azimuth are computed for
the first photograph of each flight.
The photographic variable that was the most sensitive to changes in
waste concentration was the ratio of red to green light reflected from
the waste field. This ratio, adjusted for atmospheric attenuation and
for light scattered from the sea water, was related to the waste con-
centration by a least squares fit of the boat sampling data. The
comparison was made by matching ground coordinates at 60-foot intervals
along the boat's path. Utilizing this regression equation waste con-
centrations were computed throughout the waste field.
Film densities and photo coordinates were measured with the photo
densitometer for points outside both the wste field and the area of
direct sunlight reflections. The data froiu these points were used to
determine the regression coefficients for the model
ATR = AQ + A]_ (j2) + A2 (J2)2 + e (76)
63
-------
ORIENT PHOTO
Yes
1
LAST PHOTO
No
COMPUTE
CURRENTS
SUN ALT.
& AZIMUTH
COMPARE
BOAT
DATA
PHOTO\ No
\QF FLIGHT/
COMPUTE
WASTE CONC.
SYMBOLIC
PLOT
Yes
FLIGHT)>
No
1
PLOT DIFFERENCE IN CONC.
BETWEEN FLIGHTS
I
COMPUTE DIFFUSION
COEFFICIENTS
Figure 27. Flow diagram for photographic processing.
64
-------
where e is the error term, j „ is the angle between the ray to the
camera and the vertical, and the A's are the regression coefficients.
ATR is determined for each point from
ATR = (TIM) cos4(c)
(FNO)2 exp(Db(x,y)/G)
TIM is the photographic exposure time, c is the angle between the cam-
era axis and the ray, FNO is the f-number setting on the camera,
D^(x,y) is the blue film density as measured with the densitometer and
G is the film gamma. The film gamma for the three spectral bands of
the color photo was determined from sensometric curves made by Kodak
and GAF for the film used on the project. The gamma to the base 10
was taken as -3.0 for the Ektachrome 8442 film and -2.4 for the ansco-
chrome D200 film.
In the expression for the ratio (RDho) > the values of the coefficients
were determined from the following method in place of that given by
equation 39
R = B + B (SUNR) + B (N) + e (78)
The regression coefficients were determined by a least squares fit of
data from selected points outside the waste field. N^ is the radiance
in the blue band as determined from
ATR (FNO)2 exp(D, (x,y)/G)
N = - f - (79)
(TIM) cos (c)
SUNR is the angle between the ray to the camera and the reflected
direct sunlight. For the model 78 the value of R , was determined
jr pho
from
R = exp[(Dr(x,y)-D (x,y))/G + (E^E )sec(J2)
+ (A -A )sec(i) ] (80)
o
where D(x,y) is the film density, E is the atmospheric attenuation
from the sea surface to the camera, jo is the angle between the ray
to the camera and the vertical axis, A is the atmospheric attenuation
for a standard atmosphere and i is the angle of incidence for the
direct sunlight. The subscripts r and g refer to the red and green
bands, respectively. Atmospheric attenuation coefficients were de-
termined from the Handbook of Geophysics and Space Environments for a
standard atmosphere. The following coefficients and equations were
used
Ar = 0.252
65
-------
A = 0.331
g
E - E = 0.024 In (H + 1) (81)
where H is the camera station altitude in kilometers. After the co-
efficients in model 78 were computed, the ratio anomaly (RA) for any
point on the photograph, excluding kelp and shallow nearshore areas,
was determined from
RA = R , - R , (82)
ph pho
where R , was estimated from the regression equation
Rpho = B0 + Bl (SUNR) + W (83)
and R , was determined from
ph
Rh = exp[ (Dr(x,y)-D(x,y))/G
+ (A -A )sec(i) ] (84)
o
The ratio anomaly (RA) was computed for each data point on the aerial
photo. The values were stored in a 120 by 60 array. The index on the
array indicated the ground coordinates for each element of the array.
Each element represented a 60-foot square area on the sea. After all
the film density measurements were converted to RA values and stored
in the array, missing values were interpolated from adjacent points.
Concentrations determined from the fluorometers aboard the boat were
read into the computer program. Boat concentrations were interpolated
at 60-foot intervals along the fluorometer track line. These values
were matched by ground coordinates with the RA values in the array.
A least square regression analysis was made on the data with the model
W = C1(RA) + C2(RA)2 + e (85)
where W is the waste concentration in milliliters per liter and C, and
C2 are regression coefficients.
The array was oriented so that the x-axis was along the center line of
plume. Values of the waste concentration were computed from the above
equation and stored in the array in place of the RA values. Waste
concentrations were displayed as a symbolic plot on the line printer.
In figure 28 are two plots from photographs taken August 16. The
symbols on the plot represent different ranges in concentration and
were selected so that the density of the plot increases with the
concentration. The movement or change in shape of the waste field can
be seen during the 22-minute period between the flights. The area of
the waste field within each concentration range is determined by
continuing the number of times each symbol is used to make the symbolic
66
-------
B
O
•H •
4J OO
CO vo
i-l ON
CJ vo
B -H
O
O 4-1
O 03
CO 3
M 60
3
ON B
CM O
3 00
00 -H
•H iH
a
O
tn
4J
O
OO
O rH
•H
i-H 4-1
O CO
f I
C/2
-------
plot.
The most visually useful form of displaying the photographic waste con
centrations is the isoconcentration plot. This plot is similar to a
topographic map with the elevation being replaced with the concentra-
tion. Figure 29 is a computer printout by this technique of the con-
centrations shown in the left plot of figure 28. The outfall is
located at the top of the plot and the plume extends downward. The
plume is 500 to 1000 ft wide and about 7000 ft long.
Steady state diffusion coefficients were determined for a steady state
model with unidirectional transport velocity in the X direction. By
neglecting the loss to the lower layers and assuming the diffusion in
the Y direction was not a function of Y, the basic diffusion equation
becomes
where X is the distance along the centerline of the plume, Y is the
distance right or left of the plume center line, Vx is the velocity
along the plume center line, W is the waste concentration, and Dy is
the diffusion coefficient. A solution to equation is
W = - K 1/? exp [-Y2/rtD ] (87)
2(TrD t)1/Z y
For computational purposes this equation can be reduced to
W = WQ exp [-Y2/2a 2] (88)
2
where WQ is the concentration at the center line of the plume and a y is
variance of normal curve. The diffusion coefficient is equal to one
half the change in variance divided by the time interval or
D =i^_ (89)
7 2 At <• y}
In the computer program, the variance was computed every 300 feet
along the center line of the plume. The change in time for this
steady state model was equal to the distance between sections in feet
divided by the velocity in feet per second. The velocity was deter-
mined photogrammetrically from the current floats or dye patches.
2
The variance (a ) can be estimated for a normal distribution from the
sample variance (Sy) . The concentration (W) is equivalent to the
frequency of occurrence in the computations. The sample variance is
where Y is the mean distance from the origin and
68
-------
I W. (91)
1=1
In computational form, equation 90 is
n
2 1 " 2 '
From equation 92 an estimate of the variance can be made for any sec-
tion across the plume. Equation 89 was used to determine the diffu-
sion coefficient.
Nonsteady-state diffusion coefficients were determined from two flights
over the area using equation 89. In this equation for the non-steady
state
o 99
Aaf = a1 . - a0 .. (93)
i 1,1 2, i+c '
where the subscripts 1 and 2 refer to the flight numbers, i refers to
the section number across the plume in flight one and i+c is the
section number in flight two adjusted for the movement of the waste
field between flights. In solving equation 89 for the nonsteady-state
case, At is the time difference between the flights.
The preliminary diffusion coefficients based on the steady state model
are shown in table 1. The coefficients are determined from the change
in variance along each flight at 300 ft intervals. Assuming a uniform
concentration with depth, a vertical thickness of the waste field can
be estimated. The columns listed in table 1 are 1) section number
where each section represents 60 ft along the axis of the plume, 2)
width of the waste field, 3) the estimated average depth of the waste
field, 4) the estimate of the standard deviation of Y, 5) the maximum
centerline concentration for a normal distribution, 6) and 7) the
ground X and Y coordinates of the centerline of the plume, 8) the dif-
fusion coefficient between each fifth section of the plume, and 9) the
average diffusion coefficient from the head of the plume. Also shown
in the tables are the flow rate, current velocity, sun azimuth from the
south, sun altitude, and area within each concentration range.
Nonsteady-state diffusion coefficients are shown in table 2. The co-
efficients were determined from the change in variance between two
photographic flights over the outfall area. Convection of the field
was considered in making the comparison.
A detailed description of the computer program used to process the
vertical color photography is given in Appendix B.
69
-------
CO
CO
o
co"
=
ra
D
^
..
^~
f-
4—
<2
^
C
0>
.y
<^
%
UJ
O
f
o
V)
D
4-
4-
CO
C
E
"53
cu
,_•
cu
.Q
£
en
CN
LL
4-1
C
cu
'o
s—
cu
o
O
c
o
'33
ft
di nates
8
o
cu
c
CO
cu
2
4-1
c
cu
-9
o
^
CD
o>
CO
r:
Q.
CU
Q
*^
H-
LJJ
_C
•M
^^
5
C
.0
OJ
O>
CO
4)
o
CD
C/D
_C
LL.
>
X
i—
Cu
4-.
LL
4-»
^~
LL
U
O
LU
CM
CD
cn
r-.
o
o
LU
CN
CN
O3
^
CM
CO
CO
CN
CO
CD
O
O
LU
S
CO
CN
O
LU
s
t—
o
CO
§
CO
CO
u
o
LU
CO
t—
r-
o
o
LU
CN
LO
CO
CO
O)
LO
CO
CO
cn
o
o
o
o
LU
LO
cn
CO
CO
CM
o
LU
CO
r-
^f-
CM
I
00
<_>
o
LU
CO
O)
r^
O
o
LU
LO
CO
LO
05
CO
C§
CO
CO
CO
CO
g
N_J
0
o
LU
LO
LO
CO
CN
O
LU
¥
CN
T—
CN
O
CM
0
CO
CM
(_J
O
LU
O
o
00
o
o
LU
5-
00
CO
CO
CO
CM
o
o
LU
00
LO
CO
CN
O
LU
cn
CN
05
,_
g
0
oo
CN
u
o
LU
CM
CO
co
8
LU
CN
co
*-
cn
o
r--
CO
cS
CM
o
o
o
LU
8
CO
CM
o
LU
CO
r»-
CN
«—
CM
8
CO
CO
CO
l_>
o
LU
cS
00
r—
o
LU
CN
O)
CN
CN
o>
CO
CO
CO
CO
r—
Lfl
0
O
LU
O>
CM
CO
CM
o
LU
LO
CO
CO
i—
cn
CN
o
s
CO
CO
<_)
o
LU
CM
CO
•-
O
o
LU
o
«7
CO
o
CO
CN
CO
O
o
LU
8
CM
CN
O
LU
g
*—
r^
CO
0
CO
00000000900000
III III III fll III III III HI Ml III III tl'l III IH
co°ScM"8°-cooocoSLOinr^
<-CNa3LOCO'-a5CO'-COCOOOO
*-COCNCOCNCOCN«-CNCNC>'-OOm
cu
OO'-OOO'-'-'-OO'-OO S'lLLO^LOLO
00000090000900 50000
LULULULULULUUJLULULULULULUUJ[E(?LULULULU
LOcocnc»'a-co«-(~.LO'-ooooOLO g gcocNr^co
CN LO CN oJ r-v co *" 17 CM «- cn i CM' •* • ^ to
4-*
C
cu
u
c
o
CJ
-C
o
CO
1 1 1
c S
ocoLocooococo'CN-£ ^CMTCOO
«-OCNCOCOr~-«-COOOCOCNOOO'*~ QJ ^ vu^j
COCOCOCOCOCOCOCOCOCOCOCOCOCO i_QC
COCOCOCOCO'S-LOP--CNr».CnM-OCD
Or^OOOOOO)OOCMCOCOOO«-O|-v
oooooooooooooo
oooooooooooooo
LLj UJ LU IJJ UJ LU LU UJ LU IU IJJ " ' |_LJ LU
co i^ ^^ r*1*1 LO ^f r**« f*** LO co co LO 05 oo
to ^f f**^ p"v C35 *~™ O5 ^^ CO r*1* O5 CF) 00 LO
CNCNCNCNCNCNCNCNCNCMCMCNCMCN
oooooooooooooo
111 III III III IH Ml \ 1 1 III III 1 H III III III Ml
CO O5 CO *d" ^ LO f"^ ^ ^J* G) O LO CO CN
CO^-COCDCOCOCO'-COCOCNCM'3-CO
CO ,,.
CE £
00 LL -Q
co 5 £2 tr.
LL . X
o ^* ^^ ^
if) LO o if) *t co o r^* co co r** co co «~ M r(: +? ^
CO^^COCOCNCOLOr^cdcDcdLOCO • O'
~ E o cu
s-8!I
* DC N ^ _
> < CU <
OOOOOOOOOOOOOO n c "- C
•tfCMO'tfCMOCOCOCOfMOOCOCO— U D D
cococooooocococooooooocococo
8(0 LO LO
o o o
Ul LU LU LU
CJ) CO O CG
cJ> oo o ^*
«-• «- TJ- cn
r- • i- LO CO
LO O LO LO
•7 CN CN CM
cb uf) cb Jr
*- «- CN d
70
-------
Table 2. Nonsteady-state diffusion coefficients, August 16, 1968.
Section
No.
13
18
23
28
33
38
43
48
53
58
63
68
73
78
83
88
93
98
103
108
Width
Feet
660
780
1020
1080
1320
840
840
840
720
1200
1140
1020
1200
1260
960
660
720
600
600
780
Diffusion
Coefficients
Ft /sec
10.1
4.8
2.5
1.9
1.2
13.5
7.5
0.2
13.6
38.0
24.9
12.6
9.0
8.9
9.0
10.3
11.6
16.6
13.2
7.6
1969 Photographic Data
During the 1969 field season, the aerial photography was taken with
two 70 mm Hasselblad cameras and a K-17 mapping camera. The large
photos from the mapping camera were used for photographic orientation
of the smaller cameras. Detailed analysis of the waste field was
accomplished from the 70 mm photos.
The aerial film was digitized in the photogrammetry laboratory as
shown in figure 30. The densitometer is located on the Kelsh plotter
table. The film density is measured as voltage output from the densi-
tometer with a digital voltmeter. The BCD digital voltmeter logic is
transmitted through a logic converter to the Autotrol digital recorder.
Output from the digitizer is recorded on computer cards by a card
punch.
The densitometer and scanning table shown in figure 31 is processing
a 70 mm picture. About all that can be seen of the densitometer is
the white meter near the center of the figure. The scanning table is
designed to handle film up to 9 1/2 inches wide and 250 feet long.
71
-------
The film is loaded on the reel on the left of the scanning table and the
take up reel is on the right. The arm that extends from the meter on
the densitometer out over the scanning table contains the filters and
the photomultiplier tube. A light source is located below the film.
The amount of light that is transmitted through the film is measured by
the photomultiplier tube and converted to D. C. voltage.
When digitizing aerial film, the scanning table continuously moves back
and forth. The scan limits are marked on the photograph with a black
tape or the dark border around the picture. The densitometer senses
the end of the scan when its voltage output exceeds 750 volts. At the
end of the scan, the scanning table stops and the film is advanced one
scan by the take up reel on the table. The direction of the scan is
reversed and the scanning table moves in the opposite direction.
The Y axis of the coordinatograph is attached to the scanning table.
While scanning, the film density and Y photo coordinates are recorded
at a selected interval along the scan. The X coordinate is computed
from the scan number.
The operator shown in figure 29 is able to accomplish three processing
steps at one time. While the densitometer is digitizing one photo,
the operator is usually scanning the line printer listing of a previous
photograph searching for illegal characters. At the same time, he can
operate the teletype which preliminarily processes the data from an-
other photograph with the computer using program EDIT. This program
reduces the voltage output from the densitometer to film densities,
rejects extreme values of densities, interpolates photo coordinates
and displays the difference in film densities between adjacent bands
on the line printer. Output from this program is stored on magnetic
tape waiting final processing using program REMOTE. The basic details
of this program are essentially the same as those for a single color
photograph except that up to ten photographic bands or channels can be
processed at one time. Program listings of EDIT and REMOTE are given
in Appendix C.
1970-71 Photographic Data
Field procedures and processing techniques were revised to include
estimating diffusion coefficients from dye patch studies. Field work
was conducted during the fall, winter, and spring. Boat sampling was
not attempted due to rough sea conditions which generally preArail dur-
ing this period. More specifically, the aims of this phase of the
investigation were to develop a remote sensing tool for the evaluation
of waste dispersion from proposed ocean outfalls and to develop a set
of characteristic airphoto pattern elements for estimating diffusion
coefficients.
Aerial film taken during this period was not digitized with the densi-
tometer but photo coordinates were measured with the x-y coordintograph
about both the waste field and dye patch. The area of the waste field
72
-------
o>
o
en
a
0)
C
•H
C
CO
O
01
S-i
•H
M-l
S-l
a)
oo
c
•H
N
•H
+J
•H
00
•H
n
a)
S-l
60
•H
73
-------
was computed from the photo coordinates about the plume. In addition,
the water current velocity and direction and diffusion coefficients
were determined from the dye patch photo coordinates.
The outline of the dye patch was digitized with the x and y coordina-
tograph along with sufficient ground control for photographic orienta-
tion. Photo coordinates about the dye patch were converted to state
plane coordinates of the centroid and moments of inertia were computed
from, the following equations .
1=1
Xi
X. AA.
1 1
(95)
I Y- AA.
L i i
I X. AA
L i
Y.2 AA.
(96)
(97)
(98)
xy
X.Y.AA.
111
(99)
Care must be taken when programming these equations to avoid roundoff
error as state plane coordinates are typically six to seven digit num-
bers.
The rotation angle (a) of the axis to obtain the principal axis is
given by
21
Tan (2a) =
(100)
x y
The maximum and minimum moments of inertia about the principal axis
are computed from
1/2
r2
I -I
X ^
max
min
+ I
I -I
x -v
xy
xy
1/2
(101)
(102)
74
-------
The irregular shaped dye patch is replaced with an ellipse that has the
same horizontal area. In addition, the ratio of Imax to Imin are the
same for the ellipse as for the dye patch. The principal moments of
inertia for an ellipse are given by
irb a
(103)
ira b
I = — f-^ (104)
mm 4
where a and be are the major and minor semi axes of an equivalent
ellipse6. If the ratio (IR) of Imax to Imin remain the same for both
the dye patch and the ellipse, the ratio of variances are also the
same (equations 74 and 75) .
2 2
I a a
TT. max ex ,,n^^
IR = j - = ~2 = — j <105)
min b c
e y
After computing the area (A) and the ratio of principal moments of in-
ertia (IR) for the dye patch, the semi axes of the equivalent ellipse
are determined from
a2 = (IR)~1/2 (106)
(107)
Equations 74 and 75 are utilized in determining the variances. Diffu-
sion coefficients are determined from the change in variance between
two photographic flights as given by equation 69.
Details of the computer program used for this phase of the study are
given in Appendix D. In addition to the dye patch analysis, the pro-
gram prepares the input coordinates for a plotting program. The out-
line of the waste field, current velocity vector, along with a state
plane coordinate grid and displayed on a CRT plotter and a polaroid
picture is taken of the face of the tube for a record of the results.
75
-------
SECTION X
SAMPLING RESULTS
1968-1969 Data
Detailed descriptions of the 1968-1969 boat sampling and aerial photog-
raphy acquisition and processing were given by Burgess and James
(August 1970). A summary of the results is given in table 3. Field
work was conducted in late June, July, August and early September.
Fourteen sampling runs were made during this period. For eight of the
fourteen sampling runs, the waste field from the ocean outfall was at
the sea surface. A submerged plume occurred during the remaining six
sampling runs.
When the plume was submerged, both the swell height and the wind veloc-
ity were significantly less at a 90 percent confidence level than when
the plume formed at the surface. On July 7 and 8, 1969, the sea and
weather conditions were very nearly the same, yet on July 7, the plume
submerged and on July 8 the plume was at the surface.
On both days the wind was from the north and a foam streak extended
southward from the outfall for approximately 1.3 miles. The infrared
black and white photo in figure 32 shows the foam streak on July 7,
1969. The photo was taken in a northwest direction with the shore in
the foreground and the foam extending southward from the outfall.
The aerial photograph of the plume on July 8, 1969 in figure 33 was
taken from 4000 ft with the camera tilted 45 degrees from vertical
toward the east. The shore is off the upper edge of the photo and the
foam streak extends south from the outfall. The direction from the
outfall that the foam travels is not necessarily the same as that of
the waste plume and in this case the plume is to the right of the foam.
Temperature profiles taken upstream of the outfall for July 7 and 8
are shown in figure 34. On the first day when the plume was submerged,
the temperature profile did not show a definite thermocline but the
temperature decreased with depth at a decreasing rate. On the second
day a thermocline existed at about four feet below the surface. The
wind on the 7th increased from 5 mph at 8:00 to 12 mph at 20:00. On
July 8th the wind was stronger and increased from 6 mph at 8:00 to 15
mph at 15:00.
Both steady state and nonsteady state diffusion coefficients were com-
puted when possible for each sampling run. Of the eight days that a
surface plume occurred, a one dimensional diffusion model was applica-
ble to the plume pattern on only three days. A two dimensional model
was necessary to describe the plume when the current velocity was low.
When the velocity was greater than 0.4 ft/sec, a one dimensional dif-
fusion model was adequate.
77
-------
•M
1
cu
Z
o
4—
CO
summ
O>
c
"5.
E
0?
CD
O)
CO
CO
0)
CO
cu
m
h-
CO
CU
tr
LU
D
I
^ J
o_
r_ * ^^
^\ Orsi
Q 0£
c _•
CU CU CJ
1 >i?
S _l
S c —
2
i_
Q
•M
O ^J
•55 LL.
I
col
cu
p
CU
0) jj
s£
DC
cu
CO
Q
o
CM
O
LO
O
O
CO
8
g
L0_
O
CM
0
r-
LJJ
Z
*
CM
O
oo
I
00
>.
-C
«
•O
cn
>JZ >
O) '^ O)
O) O)
o o o
i !
: o j .
' ' «-
i i !*
: : i 6
i t- i CO
j CM I CM
O O
: o : o
i •a- : o
: co i P-»
i : : CM
, ! ! *~
O O
, O , LO
i CD | LO
O If)
«— • ^
LO 6
g g
CO CO
<* CO
, O , CO
1 CD 1 CD
co co oo oo
coco coco
o ^ in co
r— v— ^- t—
00 CO CO 00
•g
o>
cu
E
.Q
3
01 <"
C QJ
c E
'5 2
o | |
1 '
i i °
: : 6
o i i
CM I |
§i j
! j
P-. ! i
i i o
: :
0 0
O . If)
•* : •*
P-- : r-~
LO
6 o
,
g j
CO i
o
<- CM
00 r^-
«- , CO
00 | CO
~8~S
0)0)
cu cu
| E
3 3
cu co
EE
3 D
i i !
1 1 1
i ° !
: 6 i
i i o
o
i : o
! ! O
: : co
oo i
!
ooo
LOLO LO
o>pv p-
COCO CD
o
LOLO CM
66 LO
>
LJJ LLJ >
z
CM CM CO
00 LO LO
COCO CO
CD!H-|
00 00 CO CO 00 06
CO CO CD CO CO CO
^ CM 6 «- CN CM
CM CM T—
06 ob cn
f—
ill g
III • 1
: : : ,_ :
, CO
i o ^ LO :
i O O O I
| ! i o i
o
: : : o :
: : : LO i
: : i LO :
co i
o o LO o :
1
o o o o
o o o o ,
«- t- O O !
oo oo cn o) i
O CM LO
t— LO T— T—
LO «3- LO CD
Z ^ Z Z
z
CM >. >
O) O) O)
ooo
i o 1 o 1
1 • •
i «- i CM i
: o : o :
• ° i o !
o o
i O ! O i
* CO ! C2 i
: <* : CM :
! P^ i O) i
! CM ! CO j
,8.8,
i co : •* :
i oo" i oo" i
LO LO
CO
g g
co »d-
CM
, •* . CM .
j 00 | Pv |
O) O) CD
CO CO CO CD CD
CM CM CO "P^
^ T T °9 °?
P~ 00 CO O) CD
>.
CO
•o
cu
Jd
4—,
O)
c _j
3 ^
•a E
CA rvi
CO l^
TJ C
'" £
g ^
— CU
T3 CO
C CU
f. °"
.2" c
-c .2
J_» -M
c 2
8 1
CO m
=0 "
i 8
cu ^
II
J2 CU
QJ £
O ^
c —
CU Q.
QJ CU
£ £
T3 C
e !c
3 4-1
.£ >
*^ (0
CO £
5 <
col -O|
c
o
1
4_
CU
4--
"E
to
O
CU
U)
CU CO
•E S
"5. cu
Q- In
CO CU
0 0
c Q.
-
"O -C
o a
C CD
0 °^
» |
c -f-
a> a.
1 8
OJ t
C 0)
o >
Ol T3l
E £;
CO CL
0)1 4-1
78
-------
Figure 32. Infrared black and white photo on July 7, 1969.
Figure 33. Plume on July 8, 1969 at 15:21 from 4000 feet.
79
-------
TEMPERATURE IN DEGREES C
0
LL
DL
UJ
Q
15
10
15 5
-- 0
10 15
July 7 1969
i—
a.
UJ
o
15
July 8, 1969
Figure 34. Temperature profiles July 7 and 8, 1969.
80
-------
On August 16, 1968, the current velocity was 0.42 ft/sec and the
waste field was long and narrow as the plume was generally about 600
ft wide; however, there were several locations along the plume that
were up to 1200 ft wide. As a result of the nonuniform shape along
the axis of the plume, the application of the steady state model to the
data resulted in nearly half of the diffusion coefficients being nega-
tive. Diffusion coefficients determined from the change in concentra-
tions between flights resulted in all positive values and the average
nonsteady diffusion coefficient is listed in table 3 for August 16,
1968.
On July 8, 1969, the current velocity was 0.5 ft/sec and the steady
state diffusion coefficient was listed. The nonsteady state model was
not applicable. After the first flight, the width of the plume de-
creased due to horizontal density stratification. In figure 35 dark
upwelled water can be seen below the plume. Measurements with the
temperature probe indicated that this water was approximately two de-
grees C warmer than the inshore water. The upwelled water appears to
have moved over the plume with limited mixing between masses.
Figure 35. Plume July 8, 1969 at 15:56 from 4000 feet,
81
-------
The plume was submerged on the morning of September 12, 1968. Wea-
ther and sea conditions were calm until 14:00 when a 15-20 mph wind
began blowing. The waste field came to the surface and formed a long
narrow plume which could have been described with a one dimensional
diffusion model. The vertical aerial photography was taken with a six-
inch focal length camera at 16:30. Interference caused by sunlight re-
flection on the choppy water surface made the photography impossible to
process.
As listed in the original proposal, the first year of the study was
divided into two phases:
1) Photographing the plume and current floats and
2) Photographing dye slugs introduced into the pipeline.
On August 22, 1968, one-gallon dye slugs were injected into the pipe-
line at 15-minute intervals using compressed air. It was raining on
this day and no photography was taken. However, individual dye slugs
were not observed from the boat. On September 10, 1968, the time
interval was increased to one hour. Because of density stratification,
the waste field and dye slugs were submerged. There was no wind on
this day and the swell height was one to two ft. The dye slugs and
waste field were visible on the aerial photography below the sea sur-
face. The dye slugs did not move away from the outfall in discrete
patches as planned, but accumulated about the outfall area. When the
dye patches first appeared about the outfall they were doughnut shaped.
Two-gallon dye slugs were introduced into the pipeline at one hour in-
tervals on September 11, 1969; however, the aerial photography was
cancelled due to cloudy skys. The plume was submerged but the in-
dividual boils over the outfall could be seen from the boat. Dye con-
centrations were detectable visually and with the fluorometers only
directly over the outfall.
Had aerial photography been obtained of the dye patches under ideal
conditions, it would have been difficult to process. Considering a
nonsteady state dye patch within a nearly steady state waste field,
the amount of dye, waste and sea water could occur in various combi-
nations which would be impossible to distinguish by measuring the light
return with the three broad bands of color photography. At a minimum,
four individual narrow pass bands would have been required to obtain
meaningful results. This phase of the study was replaced by dye slugs
dropped from the airplane away from the waste field.
Summaries of the aerial photography for the 1968 and 1969 field sea-
sons are shown in tables 4 and 5, respectively. The date, flight
time, altitude,camera, and type of film are listed in the table.
As listed in the original proposal, water samples were collected dur-
ing the first year of the study and tested for BOD, COD, FBI, dissolved
oxygen and dye tracer concentration. The dissolved oxygen content of
82
-------
a
CO
.
D)
O
o
a
cu
CO
00
CO
CD
CO
I
to
1=
CO
o
GO
LL
col
0
O
0.
4~>
CO
O
00
Q
CO
cf
1
Q.
O)
"Q- o
E a.
to
4—
T3
LU
to
a
J3IXI
LU Ul
to c/)
s_?
a
_a
LU
to
E
LL
CO
cu
1
OJ
"O — 7
3 *-»
cu H
.E Q.
cu
CO
Q
CD
q
CO
CO
CN
J
'
,
j
j
!
cu
E
o
k.
sz
0
Js
LU
5
CO
s
CN
00
8
p~
00
CO
00
00
O3
q
CO
i i i i
! : i :
! I I I
i i i i
CO. CD CD !
CN «-' t-' i
CN LO CN .
P^> O *& !
CO CO CO i
in r-' r-.' i
CM
^ I i
N CC • •
in in in o
CN CN CN LD
T- T- r- CM
o o «- o
CM co •* in
?"**• i^* I*** r^
in co
CM LO
^ CO
^J- 1
CM i
O) i
•>* q
CM' co
00 CO
i-- in
00 «-'
CO CO
cu
E
o
L_
LU 00
5 %
T 'cu
00 N
Sin
CN
CM «-
00 *
«- o
in o
in co
00
CO
T—
CO
1 1
i ;
1 '
CO 1
CN !
r-« ,
00 !
o |
i j
^
or i
in o
CN 10
«- CN
•* 00
CO «-
«- CN
CO CD
6 «-
CN CO
LO i j i
CN i i i
CN i : :
i '• '• '•
• i i i
i i i i
I I ! !
i i i i
i i i i
§8
C CN ! !
< Q i i
C! -a 9
co 5 DC i
o LO in o
CO i- «— CO
CO «- CO •*
«- CM CO »«•
O 0 0 0
00
,1
CM
CO
6 co
co o
O CM
• ; !
! ! I
i i i
! ! 1
i i i
! i !
I * !
: : |
! i i
§8 ,
C CN i
< Q i
;
T ^
^5 !
in o m
CN LO CN
CO CM CO
in T- in
*~
o in in
r- CN CO
000
00
CO
o
r—
(33
in CN
T. •?:
CO l~»
! i i
I ! !
i i i
j j j
i i i
i i |
! ! |
i : i
co O
c CN :
< Q i
:
"7 £
- ± \
in o in
CN in CN
CO CN CD
in i- in
*
CD T- i-
m »- CN
in co co
CO
CO
6
oS
in en
CN •*
O3 O
i i i
i ! !
i i i
; ; ;
• i .
i ! i
I ! !
i i i
! ! !
§8
C CN !
< Q i
;
S ^
z± \
in o in
CN LO CN
CO CN CO
in «- in
^
CN O CO
«- CO ^~
o o o
00
CO
CN
T—
d)
G> «-
^" *~
in r^
co I i
co ! i
CN i :
; ; ;
i i i
i i !
! I t
i i i
i i i
cu u
E •£.
0 Q
>- CO
" g1
CO C
.£ to a
LU S <
.2 *
co N a:
Bo o
o o
Ro o
CD CO
«- CD "*
CO Tt LO
CO CO CO
00
CM
C?3
CO
~5
CO
£
o
o
Q.
•a
c
CO
CO
CD CD
to"3
o -*-1
^1
II
SI
arison
arison
Q. O-
E E
0 O
o o
CO CO
E E
o o
"4— M—
O O
!«!«
CD CO
C/5C/5
col -Q|
83
-------
a
CD
O)
0
o
JZ
a
Is
S
0)
CT
25
O
en
CO
en
^
cu
•£
4—
O
CO
E
E
CO
in
CD
JS
CD
4-*
CO
o
CO
1 1
O
o
sz
a.
4-1
CO
CO
>
.c
a
CO
s
s
i:
0.
O)
•E 1—
fa
CO
.
^
-ol
co
a
rt .Q
LIJ]LU
co co
M—
a
LU
co
JQl
CM
LTD
I
-Q.I
IS
U-I
a
CD
T3
'•P --^
c ^ —
t o
jza_
0)
CD
Q
6 co
LO CO !
t t
\ ^ i
i £ !
co r» o
CN CO LO
r^ o oo
^ CO ^
o en CN
t CM CM
CM CM CM
3 in in
f^ ^f ^f
00 00 CO
CM CM CM
00 CO 00
III
in «- co
«- CM in
in LD in
(35
CO
00
r^.
•* r^
CN CO
,
** i
en
2 !
CO CO
LO •*
^- co
CM en
co in
CM CO
CN CM
•* ^t-
coco
CN CN
in in
LD LO
CN CM
LSS
S^^
^D
CM »-
in o
CM CO
en
<9
CM
00
cn co
^ CN :
i
i i i
i "> !
! ! !
i i i
O <- O
i- CO 1^
CO 00 00
r- * f
CO CO CO
<* <* •*
00 00 00
CM CM CM
LO LO LO
CM CN CM
CM CM CM
CO CD 00
<- co •*
CM CO ^3-
'-«-'*•
O>
CO
CO
C35
CA
"5
CO
0)
« 3
£|
.c CL
ft-g
S ra
• "~~ c
c "H »
^~ '-^ *^
-C r- 2
•^ E Q
Q) ^
— U) CO
^^ •*— ' j^
•S * =
-E 2 .S
CO (•• iS
^^ fc Co
.m
5 T3 O
io 1 °
1— O CO
p "« E
C (/> tr
CD w O
O CD l-
T
"^ C • —
^ 0 S
S t^ co
colnl ol
CD
4-1
CD
Id,
C C
•£ "o.
^ w
C ™
mpariso
:he boat
O 7"
o
CO H«
E cS
S.E
^_ —
f\ O
CJ w
K §
ll
•al
-------
the water samples were consistently at or near saturation. However,
the standard error in conducting the BOD, COD, and FBI tests were
about the same magnitude as the test results and the chemical sampling
phase of the study was discontinued after the first season.
Originally, nine surface floats with drogues attached at various depths
were planned to be set in the receiving water prior to the aerial
photography for determining the water currents. Because of the time
required to set and retrieve the floats, only three floats were set
after the first two sampling runs.
For each day that waste concentrations were computed from both the
densitometer measurements taken on the aerial photography and the
fluorometer records from the boat sampling, a comparison was made of
the concentrations determined by the two methods by matching the
ground coordinates. The mean square residuals for this comparison are
listed under the column heading of Boat-Photo. Points for the com-
parison were selected at 60-ft along the boat's track. Only points in-
side the waste field were used in the comparison. On August 12, 1969,
foam from the waste covered the water surface near the outfall and this
area was deleted from the comparison.
Plots of the residuals for flight 1 on August 8, 1968, and flight 2 on
August 16, 1968, are given in figure 36. In figure 37 are two plots of
residuals for the second flights on July 8, 1969, and August 12, 1969.
In general, maximum residuals occurred near median concentration val-
ues. Plots showing both the concentrations determined from the aerial
photography and those measured by boat sampling are given in figures
39 through 41. The X axis of the plot represents distance along the
boat's track when inside the waste field. The distance in feet would
be equal to the position number times 60. The correlation coefficient
between the two methods ranged from 0.85 to 0.95.
Continuous boat sampling of the waste field was conducted while the
survey vessel was underway. Where the boat sampling lines crossed,
concentrations were measured twice at one point within a relatively
short period of time. Continuous boat sampling was generally con-
ducted over a period of about one hour. A measure of the repeatability
of the concentrations determined by boat sampling is given by the mean
square residual for these observations as listed in tables 4 and 5 un-
der the column heading - MSB .
The F statistic listed in the tables can be used to test for a signifi-
cant difference in the residuals computed between the boat and photo
data and within the boat data. Using a 95 percent confidence level,
the F statistic would have to be greater than 2.5 to indicate that the
residual within the boat data is significantly greater than the resi-
dual between the boat sampling and the photo values.
85
-------
C9
-5
Wb= concentration •• Wp= concentration
from boat ' from photos
•10
a
0
-5
10
• '^- •.«.-••: ••'• 5 '•• •. •• • '• 10 WP
Flight 1 August 8, 1968
• 5 ' '• .10 '. .'IS- •: '20 WP
Flight 2 -. August 16, 1968
Figure 36. Plot of residuals - 1968
86
-------
Q.
-5
Q.
= concent ration Wp^concentration
from boat from photos
0
(D
'* • •*.' V*
i, ..';'—-
10
Flight 2
July 84 1969
0
(D
-5
Flight 2
10
'August 12, 1969
Figure 37. Plot of residuals - 1969
87
-------
15
10
5
0
August 8, 1968
0 10 20 30 40 50
Position Numbers at 60-ft Intervals
(fl
-H-J
•| 10
.E 5
c 0
.2 50
03
c
C9
U
C
O
u
60 70 80 90
Boat sampling from 16:06 to 18:09
Photos taken at 17:41
100
100 110 120 130 140 150
Figure 38. Comparison of boat and photo values on August 8, 1968.
-------
30
20
10
0
August 16, 1968
PHOTO
0 10 20 30 40 50
Position Numbers at 60-ft Intervals
C9
30
= 20
E
.E 1°
c °
g 50
"S
-------
July 8, 1969
20
10
0
PHOTO BOAT
0
10
20
30
40
50
Position Numbers at 60-ft. Intervals
CO
E
c
c
o
-------
20
1O
n
" r— PHOTO BOATy
/
/
/
/ , ,
August 12, 1969
0
10 20 30 40 50
Position Numbers at 60 -ft. Intervals
20
^ 10
t/)
£_
-------
1970-1971 Data
The data acquired during the 1970-1971 field season are summarized on
the following pages. The results of each sampling run are tabulated
on two pages. On the left page is a contact print of the outfall area
taken with the K-17 mapping camera using panchromatic, type 2402 film
with a 25A wratten filter. The oblique photographs were taken with the
axis of the camera oriented approximately 50 degrees from the vertical.
The general orientation of the photographs can be visualized from the
shoreline which extends almost due north and south along this section
of the coast. A chart of the outfall area is shown in figure 42.
Depending upon the characteristics of the effluent, the location of the
waste field is not always evident in these photographs. If the light
scattering of the waste in the red band is high, the plume can be dis-
tinguished from the bluish-green background of sea water. However,
when the seas are rough suspended sands and silts in the sea water can
make the identification of the plume difficult in the red band. When
the waste appears black instead of brown, the greatest contrast between
the plume and the sea occurs around 500 nm. In this band the light
return from the sea water is high while the light scattered in the plume
is low.
The plot shown on the right page for a sampling run was made by photo-
graphing the CRT of the Tektronix T-4002 graphs display terminal. A
state plane coordinate grid is drawn and labeled at 1000-ft intervals.
The outline of the waste field is shown on the plot as a solid line.
Foam from the effluent is indicated with x's on the plot. The area of
the plume is computed in acres and displayed at the top of the plot.
When possible, the water current velocity is computed from the dye
patch and the vector drawn on the plot at a scale of 1.0 ft/sec to
1000 ft. The position of the centroid of the dye patch during the first
flight over the outfall area is shown on the plot at the tail of the
velocity vector. The apparent position of the boil over the outfall is
also shown on the plot as a triangle. The position of the outfall as
determined from the 1968-1969 data and shown in figure is 1069400E,
375800N.
The wind velocity and direction were listed at the two-hour interval
below the tekplot photo for the day of the observation and the previous
day. Wind data were obtained from the continuously recording anemome-
ter located on the south jetty. If this station was not in operation
or for some other reason the data were not usable, manually recorded
weather from the Newport station was plotted at 3 hr intervals. Ac-
cording to the Weather Bureau, the wind velocity at this station is
less than that which would be recorded at the south jetty but the wind
directions agree closely.
Tidal information is given on the data sheet below the wind vector
92
-------
plot. Pacific Standard Time of day was used for both the wind and tide
plots during the period October 25 through April 25. The tidal infor-
mation was obtained from the Coast and Geodetic Survey tide tables.
Factors which influence the size of wind waves include the wind veloc-
ity, wind duration and the fetch. For a given outfall location, the
fetch will vary with the direction of the wind. The effect of wind
velocity on the condition of the sea is shown in figure 93. The
photos show the condition of a developed sea for wind velocities of 15,
20, 25, 30, 40 and 50 kts, respectively. Energy from the wind is
transferred to sea as transport velocity energy and turbulent energy.
Descriptions of the sea for various wind scales are listed in table 6.
A summary of the 1970-71 data is given in table 7. Effluent discharge
rates were not available for December 21 and 23, 1970. During the
sampling period the current velocity ranged from 0.1 to 1.4 ft/sec
while the area of the waste field ranged from 7 to 464 acres. The
diffusion coefficients listed in the table were determined from the
dye patch studies. The predicted tide stage at the time of the aerial
photography is listed in column eight. In the last column of table 7
is the sea state which was estimated from the aerial photography with
the aid of both the descriptions listed in table 6 and the photos of
the sea state in figure 93. Detailed descriptions of the observations
by dates follows.
The plume on September 9 was one of the largest observed with an area
of 275 acres from an effluent discharge rate of 5850 gpm. A current
velocity of 0.3 ft/sec was measured near the outfall. The tide was at
4 ft at the time the photo was taken and rising with a maximum of 7.5
ft reached 4 hours later. It can be seen in figure 43 that some foam
is visible forming a striated pattern extending southeasterly toward
the jetty. The current vector is shown in a southwesterly direction to
the north in the afternoon. The waste plume extended northeast from
the outfall at the time of the photography. The photo has a mottled
tone with scattered whitecaps throughout the area. No definite linear
pattern is present due to the wave crests aligned perpendicular to the
wind. The diffusion coefficient parallel to the current vector was
12.9 ft^/sec and 0.4 ft^/sec perpendicular to the current.
On September 23, the plume was small with foam streaks originating
from the boil over the outfall as shown in figure 45. The foam runs
southward due to the prevailing northerly winds while the plume extends
northward. The winds on the previous day were 20 kts from the south-
west. The area of the waste field was 28 acres and the diffusion co-
efficients were 3.2 ft2/sec and 0.1 ft^/sec in the x and y directions,
respectively. The current velocity was small (0.1 ft/sec), while the
tide was 4 ft and rising with a maximum of 6.5 ft 4 hours later. The
dye patch can be seen in figure 45 approximately 2000 ft southwest of
the outfall. A light haze covers the nearshore area.
93
-------
A very distinct: plume pattern was observed on September 30. The
width of the plume increases at a decreasing rate downstream from the
outfall. The current velocity was 0.7 ft/sec which is higher than
average. The area of the plume was 128 acres with an effluent discharge
rate of 6950 gpm. Diffusion coefficients were 7.5 ft^/sec and 0.1 ft^/
sec in the x and y directions. Although the wind was approximately
10 kts from the; north only a small amount of foam was present. The
tide was at 4 ft and decreasing with the minimum being reached 3 hours
after the photos were taken. The photo in figure 47 shows the plume
as a light area with two thin foam streaks parallel to the shore ex-
tending to the right. A few whitecaps can be seen in the photo. The
sea has a finely mottled pattern with a definite linear trend normal to
the shore due to the wind waves.
On October 7, the plume was one of the smallest observed despite the
fact that the effluent flow rate was 7450 gpm. The plume is difficult
to see in figure 49 but two small foam streaks can be seen extending
southeast from the outfall. The area of the waste field was only 9
acres. At the time of the photo, the stage of the tide was 6.5 ft and
rising. The peak was reached about an hour and a half after the flight.
The dye patch can be seen in the lower right of figure 49.
A lake-like plume pattern with an area of 89 acres was observed on
October 12. The waste discharge rate was 7650 gpm and the sea was
choppy. The wind was from the north at 10-15 kts. The current veloc-
ity was not measured since only one flight was made over the outfall
area. The tide was at 2.5 ft and decreasing, reaching a low of 0.5 ft
two hours after the flight. The plume is visible in figure 51 as a
lighter patch in the center of the picture just above the dye patch.
The swell breaking on the reef can be seen in the lower right of figure
51. The sea has a mottled pattern with a number of whitecaps visible.
There is a slight linear trend to the mottled pattern caused by the
wind generated waves in the E-W direction.
On December 21, the plume was small and extended offshore from the out-
fall. Wind from the southwest at 40 kts generated large swell prior
to the photography. Breakers can be seen all along the reef in figure
53. The tide stage was at low water. The winds changed and were 10-
15 kts from the east for 24 hours before the current velocity was mea-
sured at 2.0 ft/sec to the west. The sea has a mottled pattern with a
few whitecaps. The swell can be seen peaking throughout the area be-
tween the shore and the reef. The Coast Guard recorded a swell of ten
ft at the mouth of the Yaquina River. Diffusion coefficients of
7.3 ft^/sec and 1.9 ft^/sec were measured for the x and y directions
respectively.
The waste field on December 23 tended to lake about the outfall with an
area of 26 acres. A current velocity of 1.1 ft/sec was measured in-
shore from the outfall. Diffusion coefficients were 5.1 ft^/sec in the
x direction and 0.7 ft^/sec in the y direction. The sea was calm with
94
-------
a slight northeasterly breeze. The tide was at 4 ft and falling to one
ft 3-1/2 hours later. A long streak of foam extended from the outfall
area to the northwest and can be seen in figure 55.
As can be seen in figure 57, .the sea was extremely rough on December 31.
Although the effluent discharge rate was 8700 gpm, the plume was not
visible. While the wind was relatively calm, the swell height was
eight feet from the Coast Guard records. The waves were breaking from
the outer reef to the beach. A current velocity of 1.4 ft/sec was
measured as were diffusion coefficients of 6.9 ft^/sec and 0.6 ft2/sec
in the x and y directions. The plot from the Tektronix scope shows
only the current vector extending from the position of the dye patch.
The tide was at 7.5 ft and reached a maximum of 8 ft about one hour
after the flight was taken.
A lake-like waste field was observed on January 2 with an area of 36
acres. The effluent flow rate was 6950 gpm. Diffusion coefficients
were 1.7 ft2/sec and 0.5 ft2/sec in the x and y directions. The area
near and to the north of the outfall is covered with foam as can be seen
in figure 59. The lighter water near shore was caused by the turbu-
lence from the large swell suspending the sand. Wind waves oriented
NE-SW can be seen in the upper left. The tide was at 3 ft at the time
the photo was taken and reached a peak of 7 ft approximately 3 hours
later.
During the morning of the 6th of February, the plume was observed
heading toward the north with an area of 193 acres. The current veloc-
ity near the outfall was 0.3 ft/sec. The effluent flow rate was 6450
gpm and diffusion coefficients in the area were 3.6 ft^/sec and 0.1
ft^/sec in the x and y directions. The wind had been from the east
but was beginning to shift towards the northeast at the time of the
photography. The tide stage was 0.5 ft and falling, reaching a mini-
mum of 0.0 ft four hours later. The photo in figure 61 shows foam
originating at the boil over the outfall and trailing off toward the
northwest. The plume is the lighter area north of the outfall. A few
whitecaps are present in the nearshore area but the sea surface when
viewed from about 30 degrees from the vertical appears uniform in tone.
In the afternoon of the 6th of February, the plume had shifted approx-
imately 180 degrees from the direction observed in the morning and was
headed toward the south. The area of the waste field remained approx-
imately the same as in the morning. The winds had shifted from east-
erly to northwesterly, and the long foam streak formed a U-shaped pat-
tern, open to the northeast as can be seen in figure 63. The sea was
relatively calm, and the tide was at 1.5 ft and nearly reached the
minimum of 0.0 ft at 16:00.
The plume on March 16 was small, measuring 22 acres, and extended
southward from the outfall. The sea was rough, as the photo in figure
65 shows, and the winds were approximately 20 knots out of the north.
95
-------
The tide was at a stage of 4 ft and rising to a maximum of 6 ft three
hours after the. flight. The plume can be seen in figure 65 as the dark
area near the lower center of the photo. Extensive whitecaps can be
seen everywhere. The photo has a mottled pattern with turbid water
near shore and in the shallow area between the outfall and the north
jetty. The crests of the wind-generated waves show a linear pattern
and the swell can be seen peaking outside the surf zone.
The plume on March 17 tended to lake about the outfall with a leg ex-
tending towards the southeast. As can be seen in figure 67, a foam
streak extends southward from the outfall, apparently driven by the
15 kt wind from the north. The plume can be seen in figure 67 as the
dark area surrounding the boil. Suspended silts and sands in the
nearshore area give the water a lighter tone. The sea appears rough
with numerous whitecaps in the area. There is a definite linear trend
caused by the wind generated waves and the photo has a mottled pattern.
A current velocity of 0.3 ft/sec toward the southeast was measured
north of the outfall. The tide stage was 5 ft and about 1 hour before
high tide.
The area of the plume observed on March 18 was 111 acres with a cur-
rent velocity of 0.7 ft/sec driving the plume to the south. The
effluent flow rate was 5950 gpm and diffusion coefficients of 0.4 ft /
sec in the x and y directions were measured near the plume. The winds
were shifting from northeasterly to northwesterly at the time the
photo in figure 69 was taken and the tide was at low water. The light-
er water near the shore is caused by sand being suspended by the
turbulent action of the large waves. This turbulent action continues
to suspend material to a depth of 35 ft near the north end of the
reef. Waves are breaking on the reef near the outfall.
The lake-like plume in the morning of March 19 measured 73 acres and
diffusion coefficients near the plume were determined to be 1.2 ft^/
sec in the x direction and 0.4 ft^/sec in the y direction. The cur-
rent velocity was 0.3 ft/sec in a generally westward direction. The
winds were shifting from the northeast to the northwest at the time
the observations were made and the tide was at 1 ft. The light water
near the shore in figure 71 is caused by sand suspended in the water.
The plume extended both onshore and offshore from the outfall. The
sea has a mottled pattern with a few whitecaps visible. Waves were
breaking on the reef both north and south of the outfall. Swell
crests can be seen in the upper left of the photo and near shore. The
turbid water along the coast both north and south of Yaquina Head
shows a confused circulation pattern.
In the afternoon of March 19, the plume had begun to spread to the
south, apparently due to the shifting of the wind from easterly to
northerly. The tide had passed the minimum and was at 1 ft and rising.
The photo in figure 73 shows the plume as the dark area extending both
offshore and onshore. The photo was taken from 6000 ft at 13:50 and,
96
-------
when compared with figure 71, shows the change which occurred. The
swell had decreased and the wind had increased from morning and a
number of whitecaps can be seen. The refraction wave pattern in the
lower right of the photo was caused by a sunken barge on the reef.
Photos of the outfall area on both March 18th and 19th showed very
turbid water along the coast. Neither the swell height nor wind
velocities during these days were particularly large. A heavy rain
storm began March 9 and ended March 15. Turbid fresh water runoff
from this storm may have caused these conditions in the nearshore
coastal waters.
The plume on March 24 was somewhat elongated, extended southwest and
covered an area of 58 acres. The current velocity north of the outfall
was 0.3 ft/sec and diffusion coefficients were 1.2 ft^/sec in the x
direction and 0.0 in they direction. The wind had been blowing 15-25
kts and generated rough seas as can be seen in figure 75. The waves
were breaking on the reef just offshore from the outfall located near
the lower center of figure 75. A few whitecaps can be seen near the
outfall. The tide was at low water when the photography was taken.
The plume on April 12 was the smallest observed, measuring only 7
acres and extended toward the northwest from the outfall, driven by
a current of 0.4 ft/sec. While the wind was 10-15 kts from the east,
the sea was calm as the photo in figure 77 shows. The light spot in
the center of the photo is the dye patch from which diffusion coeffi-
cients of 8.07 ft2/sec and 0.19 ft2/sec were measured. The tide was
at 5.5 ft and falling.
The plume on April 15 extended towards the southwest while a foam
streak can be seen looping back toward shore in figure 79. The area
of the plume was 68 acres with an effluent flow rate of 7700 gpm.
The tide is at 4.5 ft and flooding. The wind had been from the east
but had changed to the northwest at the time of the observations. The
light area in figure 79 extending from shore to the foam streak ap-
pears to be a tide rip. Numerous whitecaps are visible and the sea
has a mottled tone. A breaker is visible on the reef offshore from
the outfall.
The plume on April 21 was long and narrow and extended northward
approximately 13,000 ft. The effluent discharge rate was 5850 gpm
and the area of the plume was 166 acres. Some foam appears to be
generated in the waste by the 10 kt wind with foam streaks extending
northeast near the upper left of figure 81. An eddy or a tide rip
appears northeast of the outfall and may be the cause of the curved
plume pattern. The current velocity was 0.5 ft/sec near the outfall
while the x and y diffusion coefficients were only 0.3 and 0.02 ft2/
sec, respectively. The observations were made at low tide and the
wind was from the southwest.
The largest plume observed during the 1970-71 season was 464 acres on
97
-------
April 26. The current velocity was 0.3 ft/sec towards the north.
The boil over the outfall can be seen near the lower right of figure
83. The plume Is the light area extending upwards and to the left from
the outfall. The effluent discharge rate was 5800 gpm and diffusion
coefficients were 14.0 and 0.2 £t^/sec in the x and y directions, re-
spectively. The elongated dye patch can be seen in the photo just
south of the boil. The photo of the sea appears to have a slightly
mottled pattern with a few whitecaps present. The wind velocity was
only ten knots at the time of the photography. Coast Guard records
indicate that the swell was 2-4 ft.
Only one photographic flight was taken over the outfall on May 7 be-
fore the area was covered with fog. The fog can be seen on the left
in figure 85. The plume was narrow and extended northward from the
outfall. A foain streak can be seen along the nearshore edge of the
plume. The light spot near the head of the plume is the dye patch.
The observation was made during a falling tide when the wind was from
the southwest 10-15 kts and the effluent discharge rate was 6350 gpm.
On May 10th, the plume covered an area of 71 acres. The head of the
plume formed a sharp point as can be seen near the left of figure 87.
The plume extends to the right or south. The current velocity of
0.7 ft/sec was measured near the tail of the plume. Diffusion co-
efficients from the dye patch in the x and y directions were 2.8 and
0.1 ft^/sec, respectively. A few whitecaps are present near the out-
fall.
The long plume observed on May 13 extended nearly 9000 ft in a north-
easterly direction and covered an area of 197 acres. The flow rate
was 6050 gpm on this day. The plume can be seen in figure 89 as a
light area with the head of the plume near the right. The photo was
taken from 6000 ft at 14:10 and the tide at this time was 4.5 ft and
rising toward a peak of 5.5 at 16:00. Numerous whitecaps can be seen
in the sea with a finely mottled photo pattern.
The plume on May 14 extended from the outfall toward the west for
approximately 2000 ft and then headed southward for a distance of
3500 ft. The area covered by the plume was 112 acres, and the velo-
city was 0.3 ft/sec in a southwestward direction. The flow rate of
the effluent was 5800 gpm and diffusion coefficients were computed to
be 2.4 ft^/sec in the x direction and 0.1 ft^/sec in the y direction.
The photo in figure 91 was taken from 4000 ft at 14:48 and shows the
plume as a large spot with light tone in the darker surrounding
water. The tide at this time was at a stage of 5 ft and rising.
98
-------
Yaquina Head
Soundings in
fathoms MLLW from
C&GS chart 6056
Newport/Yaquma Bay
Scale in nautical miles
Chart of the outfall area at Newport, Oregon.
99
-------
o
CO
OJ
0)
o
o
oo
I
M
CTi
(1)
1
C
o
cC
(1)
3
O
o
o
4-1
o
p-
cfl
•H
ro
oo
•H
100
-------
5850 gpm
Vx= 0.3 fps
Area- 275 Ac
Dx= 12.9 ft2/sec
Dy=0.4 ft2/sec
current
*~ vector
x foam
A outfall
1000-ft grid
lOSS,
107,3
1074
.^^•i
1 372 373 374 375 37E 377 379 323 3fi0 381
0 Kn 40
i . i , i „
velocity
TEKPLOT
WIND VECTORS
-1
>,
03
Q 0
Hour
0
4
8
12
10
5
1 o
16
20
TIDAL CURVE
Figure 44. Data for September 9, 1970.
24
101
-------
o
o
o
oo
e
o
J-l
ro
4-J
ft
0)
fi
O
cfl
OJ
cd
M-l
o
o
4-J
O
cfl
•H
01
S-i
60
•H
102
-------
Flow= 5900gpm
Vx= 0.1 fps
Area = 28 Ac
Dx= 3.2 ft2/sec
0-1 ft2/sec
current
~~*" vector
x foam
A outfall
1000-ft grid
LOEf,
1C"S.
_
X J
ii
i
>,
05
Q 0
Hour
-»-
V
£
-+-
.£
C
C
-10
f 5
71
(NJ U
I
velocity
*
4
4
^
1 ^
TEKPLOT
WIND VECTORS
^
i
x
i
>
V
\
) 4 8 12
^
x^1 '
- ' "^
^-^.
x /
^
•«
16 20 24
^
ff^
^-^
-• „
~^^ j
\
>^_
TIDAL CURVE
Figure 46. Data for September 23, 1970.
103
-------
Figure 47. Aerial photo of outfall area on September 30, 1970 from 5000
feet at 14:54.
104
-------
Flow = 6950 gpm
Vx= 0.74 fps
Area=128 Ac
Dx-7.5 ft2/5GC
Dy=0.1 ft2/s<2C
current
*~ vector
x foam
A outfall
1000-ft grid
_ 3ZZ 373 374 375 376 377 3^8 [3 ^
0 Kn 40
velocity
TEKPLOT
WIND VECTORS
Q 0
Hour 0
t
J
1 4
9
t
8
12
16
20
24
10
TIDAL CURVE
Figure 48. Data for September 30, 1970,
105
-------
Figure 49. Aerial photo of outfall area on October 7, 1970
from 3000 feet at 14:32.
106
-------
Flow-7450 gpm
Vx= fps
Area=9 Ac
ft2/sec
ft2/sec
current
vector
x foam
A outfall
1000-ft grid
. 106^
, lo&a.
,_ 1069
ie^
TEKPLOT
0 Kn 40
o 0
Hour
+
V
£
•+
£
C
C
-10
* o
i
velocity
WIND VECTORS
*
^
K1
) 4 8 12
^
x^"
^~-
— -^
^^
— ^_
-^^-*
I
*
16 20 24
„
— *>
•v^
\J
"• — i
•
TIDAL CURVE
Figure 50. Data for October 1, 1970.
107
-------
cu
0)
M-l
O
o
o
§
J-l
OJ
&
O
o
o
c
o
cfl
01
o
o
o
4-1
o
cfl
•rl
LO
OJ
60
•H
108
-------
Flow= 7650 gpm
V fps
Area = 89 Ac
Dy =
ft2/S2C
current
x foam
A outfall
1000-ft grid
_ JL067
:_ie&a
1069
187P
1071
1072
1073
1074
371
372
37.3
^~-
\
37+
~v-
s '
375
\
)
S
376
377
376L
379
390-
38A
TEKPLOT
0 Kn 4,0
1
i
05
o 0
Hour
->-
V
C
+
_£
c
'c
3
i
C
J10
_j O
velocity
4
WIND VECTORS
K
tr
) 4 8 12
">^
->
^
'
s^~
^~^
\.
\
if
4
16 2O 24
^ —
+—~<*
^
_*-—
^ —
"*~-^
^
TIDAL CURVE
Figure 52. Data for October 12, 1970.
109
-------
01
0)
o
o
o
VD
S
O
o
CN
QJ
O
0)
Q
Q)
3
O
O
O
4J
O
J3
O.
CO
•H
3
bO
•H
110
-------
Flow=
Vx= 2.0 fps
Area=18 Ac
Dx-73 ft2/sec
Dy=19 ft2/sec
current
vector
x foam
A outfall
1000-ft grid
1067
t 1068
!_ 1P69
ie-e
1071
1072
1073
1074
i
37 i
372
373
r~
k^
374
rr*LL
375
/
1
376
377
323
379
330
381
TEKPLOT
0 Kn 4,0
-i
i
CTi
Q 0
Hour
-i-
•-(-
c
-h
£
C
'c
a
^
C
-10
I 5
^ V_y
velocity
^(
j
i
WIND VECTORS
C>
^^
~-
{
) 4 8 12
-
^
'
^^"
.
X
^^.
f
i i
i
i
\
•
16 20 24
~-
^
** — ^
1 -^
""
•^^
•*•
TIDAL CURVE
Figure 54. Data for December 21, 1970.
Ill
-------
in
CNl
O
O
O
ro
O
O
r-.
PI
CNJ
OJ
1
O
0)
p
c
O
cfl
OJ
O
OJ
4J
4-1
O
O
4.)
O
a.
iH
•H
CD
60
•H
112
-------
Flow =
Vx= 1.1 fps
Area=26 Ac
Dx= 5.1 ft2/sec
Dy=0.7 ft2/sec
current
*~ vector
x foam
A outfall
1000-fl grid
, 106H
i 1068
1069
10^0
1071
1072i
1072
107 +
371
372
373
fa
u\
374
i^
u
^
375
37S
377
378
379
380
381
TEKPLOT
0 Kn 40
i , i , i _
1
i
>
CQ
Q 0
Hour
-+•
H-
c
-t-
j:
c
c
3
i
C
-10
" 5
Fo
velocity
' <
>
i
1
i
WIND VECTORS
1 ,
t
i
k i
1 4
•
) 4 8
••-^
^
*• —
~^^
«
.^
,.A
^
3(
1
| J
^
' /
n
12 16 20 24
V
\
•^
^x
/
•* — .
TIDAL CURVE
Figure 56. Data for December 23, 1970.
113
-------
o
iH
• •
0)
4-1
O
o
o
CO
I
ro
01
i
01
o
0)
p
o
3
O
o
o
J-)
o
ft
n)
•H
-------
Flow =8700 gpm
Vx= 1.4 fps
Area = Ac
Dx= 79 ft2/sec
Dy=0.6 ft2/sec
current
vector
x foam
A outfall
1000-ft grid
1067
, 1068
^ 1063
1070
Wl
1872
1073
1074
371
372
373
374
^
375
T
376
322
323
73
se
81
Hour
0
10
CD
0
4
TEKPLOT
•]
' I
>
05
Q 0
C
) Kn 40
. i , i ^
velocity
i
»/
^«.
/
WIND VECTORS
^
"\
If
^
1C
^.
I
If'
*.
^A
•*
t
^
8
12
16
20
24
TIDAL CURVE
Figure 58. Data for December 31, 1970.
115
-------
Figure 59. Aerial photo of outfall area on January 2, 1971 from
4000 feet at 11:40.
116
-------
Flow -6950 gpm
— f~\ £^ i.
x 0.6 fps
Area ~ ?fi Ar
Dx=1.7 ft2/ sec
Dy=0.5 ft2/sec
current
*"" vector
x foam
A outfall
innn -H nrin
i \j\j\j i i y r i u
I iOG->
[ 1068
1069
1B70
10^1
1072
1073
1074
372
373
<
374
^x.
375
l»TFAL
/
376
377
379
73
3se
81
TEKPLOT
0 Kn 40
i , i i i ».
i
i
>
00
Q 0
Hour
-+-
4-
£
-4-
-C
c
'c
3
4
c
-10
I 5
ro
velocity
k
»
i
WIND VECTORS
*
4
X
) 4 8
x
/
^-—
*^S
• —
^
4
*
k
I
12 16 20 24
^^
r
-••^••"^
— ^
X
^ ,
^^^
s
TIDAL CURVE
Figure 60. Data for January 2, 1971,
117
-------
Figure 61. Aerial photo of outfall area on February 6, 1971
from 6000 feet at 11:55.
118
-------
Flow = 6450 gpm
Vx=03 fps
Area = 193 Ac
Dx= 3.6 ft2/sec
Dy = 0.0 ft2/sec
current
*~ vector
x foam
A outfall
1000-ft grid
Ik'S'1
,_ 1068
i_ 1069
10^0
_ 1071
1072
1073
1B74
371
372
373
\
37t
*r*"
sx>
37S
X
; X-S
VFALL
L^
376
X
K
^
-— — —
377
/
.--
378
N
'-"
379
^
_^^
380
^
381
TEKPLOT
1
1
>
CIS
Q 0
C
4
) Kn 40
. i , i ^
velocity
i
4
i
^
»
WIND VECTORS
, \
t
t
i
^
^
je^
-^,
•*-
*
It
^
^
t
\
Hour
0
4
8
16
20
10
en
0
TIDAL CURVE
Figure 62. Data for February 6, 1971 AM.
24
119
-------
Figure 63. Aerial photo of outfall area on February 6, 1971
from 4000 feet at 14:18.
120
-------
Flow = 6450 gpm
\ ^ R F
— r
x fps
Area~ 200 Ac • ioee-
;-
Dx= ft2/ sec ..IOEI; .
p
Dy= msec
10BB
current
*"" vector 1063
x ^oam
A outfall
innn f-t Mt-iH i072^
luuu TL yria
X
J63
X
X
X
x
x x
370
"/<
X
371
.>—
«^x
X J
X X ^*
372
I X
(
~\
x"1*
373
X
-X-vi
37-t
\
• — <
-------
Figure 65. Aerial photo of outfall area on March 16, 1971
from 4250 feet at 12:20.
122
-------
Flow = b750 gpm
V fps
Area- 22. Ac
Dx= ft2/sec
Dy = f t2/s<2c
current
*"" vector
x foam
A outfall
1000-ft grid
. 10E2
L _J,i>68
i_^y?£S.
i ic^e
1071
1B72
1073
187+
1
371
372
373
/
374
^X
,— -<
375
gUTFAl
376
L
377
378
373
38^
361
TEKPLOT
-1
S 0
C
'
) Kn 40
velocity
t
ft
WIND VECTORS
i
*
•
\
«*-
^^
^^*
k X"
— ^5
— *=—
Hour 0
10
cn
'5 0
31
4
8
12
16
20
24
TIDAL CURVE
Figure 66. Data for March 16, 1971.
123
-------
Figure 67. Aerial photo of outfall area on March 17, 1971
from 4000 feet at 14:25.
124
-------
Flow = 5600 gpm
Vx= 0.3 fps
Area = 126. Ac
Dx = 5.1 ft2/sec
Dy= 1.0 ft2/sec
current
vector
x
A
foam
outfall
1000-ft grid
:o6Si
10E9,
1072|
J£2
1074
T7_l 372 373 374 375 376
378 379 _38k> 3B1
-1
03
Q 0
Hour
0 Kn 40
I . I . I .
velocity.
TEKPLOT
WIND VECTORS
0
-10
c
i 5
en
5 0
I
4
8
12
16
20
24
TIDAL CURVE
Figure 68. Data for March 17, 1971,
125
-------
Figure 69. Aerial photo of outfall area on March 18, 1971
from 8000 feet at 11:42.
126
-------
Flow = 5950 gpm
Vx= 0.7 fps
Area=111. Ac
Dx= 0.4 ft2/s<2C
Dy= 0.3 ft2/sec
current
vector
x foam
A outfall
1000-ft grid
d_
1068
1069
107
107J:
371
372
373
374
Ol)l I
375
FALL
376
377
37B
373
380_
!aL._-
0 Kn
I
velocity
TEKPLOT
WIND VECTORS
-1
>
CO
0 0
Hour
(N)
I
0
4
8
12
16
20
24
TIDAL CURVE
Figure 70. Data for March 18, 1971.
127
-------
Figure 71. Aerial photo of outfall area on March 19, 1971
from 8000 feet at 11:27.
128
-------
Flow =4500 gpm
Vx=0.3 fps
Area = 73. Ac
Dx=1.2 ft2/S(2c
Dy=0.4 ft2/sec
current
*"~ vector
x foam
A outfall
1000-ft grid
10GS,
ices;
ie?3
1074
lazi.
372
373
37+
37?
376 !377
378
379
80
380 '381
TEKPLOT
0 Kn 40
-1
05
o 0
Hour
+
H-
£
-f-
_C
C
^
h
C
-10
\ 5
Ti
I
velocity
•^
*
X
WIND VECTORS
y
\
^
) 4 8
^- —
V
X
^^
"
**
^
•*-
5*=-
1
*
12 16 20 24
— ^ •
^
^
^e=OMi
s-^
__ —
•^
TIDAL CURVE
Figure 72. Data for March 19, 1971 AM.
129
-------
Figure 73. Aerial photo of outfall area on March 19, 1971
from 6000 feet at 13:50.
130
-------
Flow = 4500gpm
Vx= fps
Area = 83 Ac
Dx= ft2/sec
Dy = f t2/s<2C
current
*~ vector
x foam
A outfall
1000-ft grid
lCS^_j
106_3J__
lil-
1073
1074
iiZL
372
373
374
375
376
327 __
37B
379
380
381
TEKPLOT
0 Kn 40
1,1.-
-\
\
>,
05
Q 0
Hour
-»-
V
£
-+-
.1
C
c
3
N
V
C
-10
: 5
r0
velocity
^
*
^
^
X
%.
WIND VECTORS
n
»<
*
\
*
tf
**r
*S*
) 4 8 12
^
. — • —
.
x
X
^^.
~-
__— -"
^^'
*-^
^
^ —
^
*
16 20 24
/•
-^"
•' i .
^-^
^
TIDAL'CURVE
Figure 74. Data for March 19, 1971 PM.
131
-------
o
o
0)
0)
O
o
o
O
S-l
C
O
cfl
a)
o
o
o
-I-J
o
ex
CTJ
•H
LO
r-~
0)
t>0
•H
132
-------
Flow = 7850 gpm
Vx- 0.3 fps
Area=58 Ac
Dx= 1.2 ft2/ sec
ft2/scc
current
*~ vector
x foam
A outfall
1000-ft grid
1067
i A06B
, 1OS9
1070
1071
1872
1073
1074
371
372
C
373
-\|
\
V
374
I
\xv
375
~
3?6
377
378 _
379
386
381
TEKPLOT
0 Kn 40
•1
i
>
nj
Q 0
Hour
-4-
4-
£
-4-
j:
c
'c
3
C
-10
: 5
ro
velocity
^,
\ i
^*
i
^^
• 4
WIND VECTORS
^^
•
^
"^
^ i
"^
^
V i
54 8 12 1
*•'!••
^'
/
/
^^-
~^>,
\
\
^
^^
t
"->
h
\
A
\
i
\
6 20 24
S
^
f
— — «
***
TIDAL CURVE
Figure 76. Data for March 24, 1971.
133
-------
Figure 77. Aerial photo of outfall area on April 12, 1971
from 6000 feet at 14:45.
134
-------
Flow= 7700 gpm
Vx= 04 fps
Area = 7 Ac
Dx=8.07 ft2/sec
Dy= ft2/s<2C
current
*~ vector
x foam
A outfall
1000-ft grid
1 1*6-
i iesa
. 1C<63
ip-e
1B71
1972
1073
ie74
371
372
373
374
37S
1
jlLlTFM.
376
377
378
379
383
381
-1
>
re
Q 0
0 Kn 40
I ._L_, !_»,
velocity
Hour 0
c
10
5
I
4
\
TEKPLOT
WIND VECTORS
8
12
16
20
TIDAL CURVE
Figure 78. Data for April 12, 1971.
24
135
-------
QJ
QJ
O
O
O
O
M
4-1
•H
t-t
a
O
n)
a)
o
o
4-1
O
a.
td
•H
136
-------
V
Flow = 7700 gpm
fps
Ac
Dx= ft2/sec
Dy= ft 4sec
current
*"" vector
x foam
A outfall
1000-ft grid
I ie&2
I 106S
; 1069
1070
1B71
1072
1073
107*
.
371
372
\
'*"' •••—
x 1
X
373
^
^x
x «„
37+
-_^
-^c
""i
375
>
JTF«L1
376
377
378
379
see
H
361
TEKPLOT
0 Kn 40
. i . i ^
-1
>
03
Q 0
Hour
+
s-
c
-1-
j;
c
*^
C
-10
I 5
J)
a ^
X
velocity
^
>^
«ir"
n
WIND VECTORS
r
f
/
.a"
*
*f
) 4 8 12
*^-*—
^-^
s^
\
^
"-
_r**
/
\
if
\
«
^
•
^ ^
16 20 24
s^^
-~—^^\
^-^
-^
S
^
^-
TIDAL CURVE
Figure 80. Data for April 15, 1971,
137
-------
4J
rt
o
o
o
e
o
S-l
a
o
n)
OJ
t-l
n3
4-1
o
o
o
ct)
•H
oo
a)
00
•H
138
-------
Flow = 5850 gpm
Vx= 0.5 fps
Area = 166 Ac
Dx=0.34 ft2/sec
Dy=0.02 ft2/sec
current
vector
x foam
A outfall
1000-ft grid
meg
ygup
376
3ZS 322 3SB 3B1 3B2 3B3 3B4 385 3BK
TEKPLOT
0 Kn 40
. i . i ^
-i
i
>,
(15
Q 0
Hour
-4-
H-
t
-4-
j:
c
c
3
*-
C
-1O
: s
ro
velocity
N^
\ ;
4
f
x"
WIND VECTORS
s
4
*s
.
X
X
/
"^
) 4 8 12
^
«__. '
X
^"~
-s.
">v_
\
/
X
f
•*.
ff
•^fc.
^r^
*r~
j
*
16 20 24
^
'—
^
J^"
/
,---— —
>
V
TIDAL CURVE
Figure 82. Data for April 21, 1971.
139
-------
o
CM
o
o
o
I
a
o
C8
QJ
3
O
o
o
4-1
o
a.
n)
•H
OO
CO
60
•H
140
-------
Flow = 580O gpm
Vx= 0.3 fps
Area = 464 Ac
Dx= 13.90 ft2/sec
Dy=0.19 ft2/sec
current
vector
x foam
A outfall
1000-ft grid
izs
322 3ZS.
379 388 381
382 38
TEKPLOT
0 Kn 40
i , i ~
1
i
>
03
Q 0
Hour
+
"-t-
c
-+-
^
c
'c
1
<4 -•
i
C
J10
" 5
ro
velocity
• — -«
>»^
,
i
n
WIND VECTORS
i
>
/
¥
i
i
I
/
/
) 4 8 12
~^
\
\
N
-*- —
^
/
s*'
/r
i
\ t
J
»
%.
*
X
16 20 24
~~-~~~+
*^
^
•+- i ,
^
/
^^
TIDAL CURVE
Figure 84. Data for April 26, 1971.
141
-------
Figure 85. Aerial photo of outfall area on May 7, 1971
from 4000 feet at 15:13.
142
-------
Flow = 6350 gpm
vx= fps
Ar
-------
4-1
0)
Q)
O
O
O
O
cfl
s
C
O
to
OJ
3
O
14-4
O
o
a-
•H
M
-------
Flow = 5975 gpm
Vx= 0.7 fps
Area=71 Ac
Dx = 2.8 ft2/sec
Dy=0.1 ft2/sc2C
current
*~ vector
x foam
A outfall
1000-ft grid
.1073
'371 37Z
373 374 375 376 377 37B 3^9 Ifif,
TEKPLOT
-1
>
(T5
Q 0
C
t
*
) Kn 40
. i , i ^
velocity
1
«
» i
«
WIND VECTORS
«.
i
/
*^
/
*^
S
^
*^
*^
« — *
»
<-
»
•
Hour 0
4
8
12
16
20
24
^
0
TIDAL CURVE
Figure 88. Data for May 10, 1971.
145
-------
cfl
0)
o
o
o
o
c
o
0)
n)
H
iH
ctf
4-1
O
o
o
4J
O
cfl
•H
oo
ai
bO
•H
146
-------
Flow = 6050 gpm
V fps
Area = 197 Ac
x
A
msec
current
vector
foam
outfall
375 376 37? 378
381 392 383 384 '385 _J
1000-ft grid
TEKPLOT
0 Kn 40
i . i , i ^
i
i
>,
ca
Q 0
Hour
•4-
<*.
c
-(-
_c
c
'c
3
c
-10
I 5
r0
velocity
^
\K
"^
>k
^K
WIND VECTORS
_- ^
"^*.
^
^
^
"^
) 4 8 12
x-- —
•^N
\
\|
x
"*«*,
-~
^
^
X
^^*.
"^
^^
^*.
^
^^*^
N
^>-^
~^»i
^-K
16 20 24
-^-^™"
x^
— — ^
^^.
— -
x^
s~
^
TIDAL CURVE
Figure 90. Data for May 13, 1971.
147
-------
Figure 91. Aerial photo of outfall area on May 14, 1971
from 4000 feet at 14:48.
148
-------
Flow = 5800 gpm
Vx= 0.3 fps
Dx=24 ft2/sec
Dy=0.1 ft2/sec
current
""" vector
x foam
A outfall
1000-ft grid
l»6-j _
, -lOESi
. 1C6S
1073
, 1074
r^
^~V~.
3.72
^
373
^"^--^
374
"^
X1
3,75
-
376
L
377
379
373
38H
Jbl
Q 0
0 Kn 40
i . i . i »
velocity
TEKPLOT
WIND VECTORS
Hour 0
10
4
8
12
TIDAL CURVE
Figure 92. Data for May 14, 1971.
i
16 20
24
149
-------
Wind 15 kts
Wind 25 kts
Wind 20 kts
Wind 30 kts
Wind 40 kts Wind 50 kts
Figure 93. Photos of sea conditions (from Neumann & Pierson, Jr., 1966)
150
-------
Table 6. Wind scales and sea descriptions (after Bascom 1964).
Beaufort
Scales
Wind
Velocity
Knots
Description
Wave
Heights
feet
State
of Sea
Code
1
2
10
1-3
5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
Light air; ripples-no foam
crests. 0
Light breeze; small wavelets,
crests have glassy appear-
ance and do not break. 0-1
Gentle breeze; large wave-
lets, crests begin to break.
Scattered whitecaps. 1-2
Moderate breeze; small waves
becoming longer. Frequent
whitecaps. 2-4
Fresh breeze; moderate
waves taking a more pro-
nounced long form; mainly
whitecaps, some spray. 4-8
Strong breeze; large waves
begin to form extensive
whitecaps everywhere,
some spray. 8-13
Moderate gale; sea heaps up
and white foam from breaking
waves begins to be blown
in streaks along the direc-
tion of the wind. 13-16
Fresh gale; edges of crests
break into spindrift. The
foam is blown in well-
marked streaks along the
direction of the wind. 16-20
Whole gale. The surface
of the sea takes on a white
appearance. The rolling
of the sea becomes heavy. 20-30
5-1/2
151
-------
Table 7. Summary of the 1970-71 data.
Effluent
Flow,
Date gpm
9-9-70
9-23-70
9-30-70
10-7-70
10-12-70
12-21-70
12-23-70
12-31-70
1-2-71
2-6-71 am
2-6-71 pm
3-16-71
3-17-71
3-18-71
3-1 9-71 am
3-19-71 pm
3-24-71
4-12-71
4-15-71
4-21-71
4-26-71
5-7-71
5-10-71
5-13-71
5-14-71
5850
5900
6950
7450
7650
8700
6950
6450
6450
5750
5600
5950
4500
4500
7850
7700
7700
5850
5800
6350
5975
6050
5800
Time
Between
Flights
Seconds
1920
1500
780
1200
540
360
600
720
2100
1920
900
1500
2040
1020
1980
1680
1980
Current
Velocity,
ft/sec
0.3
0.1
0.74
2.0
1.1
1.4
0.6
0.3
0.3
0.7
0.3
.0.3
0.4
0.5
0.3
0.7
0.3
Plume
Area, Acres
275
28
128
9
89
18
26
36
193
200
22
126
111
73
83
58
7
68
166
464
34
71
197
112
Diffusion
o°X
ft2/sec
12.9
3.2
7.5
7.3
5.1
7.9
1.7
3.6
5.1
0.4
1.2
1.2
8.1
0.3
13.9
2.8
2.4
Coefficients
oy
ft2/sec
0.4
0.1
0.1
1.9
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.0
1.0
0.3
0.4
0.0
0.2
0.0
0.2
0.1
0.1
Tide
ht-ft
+ flood
-ebb
4 +
4 +
4 -
6.5+
2.5-
2.5-
4 -
7.5+
3 +
5 -
1.5-
4 +
5 +
0.5+
1 -
1 +
0 +
5.5-
4.5+
0.5-
6.5-
2.5-
4 -
4.5+
5 +
State of
Sea Code
4
2
3
2
3
3
2
5
2
2
2
5
4
2
2
2
3
2
3
2
3
3
3
4
3
152
-------
SECTION XI
DISCUSSION OF RESULTS
During the 1968 and 1969 field seasons, field work was conducted dur-
ing the summer. Since boat work was required in the nearshore area,
data acquisition was limited to periods of relatively calm seas when
the swell seldom exceeded five ft and the current velocity was general-
ly less than 0.5 ft/sec. Boat work was discontinued during the 1970-
1971 season and field work was conducted during the fall, winter and
spring when rough sea conditions prevailed and current velocities
greater than 0.5 ft/sec were common.
One Dimensional Diffusion Model
As a result of the various plume patterns observed over the period
of the project, the Fickian diffusion model with a unidirectional
transport velocity appears to provide a reasonably accurate description
of the surface transport and dilution process when the current veloc-
ity in the receiving water is high. A sketch showing the steady state
plume patterns expected from a line source with a unidirectional
velocity is given in figure 94. If the diffusion coefficient (Dy) is
constant, the widths of the plume should increase with the distance
downstream from the outfall at a decreasing rate or the sides of the
plume should be concaved inward. The center sketch in figure 94
shows the plume shape for a diffusion coefficient that increases
linearly with the scale. For this model the sides of the plume are
straight. If, however, the diffusion coefficient varies to a larger
power of the scale such as the 4/3 power, the plume width should in-
crease at an increasing rate or the sides of the plume should be con-
caved outward.
Sinusoidal oscillations along the length of the plume will cause the
width to increase faster than normal. From the dye patch studies, the
diffusion coefficient in the x-direction was generally several times
greater than that in the y-direction or normal to the flow. In a
steady state plume, the longitudinal diffusion coefficient is not ef-
fective in reducing the waste concentration because of the small change
in concentration gradients in the x-direction. Oscillations along the
length of the plume will cause the width of the plume to increase at
a faster rate than would normally be expected from the magnitude of
the lateral diffusion coefficient. A curved plume pattern will create
large changes in the concentration gradient in the x-direction and the
longitudinal diffusion coefficient will become effective in reducing
the waste concentration.
A diffusion model with a unidirectional transport velocity is not
applicable to the plume pattern when the current velocity in the re-
ceiving water is low. Figure 95 is an isoconcentration plot of the
waste field on August 8, 1968. The outfall is located near the upper
153
-------
>x
>X
>x
c
05
c/)
C
o
u
o
+
CD
X
(O
>x
(O
C\J
(O
Q
•H
O
O
O
ex
CO
s
to
cfl
C
o
o
0)
M
•H
T3
•H
§
CO
C
a)
4-1
60
•H
154
-------
Figure 95. Isoconcentration plot, August 8, 1968.
155
-------
center of the plot and the plume extends downward. The plume is 2400
ft wide and 3000 ft long. Concentrations shown on the plot are in
ml/L. The diffusion coefficients computed from the one dimensional
model are listed in table 8 for August 8, 1968. It can be seen that
the diffusion coefficients computed from the change in variance between
each fifth section along the axis of the plume are extremely high at
the head of the plume with a few negative values toward the tail of the
plume. While the sea was choppy, the initial spreading of the waste
field was not due to diffusion but rather to the surface spreading of
a source in a uniform stream. The average initial dilut-ion over the
outfall was about 1:100. The sea water, when combined with an effluent
discharge rate of 12.4 cfs, would create a source with a strength of
1240 cfs over the outfall near the surface and a sink of nearly equal
strength below the surface. The subsurface sink in general draws
water upstream from the outfall similar to the draw down on a well in
an aquifier, while the surface source discharges its water downstream.
The vertical jet from the diffuser section of the outfall provides the
connection for the transfer between the sink and source and supplies
the energy necessary to lift the dense subsurface water from the bottom
to the sea surface.
Potential Flow
Figure 96 shows a line source of strength a in a uniform flowing
stream. The velocity of the uniform flow is U and
Where Q is the effluent discharge rate in cfs, DIL is the dilution
over the outfall, b is the length of the diffuser section and DEP is
the average depth of the waste field. The potential flow is given by
+ i ip
rb/2
=-uz +
In (iZ-y1) dy1 (109)
J-b/2
Where $ is the potential function, ty is the stream function and
Z = x + iy (110)
Equation 109 can be reduced to
4) = -uz
+ a(iZ + b/2 In (iZ + b/2) (111)
- a(iZ-b/2) In (iZ-b/2)
156
-------
CD
Oi
oo"
tt
Ol
<£
-
CN
4-»
.c
01
^
C/3
C
OJ
|o
cu
o
c
g
CO
3
£
-Q
CD
.—
_E
ct
CO
CO
.D.
CO
1-
u
cu
V)
<^ a
LL £
'*"' >
cu _
p
o
o
o
cu
c
CO
CL.
CO
1X
c
V
'° 1-
12:
cS
^"
CO
|£
CO
JZ
a
QJ
Q
OOOOOOOoO
(JJLULULULULULULUUJ
LOOOCNCDI^O5CNCOO
^incNr>-r».ina>co'-
»-r^cj)OCNCor~.cNCO
•SfCOCO^-'frCOCNCNCN
o o o
LULUUJLULULULULULU
LOCNOO)OOr--CDCOCD
^•r^LOcor^r^ococo
•-OOCNLOOCO^rCQCQ
•^CO'^-'i-LOLnCN'-^CN
oo'-'-'tinr-CN'-cn
rT'-LOoocnajcococo
p~cocoor^'a-r-oor>
LOLOLOLOft^fCOCO
cococococococococo
P~.COP-CD'-OO'^LOI~-
CDCNP^COCOCOOCOO
r^^sfCN*— oc3)O3i^^
O)G3C7>O)O^COOOOOCO
COCDCOCDCDCDCDCOCO
OOOOOOOOO
§«- <- o o o o o
o o o o o o o
[JJ III III lit HI III HI 111 111
T— COOCn^tCOLO^LO
CNP~O5OCOCN«-O'-
CNCNOCOCOqCOt-. C35
CD ^~ *~ o^ r*** co ^j" co '™™
CNCNCNCNCNCNCNCNCN
OOOOOOOOO
LULUUJLULULULULULU
§LOCNC35LOr~.COt-00
•-LOCOLO'i-'itCOLO
t-CNCNj«-;q»-;l^^-aJ
co^LOcor^r^cocDco
CDLOCOCOLO^J-LO^rCN
CDCOCOCOCO^COCD^'
*~
r^.OJenioco'S-'-or*
§CNlOt^t-COO500O
^" CO "^f CD P"*1 CO CO CN
T-«-CNCNCNCNCOCOCN
T-CD«-COi-CO«-CO«-
T-r-CNCNCOCO'd-'*LO
0)
O) (O (O LO
C LL § § g
CD FT-
OC tn LU LU LU
_ r- CD CD
£- CO r^ • — no
.2 £ 5 5 o
ro < CN T- aj
c
CO
o
c
o
0
.c
0
CO
LU
C ir
£ ^ CN ^t CO
~ CO
SCO
^ IT
^
•d
0?^
00 LL -D
[£"« =
t-3 *~ >. ^
'S' c/3 .ti in
S E o cJ
a, S | "§
<" • j_. 'S
DC N -g *;
Isil
LL 00 CJ 00
CD LD
o o
LU LU
CO CO
CO CO
i- CN
O LO
CD 6
157
-------
u
Line Source in a Uniform Stream
Figure 96. Geometry for a line source in a uniform stream.
from which the stream function is
i|) = -UY + a[(Y + 4) 6,
fv \ a v
- (Y - -£ Q2 - X
r
r.
where
tan 9 =
(112)
(113)
tan
(114)
2 X
The value of the stream function along the axis of the plume (y = 0)
158
-------
IS
ijj = a b ir (115)
While the value of y when fy = 0 and x approaches °° is
ot b IT
y - ——
The values of the x and y velocity components are given by
(116)
= -U + a(6l - 62) (117)
V = = = a in () (118)
y
Equation 112 was programmed to solve for the x and y coordinates of
the streamlines. Two plots from the Tektronix plotter are shown in
figure 97. The source strength for each plot is 300 cfs per ft of
depth. A state plane coordinate grid is drawn and labeled at 1000-ft
intervals. The outer streamline defines the plume boundary if the
diffusion effluents were equal to zero. This plume can also be repro-
duced from the following modification of the diffusion model (equation
56).
f =-[|Y +lxCvw)] (119)
where the x and y components of the velocity are determined from equa-
tions 117 and 118. The model given by equation 119 would be applicable
when the sea is calm and the diffusion coefficients low.
On each plot in figure 97 the outer streamline has a value of zero
while the centerline has a value of 150 as given by equation 115. The
two plots are for line sources oriented perpendicular to a uniform
stream of 0.1 and 0.5 ft/sec, respectively.
The four streamline sketches in figure 98 are for a line source of
strength 300 cfs per ft of depth in a uniform stream of 0.0, 0.1, 0.3
and 0.5 ft/sec, respectively. The streamlines were traced from
Tektronix plots such as those shown in figure 97. At zero current
velocity, the waste field lakes or ponds about the outfall area. As
shown in figure 98, the potential flow solution would give a down-
stream plume width of 3000 ft in a uniform stream of 0.1 ft/sec. As
the current velocity increases, the plume width decreases to 1000 ft
at 0.3 ft/sec and 600 ft at 0.5 ft/sec. The minimum width of the
plume would be the length of the diffuser section.
When a waste water stream discharged from a submerged outfall spreads
at the surface, the resulting drift flow plume pattern is influenced
159
-------
UEL = .1FT-SEC
Q< DILUTION >xDEPTH= 300CFSXFT
1065
1066
-- -j
JL_069_
1070
10714
1072
374 375 376 377 378 579 G80 331 382 383
,PSI
150
>'' I .SI I SIC
a
«< DILUTION)
3»»crs/rr
1866 I
1*6' ,
1069
IS*
75 376 37? 37i 379 386 391 3S2 383
Figure 97. Plots of a source in a uniform stream.
160
-------
£
I—
Z)
O
co
Q_
Q.
"D
H—
O
-M
s—
O)
U
O
O
oo
O)
c
C9
LT>
>x
ID
t
o
ro
•
O
O
o
d
x
cu
o
!-i
d
o
CD
OJ
c
•H
CO
C
o
•H
O
CO
a
CD
4-J
o
00
o\
cu
Ml
•H
161
-------
by the ambient current velocity and the amount of residual buoyancy
and momentum (if any) in the waste stream (Baumgartner and Trent,
1970). Rather accurate methods are available to calculate dilutions
in the buoyant jet, neglecting the influence of ambient currents in
this region. When density stratification occurs in the region surround-
ing the outfall, a plume can form without residual buoyancy and these
dilution models can be used to determine the depth at which the lens
first forms, whether or not portions of the plume rise to the surface
(Baumgartner, Trent and Byram). This model offers a means for esti-
mating the initial concentration and depth of the drift flow plume.
The initial width and curvature of the surface plume can be estimated
using a potential flow solution for a source in a uniform stream. For
a single outfall port a point source would be used and for a multiport
diffuser, a line source over the diffuser length can be used. In this
way the relative influence of the ambient current, diffuser length and
orientation can be evaluated.
Diffusion Model
In order to gain insight into the Fickian diffusion model and to de-
termine the relative importance of the terms in the equation on the
plume shape, a modified form of equation 56 was programmed so that the
waste field could be simulated on the computer. For the computer
model, the vertical diffusion coefficient (Dz) and the velocity in the
vertical direction (Vz) in equation 56 were set equal to zero. In the
resulting two-dimensional model the loss of waste to the lower layers
due to vertical mixing was considered by substituting a decay term
(-kW) for the sink term in equation 56. The resulting two-dimensional
diffusion equation is:
iK = i_ , M} + JL ,n ™*
3T 3Y v y 8Y7 3X V x 3Xy
- [|Y (V W) + |=r (V W)] - kW (120)
d i y dA x
The initial condition for the model was that the concentrations
throughout the waste field were zero. At the start of each incre-
mental time period, the waste concentration for the elements in the
array at the outfall were set equal to the concentration that resulted
from the initial jet dilution. During each incremental time period
the waste field is moved or convected in the array, diffused and de-
cayed according to the model.
Two isoconcentration plots from this model are shown in figure 99.
The outfall is located at the top of each plot and the plume extends
downward. Current velocities for the two plots were 0.1 ft/sec and
0.5 ft/sec, respectively, while the diffusion coefficients were
Dy = Dx = 2 ft2/sec. A source strength of 300 cfs/ft of depth was
used to determine the current velocity components. The print out time
was 90 minutes from the start of the effluent discharge, and the decay
162
-------
o
0)
CO
LO
O
-------
coefficient was 0.1 per hour.
Temperature
Vertical density stratification can cause the waste field to be formed
below the sea surface. Of the 21 sampling runs conducted during the
summers of 1968 and 1969, a surface plume was observed on eight days,
the plume was submerged on six days and the waste field was not ob-
served on seven days due to fog or rain. During these two summers a
surface plume occurred for only 60% of the observations. Generally,
the plume was not visible when the sea was calm. However, of the 25
observations conducted in the fall of 1970 and the winter and spring
of 1971, the plume was not visible on only one day which was when the
sea was extremely rough.
Changes in density can be caused by a variation in temperature and or
salinity. Fresh water runoff from the coastal streams is at a minimum
during the summer months and variations in temperature are generally
the major cause of vertical density stratification in the nearshore
area during the summer. Upwelling, which occurs during the summer,
brings to the surface the more dense subsurface water rich in nutrients.
Upon reaching the surface, plankton begin growing. This suspended
material reduces the transparency of the water and increases the sun-
light absorption coefficient. Under relatively calm sea conditions, a
thin surface layer of dark green water warms rapidly and can become
lighter than the less saline subsurface water. During periods of up-
welling, there is generally a narrow band of clear water between the
land and the dark green offshore water. In addition to the seasonal
variation in temperature there is also a diurnal variation. The
diurnal thermocline is especially prominent during calm summer days.
The sketch in figure 100 shows the progressive variation in vertical
temperature structure for various times of the day.
The absorption of solar radiation by the upper layers is readily ap-
parent as the surface temperature increases to a late afternoon maxi-
mum and then decreases as the sun sets. Typical diurnal thermoclines
may be as much as 30 feet deep and perhaps as much as 1° or 2° C in
magnitude, though usually they are somewhat less. If a good breeze is
blowing, the upper layers will become mixed, carrying the warm water
to greater depths, having the effect of increasing the depth of the
diurnal thermocline, but decreasing its magnitude, as the absorbed heat
is spread out over a large volume of seawater.
Wind
Water currents in the nearshore area can be caused by a combination of
factors including wind, tide, waves, and the general ocean circulation
patterns. The importance of each of the several factors vary with both
time and location. The topographic configuration of the shore, bathym-
etry of the area, pressure gradients and Coriolis forces will tend to
164
-------
3°C
10
-------
\
\
ft I
^
\
c
H—
O
Q.
0)
r-t
•H
O
ft
•H
O
O
4-1
OJ
a
(U
o
o
rH
0)
!-i
M
•H
166
-------
Sea State
Wind provides turbulent energy for mixing of wastes discharged into the
ocean. When the horizontal velocity changes with depth, vertical
turbulence will transfer mass between layers and will cause a slug
discharge of waste to spread faster along the direction of motion than
normal to the current direction. From the dye patch studies, large
longitudinal diffusion coefficients can be expected when the wind first
starts blowing or it changes direction.
The observations of the waste field during the 1970-71 field season
were divided into three categories depending on the apparent dominant
form of turbulent energy. These classes were: 1) sea surface rough-
ness caused primarily by the wind, 2) sea roughness due to heavy swell,
and 3) the sea state influenced by both the wind and breakers in the
area.
Table 9 lists the observations for which wind was themain cause of the
sea state. These dates are listed in order of increasing sea turbu-
lence as determined by a visual interpretation of the photos. For all
except two observations, the dye patch was elongated parallel to the
wind. On April 26 the dye patch was oriented parallel to the water
current while on September 9 the dye patch was v-shaped with one leg
oriented parallel to the water current and the other leg oriented
parallel to the wind.
2
Diffusion coefficients ranged from 3.0 to 14 ft /sec in the longitud-
inal direction and 0.0 to 1.0 in the transverse direction. The
diffusion coefficient determined for a one dimensional model from the
1968-1969 data were 11 ft2/sec and 14 ft2/Sec on August 16, 1968, and
July 8, 1969, respectively. The state of the sea code for both of
these days was 3. The wind was 10-15 kts on August 16 with 6-ft
swell and 15-kt wind on July 8 with a choppy sea.
Table 10 shows the sea state when the turbulence is due mainly to
heavy swell. The diffusion coefficients ranged from 1.2 to 8 ft2/sec
in the longitudinal direction and 0.0 to 1.9 in the transverse direc-
tions for a sea state code ranging from 3 to 5.
Table 11 lists the sea state for turbulence due to both wind and swell.
Diffusion coefficients were not determined for rough sea condition but
only for a sea state of 2. The values of the longitudinal and trans-
verse diffusion coefficients were more nearly equal to each other for
this condition than for either of the conditions represented in tables
9 or 10.
The waves normally observed at sea are composed of two types. The
swell is a long and relatively symmetrical wave form having a period
greater than 10 seconds, generated by winds at some distance from the
area, and in the nearshore area is oriented nearly parallel to the
167
-------
Table 9. Sea state due primarily to wind.
Date
April 12
Oct. 7
Dec. 23
Feb . 6 am
Feb. 6 pm
Sept. 23
May 10
Figure
no.
77
49
55
61
63
45
87
Diffusion coef
* 2,
ft /sec
Dx Dy
8.1 0.2
-
5.1 0.7
3.6 0.0
- -
3.2 0.1
2.8 0.1
State
of
sea
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
(1
Remarks
Strong east wind in oppo-
site direction to swell.
Very lightly mottled photo
pattern.
A curved dye patch. Wind
changed from E to NE.
Lightly mottled photo tone.
A few scattered whitecaps.
Lightly mottled photo tone
with a few scattered white-
caps .
Finely mottled photo tone
with scattered whitecaps.
Wind from the northwest at
May 7
May 14
85
91 2.4
April 26 84 13.9
Sept. 30 47 7.5
0.1
0.2
0.1
15 kts for six hours.
Scattered whitecaps with a
mottled photo tone.
Wind changed from NW to SW
at 25 kts. Finely mottled
photo tone with scattered
whitecaps.
Finely mottled photo pat-
tern with scattered white-
caps.
Finely mottled photo pat-
tern with scattered white-
caps. Excessive longitudi-
nal dispersion of eye patch
ahead of main slug.
Wind parallel to the x com-
ponent for 4 hours. A mot-
tled photo pattern with a
linear trend normal to the
wind direction and frequent
whitecaps.
168
-------
Table 9. Continued
Date
Figure
no.
Diffusion coef
ft2/sec
Dx Dy
State
of
Sea
Remarks
May 13
Sept. 9
Mar. 17
89
43 12.'
67 5.1
0.4
1.0
Wind 30 kts from the SW for
6 hours. Coarsely mottled
pattern with same linear
trend parallel to the wind.
Mottled photo tone with
numerous whitecaps. Dye
patch is v-shaped.
High turbidity near shore.
Wind changed direction 2
hours before. Strong lin-
ear trend due to wind
waves. Numerous whitecaps.
Wind from the NW 15 kts.
(1
see table 6.
Table 10. Sea state due primarily to swell.
Date
March 21
Figure
no.
75
Diffusion coef
2
ft /sec
Dx Dy
1.2 0.0
State^1
of
Sea
3 Waves br
Remarks
eaking on reef S of
Dec. 21 53
Dec. 31 57
7.3
7.9
outfall. Lightly mottled
photo pattern with scat-
tered whitecaps.
1.9 3 Waves breaking along reef.
Mottled photo pattern with
a few scattered whitecaps.
0.6 5 Waves breaking everywhere.
(1
see table 6.
169
-------
Table 11. Sea state due to wind and swell.
Date
Figure
no.
Diffusion coef
2
ft /sec
Dx
Dy
State
of
Sea
(1
Remarks
Mar. 18
69 0.4
Mar. 19 am 71 1.2
Mar. 19 pm 73
Jan. 2
59 1.7
April 21 81 0.3
April 15 79
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.0
Turbid nearshore water.
Finely mottled photo tone
a few whitecaps.
Turbid nearshore water mot-
tled photo tone.
Wind 15 kts from NW. Mot-
tled photo tone with scat-
tered whitecaps.
Low wind velocity. Dye
patch oriented normal to
wind and parallel to direc-
tion of swell.
Wind 10 kts from the SW.
Wind wave from both the NW
and SW.
Frequent whitecaps. Finely
mottled photo pattern. Wind
15 kts from NW.
Oct. 12
Mar. 16
51
65
Finely mottled photo pat-
tern with frequent white-
caps. Wind 15 kts from NW.
Wind 20 kts NW for two
hours. Linear trend normal
to wind. Coarsely mottled
photo tone with whitecaps
everywhere.
(1
see table 6.
170
-------
coast. The second wave type is the sea which is generated by the
local winds, has a short wave period and a steep, unsymmetrical wave
form.
As the wind begins flowing over the water surface, the sea changes
from a mirror lake surface to a surface that includes a number of wave
trains superimposed on each other. The length of each crest is short
and both the wave length and height are irregular. If fetch is large
enough and the wind continues long enough as listed in table 12, the
significant wave height and peak energy period would be as listed in
this table.
The wave forms appear on the aerial photography as a mottled pattern.
The curved surfaces of the wave tend to concentrate the sunlight under
the wave crest as shown in figure 102. The wave crests appear light
while the trough appears dark on the photo, since the wind generated
waves are unsymmetrical, the sea in general will appear rougher when
viewed looking into the wind than when viewed down wind. This is also
true of the oblique aerial photography.
As the wind velocity increases, the average wave length also becomes
larger. On the aerial photos the photo pattern changes from a finely
mottled tone to a coarse pattern. For a steady wind the mottling will
generally show a linear trend normal to the wind direction. When the
wind is blowing at 10 kts a few scattered whitecaps will begin appear-
ing; as the wind increases to 15 kts there are frequent whitecaps and
at 25 kts whitecaps are everywhere. When the wind exceeds about 25
kts, streaks parallel to the wind direction begin appearing.
Photographic Limitations
The photographic method of studying waste dispersion is subjected to
interferences from several sources. Clear sky with the sun altitude
above 25 degrees has given the best results. Clouds in the sky in-
crease the water surface brightness and reduce the subsurface contrast.
With the oblique camera mounting, the photography is taken to avoid the
direct sunlight reflection. Polarizing filters reduce but do not elim-
inate the skylight reflection. Shadows from scattered clouds cause un-
even lighting and will interfere with the quantitative data processing.
Kraft pulp mill effluent under certain conditions will foam when dis-
charged into the sea. The white foam can cover areas of the plume and,
where present, will prevent any photographic measurement of the waste
concentration. Whitecaps and spray generated when wind velocities ex-
ceed about 15 kts can also interfere with the photographic techniques.
The natural color of the sea varies, with color gradients generally
greatest perpendicular to the beach. Near the shore, turbulence in the
surf zone entrains and suspends sand and silt particles. The width of
this discoloration zone depends on the sea roughness and may extend
171
-------
Table 12. Conditions in fully developed seas (from Bascom, 1964)
Wind
velocity
(kts)
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
Fetch
(miles)
10
34
75
160
280
710
1420
Duration
(hours)
2.4
6.0
10.0
16.0
23.0
42.0
69.0
height
(ft)
1.4
3.5
8.0
14.0
22.0
44.0
78.0
Wave
period
(sec)
4
6
8
10
12
16
20
(1
Average of highest 1/3
(2
Period where most of the energy is concentrated.
several thousand feet offshore. During the summer months, dark green
upwelled water may appear offshore. If the plume is completely sur-
rounded by the green water, the upwelling does not interfere with the
processing; however, often due to horizontal density stratification,
the dark upwelled water will form the offshore boundary of the ef-
fluent plume. Computer processing of the photographic film requires
that film densities be measured throughout the photographs. This pro-
cessing step can either be done automatically or semi-automatically.
When the photograph is digitized automatically, film densities and
photo coordinates are measured on a selected grid pattern and a large
volume of data is generated. The effect of the interferences listed
above can be reduced but not eliminated by computer programming tech-
niques. In the semi-automatic digitizing procedure, the location of
points for digitizing is selected manually. This method results in
fewer but better data points as areas on the photograph with interfer-
ences can be avoided in this step.
Aerial Photography
Aerial photography provides a comprehensive method of analyzing the
dispersion of wastes from existing or proposed outfall sites and is not
restricted to periods of calm seas. Field data for measuring concen-
172
-------
U
05
D
LO
ro
C9
i/)
C9
H
-t->
L.
C9
T3
C
CD
C
cn
C9
C
ID
CO
cu
01
o
w
6
o
C
M
cu
to
a
o
00
•H
173
-------
trations throughout the waste disposal area can be collected in a
fraction of a second.
While the time required for gathering concentration data photogram-
metrically is short, the computation of current velocities and diffu-
sion coefficients require a minimum of two flights over the area. Gen-
erally photographic flights were made at 15-minute intervals. The
time between flights need not be lost if several neighboring locations
can be studied at the same time.
Boat sampling is hazardous in the nearshore area and is impossible
during heavy seas. In order to adequately define a waste or dye field,
a boat survey is conducted over an extended period of time. Since the
tide, wind and currents are continuously changing, the survey does not
represent a pattern at any one instant but is a composite pattern dur-
ing the sampling period.
During the summer of 1969, aerial photographic surveys and convention-
al boat sampling surveys were conducted at the same time. The conven-
tional survey was conducted over an eight to twelve hour period includ-
ing travel time from the dock and required in addition to the boat
operator, three people on the vessel to run equipment and two people on
shore to locate the boat. The aerial survey team consisted of a pilot
and photographer. Two 2-hour photographic flights were made, one in
the morning and the second in the afternoon.
The cost of the aerial survey was essentially the same as the conven-
tional survey. The fluorometer aboard the survey vessel cost the same
as the three cameras aboard the airplane. The oblique camera mounting
eliminated the need for establishing horizontal control markers in the
water. A seaworthy boat and experienced operator cost about $200 per
day while an airplane and pilot cost about $120 for four hours. The
cost of the film and photographic processing range from $30 to $100
per day depending on the type of film.
Computerized techniques were developed for data processing of both the
boat records and the aerial photography. Strip chart records from the
boat instruments were digitized with the same equipment that was used
to measure photographic coordinates. A densitometer would not be re-
quired for processing aerial photos from a dye patch study conducted
for the purpose of acquiring design information at proposed outfall
sites. The computer time for data processing would be nearly the same
for the two survey methods.
The aerial survey is not limited by sea conditions, provides comprehen-
sive information on the diffusion process and can be conducted fast
with a minimum of personnel. It is a technically and economically
feasible method for acquiring ocean outfall design data.
174
-------
SECTION XII
SUMMARY
The objective of this research was to develop a remote sensing tool for
the evaluation of dispersion of wastes from existing or proposed ocean
outfalls. Photogrammetric and photo interpretation methods are used to
determine dispersion patterns, diffusion coefficients, waste concentra-
tions and nearshore currents. This study is unique in that the aerial
photography is not only used to determine the position of points and the
size of objects as in normal photogrammetry, but the photograph is also
used as an energy sensor. The amount of light reflected from an object
is recorded by the photograph as the film density of the image. The
light scattered from within the sea is measured from the film with a
photo densitometer and can be related to certain water quality param-
eters.
Ocean outfall sewers for the disposal of waste along the Pacific North-
west coastline are, in general, located on the relatively shallow
coastal shelf which is subjected to heavy seas. Sampling from a boat
in these areas is dangerous at all times and impossible much of the
time due to rough water. The use of aerial photography and photogram-
metric methods presents a possible method for overcoming this diffi-
culty. From two to eight hours of continuous sampling from a boat is
required to adequately define the waste field in the vicinity of an
ocean outfall. The waste field is usually shifting thus making a
comprehensive study nearly impossible by conventional methods. The
aerial photographic technique presents a method where concentrations
throughout the waste field can be measured in one instant. Considera-
tion of these factors suggest that photogrammetry can be a most useful
tool for water quality investigations. Prior to this time the use of
aerial photography for water quality studies has been limited to iden-
tifying pollution sources but has not been used for making quantitative
measurements from the photographs.
In order to obtain design information at proposed outfall locations,
aerial photography is taken of dye patches. The dye markers are
dropped from the aircraft at selected locations in the waste disposal
area. Current velocities and diffusion coefficients are determined
from the change in position and size of the dye patches between two
photographic flights over the proposed site.
The field work was conducted at the Georgia-Pacific Kraft pulp mill
outfall at Newport because of its convenient location. This site pro-
vided an additional advantage since the natural color of the waste
effluent was visible on aerial photography. However, the results of
this study are not limited to Kraft pulp mill outfalls. If the ef-
fluent from an outfall has the same light scattering and light absorp-
tion properties as the receiving water, dye can be added to the
effluent to distinguish the waste field from the receiving body of
175
-------
water. The natural color characteristics of the Kraft pulp waste will
vary with time while the addition of dye to a colorless waste will give
greater control over the test.
Three different field procedures were used on the project. During the
1968 and 1969 field seasons, work was carried out by conducting simul-
taneous studies of the waste plumes by aerial photographic methods and
by conventional boat sampling. Concentrations in the plume were deter-
mined by metering rhodamine WT tracer into the pipeline and measuring
the tracer concentration in the waste field with a fluorometer aboard
the survey boat.
During the first field season, two fluorometers were used to sample
from one foot and five feet below the water surface. Since there was
no significant difference in the concentration at these two depths,
only one fluorometer was used during the following field season,, A
ten-foot sampling probe for the fluorometer intake was constructed
for the 1969 field season. Boat sampling was discontinued during the
1970-71 field season and field work continued throughout the fall,
winter, and spring when boat operations were impossible due to rough
sea conditions most of the time.
Vertical color aerial photography was taken with a single camera by a
commercial aerial photography firm during the 1968 field season. As
the firm was located approximately 100 miles from the study area,
scheduling of the photography was difficult. Photography was taken at
scales of 1:6,000 and 1:12,000 using precise mapping cameras. The
small scale photography was intended to be used for buoy location by
analytical strip bridging. However, it was found more convenient to
triangulate the position of the buoys from the shore stations.
As listed in the original proposal, the first year of the study was
divided into two phases: 1) Photographing the plume and current floats
and 2) Photographing dye slugs introduced into the pipeline. Aerial
photography of the dye slugs was difficult to process. Considering a
nonsteady state dye patch within a nearly steady state waste field,
the amount of dye, waste and sea water could occur in various combina-
tions which would be impossible to distinguish by measuring the light
return with the three broad bands of color photography. At a minimum,
four individual narrow pass bands would have been required to obtain
meaningful results. This phase of the study was later replaced by dye
slugs dropped from the airplane away from the waste field.
One of the primary problems encountered in processing the 1968 vertical
photography was the direct sunlight reflection from the water surface.
Photography after 1968 was taken with an oblique camera mounting to
avoid the sun spot. Three cameras were purchased and mounted in the
baggage compartment of a small high wing aircraft. The oblique camera
mounting reduced the requirement for horizontal control in the water.
The large camera photographs included the horizon and two horizontal
176
-------
control points could be identified on shore. The mapping camera,
because of its large angular coverage, permitted photographic orienta-
tion of the two smaller cameras. Films from the two 70 mm cameras were
used for detailed analyses and measurements of the waste field. Polar-
izing filters on the 70 mm cameras reduced the skylight reflection from
the water surface.
During the 1968-1969 field seasons, work was conducted in late June,
July, August and early September. Fourteen sampling runs were made
during this period. For eight of the fourteen sampling runs, the waste
field from the ocean outfall was at the sea surface. A submerged plume
occurred during the remaining six sampling runs. When the plume was
submerged both the swell height and the wind velocity were significant-
ly less at a 90 percent confidence level than when the plume formed at
the surface. Botn steady state and nonsteady state diffusion coeffi-
cients were computed when possible for each sampling run. Of the eight
days that a surface plume occurred, a one dimensional diffusion model
was applicable to the plume pattern on only three days. A two dimen-
sional model was necessary to describe the plume when the current
velocity was low. When the velocity was greater than 0.4 ft/sec, a
one dimensional diffusion model was adequate.
For each day that waste concentrations were computed from both the
densitometer measurements taken on the aerial photography and the
fluorometer records from the boat sampling, a comparison was made of
the concentrations determined by the two methods by matching the ground
coordinates. The correlation coefficients for these comparisons
ranged from 0.85 to 0.95. When the boat sampling was conducted, there
were several locations where the sampling lines crossed and the concen-
trations were measured twice at one point. The mean square residual
determined at these points was significantly greater than the mean
square residual between the concentrations determined by boat sampling
and aerial photography (generally at a 95% confidence level).
During the final year of the project, 25 field observations were con-
ducted starting in September of 1970 and ending in May of 1971. Dif-
fusion coefficients and water current velocities were computed from
the transport and spread of a dye slug dropped from the airplane.
Continuous wind records were available from anemometers located on the
south jetty. Longitudinal diffusion coefficients determined from the
dye patch study ranged from 0.3 to 13.9 while the transverse diffusion
coefficients range from 0.0 to 1.9 ft^/sec. The dye patch was nearly
always oriented parallel to the wind. When the wind velocity was low,
the major axis of the elliptical dye patch would usually be oriented
perpendicular to the swell crest.
Of the 25 observations conducted during the fall, winter and spring,
the plume was not visible on only one day, covered less than 30 acres
on seven days and less than 100 acres on 15 days. The size of the
plume was not directly related to the state of the sea code, diffusion
coefficients nor related to the effluent discharge rate within the
177
-------
range covered by the study.
The water current velocities ranged from 0.1 to 2.0 ft/sec. The sur-
face water current was found to be the dominant factor in the resulting
plume pattern. By a visual comparison, the general direction of the
current could be explained by the wind record for 12 of the 17 days
that the current velocity was measured.
The Fickian diffusion equation with a unidirectional transport velocity
was not applicable to the majority of the observations. A two dimen-
sional model with losses of waste to the lower layers considered by
using a decay coefficient was able to better explain the observed plume
patterns. The x and y velocity components for this model were deter-
mined from the equation as for a line source in a uniform stream.
The characteristic airphoto pattern elements can be used to estimate
state of the sea, wind velocity and diffusion coefficients. As the
sea becomes rough, the finely mottled tone changes to a coarsely mot-
tled pattern. The density of whitecaps increases with the wind speed
and when the wind velocity exceeds 25 kts, streaks parallel to the
direction of the wind begin appearing. Within the generating area of
the wind curves, the waves are irregular and confused, they appear to
have no particular period or common wave height, giving rise to a
randomly mottled photo tone. As a dominant wave train develops, the
photo pattern has a linear trend normal to the wave movement. With
the wave length measured from the photos, the wave period and speed
can be estimated using wave formulas.
178
-------
SECTION XIII
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The writers wish to express their gratitude to the following: Messrs.
T. Fenwick and P. O'Hara of the Georgia Pacific Corporation at Toledo,
Oregon.
To members of the Pacific Northwest Water Laboratory, especially
Messrs. D. Baumgartner, L. Bentsen, R. Callaway, W. Clotheir,
W. DeBen, G. Dittsworth, R. Scott, and D. Trent for their guidance
and assistance in collection of the data;
Captain R. Redmond and Messrs. D. McKeel, B. Danby and R. Ervin of
Marine Science Center at Newport, Oregon, for their help with the boat
operations;
Professors R. Schultz, M. Northcraft, D. Phillips and D. Bella of
Oregon State University for their advice and assistance on the project;
Students J. Graham, L. Doester, B. Valentine, R. Spaw, D. Monroe,
R. Scholl, W. Hart, T. Basgen, Ching-Lin Chang, M. Soderquist, R.
Collier, R. Mann, P. Klampe, B. Barnes, G. Carman, J. Plasker, W. Hal-
verson, A. Langdon, K. Cerotsky and W. Gilbert for their assistance
in collection of data, construction of equipment and processing data;
and
the Federal Water Quality Office for financial support of the project.
179
-------
SECTION XIV
REFERENCES
Allen Hancock Foundation. 1964. An investigation on the fate of or-
ganic and inorganic wastes discharged into the marine environment and
their effects on biological productivity. Los Angeles, University of
Southern California. 118 p. (California State Water Quality Control
Board Publication 29).
American Society of Photogrammetry. 1968. Manual of color aerial
photography. Menasha, George Banta Company. 550 p.
American Society of Photogrammetry. 1960. Manual of photographic in-
terpretation. Menasha, George Banta Company. 868 p.
Bascom, Willard. 1964. Waves and beaches. Garden City, Doubleday
& Co. 267 p.
Baumgartner, D. J., W. P. James and G. L. O'Neal. 1969. A study of two
ocean outfalls. National Council for Air and Stream Improvement
Technical Bulletin No. 231. p 27-53.
Baumgartner, D. J. and D. S. Trent. 1970. Ocean outfall design, part
I, literature review and theoretical development. USDI, FWQA, Pacific
Northwest Water Laboratory, Corvallis, Oregon. April. 129 p.
Baumgartner, D. J., D. S. Trent and K. V. Byram. 1971. User's guide
and documentation for outfall plume model. EPA, WQO, Pacific North-
west Water Laboratory, Corvallis, Oregon. Working Paper No. 80, May.
Brooks, Norman H. 1960. Diffusion of sewage effluent in an ocean
current. Proceedings of the First International Conference on Waste
Disposal in Marine Environment, London, Pergamon Press, p. 246-267.
Burgess, F. J. and W. P. James. 1970. An aerial photographic tracing
of pulp mill effluent in marine waters. Federal Water Quality Office,
EPA, Water Pollution Control Research Series 12040EBY, Grant WP-00524.
152 p.
Burt, Wayne V. 1953. A note on the reflection of diffusion radiation
by the sea surface. Transactions, American Geophysical Union 34(2):
199-200.
Cox, C. and W. Munk. 1954. Measurement of the roughness of the sea
surface from photographs of the sun's glitter. Journal of the Optical
Society of America 44:838-850.
Cox, Charles and Walter Munk. 1955. Some problems in optical ocean-
ography. Journal of Marine Research 14(l):63-78.
181
-------
Elterman, Louis and Robert B. Toolin. 1965. Atmospheric optics.
In: Handbook of Geophysics and Space Environment, ed. by Shea L.
Valley, Cambridge, Air Force Cambridge Research Laboratories, p 7.1-
7.36.
Faas, V. A. 1960. The procurement of aerial photography of under-
water objects. In: Manual of photographic Interpretation, American
Society of Photogrammetry, Menasha, George Banta Company, p. 96.
Fisher, Davis, and Sousa. 1966. Fresh-water springs of Hawaii from
infrared images. U.S. Geological Survey Hydrologic Investigations
Atlas HA-218. Washington, D. C.
Fritz, N. L. 1967. Optimum methods forusing infrared-sensitive color
films. Photogrammetric Engineering 33:1128-1138.
Holter, Marvin R. 1967. Infrared and multispectral sensing. Bio-
Science June. p. 376-383.
Hutchinson, G. E. 1957. A treatise on limnology. Vol. 1. New York,
John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 1015 p.
Ichiye, T. and N. B. Plutchak. 1966. Photodensitometric measurements
of dye concentration in the ocean. Limnology and Oceanography 2:364-
370.
Jensen, Niels. 1968. Optical and photographic reconnaissance systems.
New York, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 211 p.
Jerlov, N. G. 1964. Optical classification of ocean water. In:
Symposium on Physical Aspects of Light in the Sea, ed. J. E. Typer,
Honolula, University of Hawaii Press, p. 45-49.
Jerlov, N. G. 1968. Optical oceanography. Amsterdam, Elseview Pub-
lishing Company. 194 p.
Jones, L. A. and H. R. Condit. 1948. Sunlight and skylight as deter-
minants of photographic exposure. Optical Society of America 38:123-
178.
Keller, Morton. 1963. Tidal current surveys by photogrammetric meth-
ods. U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, Technical Bulletin 22. 20 p.
Keller, M. and G. C. Tewinkel. 1966. Space resection in photogram-
metry. U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey Technical Bulletin 32. 10 p.
Keene, D. F. 1971. A physical oceanographic study of the nearshore
zone at Newport, Oregon. M.S. thesis. Corvallis, Oregon State Uni-
versity.
182
-------
Masch, F. D. 1961. Mixing and dispersive action of wind waves.
Berkeley, University of California, IER Technical Report 138-6.
Molineux, C. E. 1965. Multiband'spectral system for reconnaisance.
Photogrammetric Engineering 31:131-143.
Neumann, G. and W. J. Pierson, Jr. 1966. Principles of physical
oceanography. Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, N. J. 545 p.
Neumaier, G., F. Silvestro, H. Thung, and R. Frank. 1967. Project
aqua-map development of aerial photography as an aid to water quality
management. Buffalo, Cornell Aeronautical Laboratory, Inc. (Contract
No. HC-9768 of the State of New York Conservation Department),
Ory, T. R. 1965. Line scanning reconnaissance systems in land utiliza-
tion and terrain studies. In: Third symposium on remote sensing of
environment. Ann Arbor, University of Michigan, p. 393-398.
Pearson, E. A. 1955. An investigation of the efficacy of submarine
outfall disposal of sewage and sludge. California Waste Pollution
Control Board Publication 14. 154 p.
Pearson, E. A., P. N. Storrs and R. E. Selleck. 1967. Some physical
parameters and their significance in marine waste disposal. In:
Pollution and Marine Ecology, ed. by F. J. Burgess and T. A. Olson,
New York, Interscience. p. 297-315.
Romanovsky, V. 1966. Coastal currents. In: Proceedings of the Third
International Conference on Advances in Water Pollution Research,
Munich. Baltimore, Port City Press, Inc. Vol. 3, p. 290-292.
Scherz, James P. 1967. Aerial photographic techniques in pollution
detection. Doctoral dissertation. Madison, University of Wisconsin.
82 numb, leaves. (Microfilm)
Strandberg, C. H. 1966. Water quality analysis. Photogrammetric
Engineering 32 (2):234-248.
Strandberg, C. H. 1967. Aerial discovery manual. New York, John
Wiley and Sons. 249 p.
Sverdrup, H. V., M. W. Johnson and R. H. Fleming. 1942. The oceans.
New York, Prentice-Hall. 1087 p.
Swanson, L. W. 1964. Aerial photography and photogrammetry in the
Coast and Geodetic Survey. Photogrammetric Engineering, 30(5):699-726.
Tarkington, Raife G. 1966. The photographic process. In: Manual of
photogrammetry, 3d ed., Menasha, George Banta Company, p. 243-293.
183
-------
Tyler, J. E. and W. H. Richardson. 1958. Nephelometer for volume
scattering function in situ. Journal of the Optical Society of
America 48(5):354-357.
Waldichuk, Michael. 1966. Currents from aerial photography in
coastal pollution studies. Proceedings of the Third International
Conference on Advances in Water Pollution Research, Munich. Baltimore,
Port City Press, Inc. Vol. 3, p. 263-284.
Water Pollution Research Board. 1964. Coastal pollution. Report of
the Director, Department of Scientific and Industrial Research,
London, p. 136-142.
Wiegel, R. L. 1964. Oceanographical engineering. London, Prentice
Hall International. 532 p.
Williams, J.»J. J. Higginson and J. D. Rohdbough. 1968. Air and
sea-the naval environment. Menasha, George Banta Company. 338 p.
Wilson, James F., Jr. 1968. Fluorometric procedures for dye tracing.
U.S. Geological Survey, Chapter A12 of Book 3 (Applications of Hy-
draulics) . 31 p.
Yost, E. F. and S. Wenderoth. 1967. Multispectral color aerial
photography. Photogrammetric Engineering 33:1020-1033.
184
-------
SECTION XV
PUBLICATIONS
1. Burgess, F. J. and W. P. James. 1970. Pulp mills take to the
air to monitor ocean outfalls. Pulp and Paper, September.
2. James, W. P. and F. J. Burgess. 1969. The use of photogrammetry
in predicting outfall diffusion. National Council for Air and
Stream Improvement Technical Bulletin No. 231. p. 2-26.
3. James, W. P. and F. J. Burgess. 1970. Ocean outfall dispersion.
Photogrammetric Engineering Journal 36(12):1241-1250.
4. James, W. P. and F. J. Burgess. 1971. Pulp mill outfall analysis
by remote sensing techniques. Journal of the Technical Associa-
tion of the Pulp and Paper Industry. 54(3):414-418.
5. James, W. P., F. J. Burgess and D. Baumgartner. 1971. An aerial
photographic study of waste fields from three ocean outfalls.
Offshore Technology Conference Proceedings, Houston, Texas; April
19-21. OTC paper 1374, PPI 483-1498.
185
-------
SECTION XVI
APPENDICES
A. Definition of Terms 189
B. Computer Program for Processing Vertical Photography .... 193
Figure
B-l Flow diagram for computer program DIFFUSION .... 200
B-2 Listing of program 204
B-3 Listing of subroutines 216
B-4 Sample input, LUN 1 222
B-5 Sample input LUNS 3 and 19 223
C. Processing 1969 Photographic Data 224
Figure
C-l Flow diagram for computer program EDIT 231
C-2 Listing of program EDIT 233
C-3 Sample input for program EDIT 241
C-4 Sample output from program EDIT 242
C-5 Flow diagram of program REMOTE 243
C-6 Flow diagram of subroutine PROCESS 245
C-7 Program listing for REMOTE 247
C-8 Subroutines used with program REMOTE 260
C-9 Sample input data for REMOTE 271
D. Processing of 1970-71 Photographic Data 272
Figure
D-l Flow diagram for computer program INSHORE 275
D-2 Listing of program INSHORE 277
E. Streamlines for a Source in a Uniform Flow 284
Figure
E-l Flow diagram of program FLOWNET 285
E-2 Listing of program FLOWNET 286
187
-------
APPENDIX A
DEFINITION OF TERMS
The following terms that were used in The Rationale are defined as
follows:
A is the extinction optical thickness for a standard
atmosphere. When subscripted the subscripts b, g
and r refer to the blue, green and red bands of the
color photograph, respectively.
a is the sea water attenuation coefficient per meter.
Az is the azimuth of the sun from true north.
AZ is the azimuth of the sun from grid north.
a is the angle at the incremental scattering volume
between incident and scattered beams.
b is the waste absorption coefficient in (Meter-mi/
liter)-!.
3(a) is the volume scattering function per meter.
C is the attenuation coefficient for the sea water and
waste per meter,
c is the angle between the ray to the camera and the
camera axis.
D,(x,y) , D (x,y) and Dr(x,y) are the film densities measured at photo
coordinates x andy for the blue, green and red bands,
respectively.
dj is the scattered light intensity from the incremental
scattering volume.
dn is the solid angle in steradians.
dV is the incremental scattering volume.
E is the extinction optical thickness for the atmos-
phere from the sea surface to the camera. When sub-
scripted the subscripts b, g and r refer to the blue,
green and red bands of color photograph, respective-
iy.
EX is the photographic exposure.
189
-------
f is the cameras focal length.
FNO is the relative aperture of the lens.
G is a constant representing film contrast.
H is the irradiance in watts per square centimeter.
H is the irradiance from the sun at the outer at-
mosphere normal to the ray.
H is the irradiance on a horizontal plane from the
sun at the sea surface.
H , is the irradiance from skylight at the sea surface.
H is the irradiance at the sea surface from the scat-
tering volume.
H is the irradiance from the sun on a plane normal to
w
the ray below the water surface.
Hz is the irradiance from the sun at a depth z below
the water surface.
H' is the irradiance of the film image.
i is the angle of incidence of the direct sunlight at
the water surface.
i« is the angle of incidence of the scattered light at
the water surface •
j is the angle of refraction of the direct sunlight at
the water surface.
j~ is the angle between the vertical and the object ray.
K is a constant.
Ka is the rotation angle about the Z camera axis.
M is a constant representing film speed.
n is the refractive index of water.
N is the total radiance from the sea in watts per
square centimeter-steradian.
N is the radiance from the scattering volume above the
3.
190
-------
sea surface.
N , N and N are the total radiance at the sea surface including
^ r reflected skylight, reflected direct sunlight and
scattered light from within the sea for the blue,
green and red bands of the photograph, respectively.
N is radiance from the sea measured at the camera
c
station.
N is the radiance of direct sunlight reflection from
the water surface.
N , is the skylight radiance reflected from the water
sky ,. J
surface.
N is the radiance from the scattering volume under
the sea surface.
P is the reflectivity of direct sunlight from the sea
surface.
p is the reflectivity of skylight from the water
surface.
p is the reflectivity of uplighting from the sea at
the surface.
RA is the variation in the ratio of red to green light
returned from within the sea due to the waste.
KM is photographic orientation matrix.
R is the ratio of red to green radiance at the camera
station.
R , is the ratio of red to green radiance at the sea
p surface.
R , is the estimated ratio of red to green radiance at
the sea surface if there was no waste present.
SUNK is the angle between the object ray and the direct
sunlight reflection from a horizontal plane.
TIM is the photographic exposure time in seconds.
TR is the lens transmittance. When it is subscripted
the subscripts b, g and r refer to the blue, green
and red bands, respectively.
191
-------
W is the waste concentration in milliliters per liter.
W is the rotation angle about the X axis of the camera.
Z is the flying height in feet.
z is the distance in meters below the water surface.
$ is the rotation angle about the Y axis of the camera.
192
-------
APPENDIX B
COMPUTER PROGRAM
FOR
PROCESSING VERTICAL PHOTOGRAPHY
Introduction
Included in this appendix are the program and subprogram listings and
sample input data for processing of vertical photography. The program
determines diffusion coefficients from two flights of aerial color
photographs and was written for the CDC 3300 system in Fortran IV com-
puter language. The unique feature of this system is the remote access
to the computer by teletypes on a time sharing basis.
Input data for the program is either from a logical unit number (LUN)
or from the teletype keyboard. The input statements include the stan-
dard READ statement, FFIN (1), or TTYIN(4H X = ). The free form input
(FFIN) will accept data in any format in columns 1 to 72 as long as
the words are separated by at least one space. The number in paren-
theses with the call command is the input LUN. The teletype free form
input command (TTYIN) allows the user to enter data from the teletype.
The parameter in the TTYIN function must be a hollerith constant
containing four characters. When the fortran statement is executed,
the hollerith message is printed on the user's teletype. Only a single
variable can be entered each time the function is executed.
Program Listing
Flow diagram for the program used to process the 1968 photographic
data is shown in figure B-l. The numbers in parentheses on the dia-
gram refer to the line numbers on the program listing shown in figure
B-2. The main array was declared an integer to save storage space and
is dimensioned 2, 120, 60. If the size of this array is changed, only
lines 3, 30, 31, 539 and 540 in the main program will require modifica-
tion.
All except two of the subroutines called in the main program are listed
in figure B-3. These subroutines, date and time, return the time and
date of computer processing. If they are not available, lines 26
through 29 of the main program should be erased. The following sub-
routines are included in the listing:
Rotate - Converts state plane coordinates to coordinates
based on system oriented about waste field.
Sunlite - Determines sun altitude and azimuth.
Resect - Determines the orientation of near vertical
photographs and was modified from USC & GS
193
-------
program resection. Each time the subroutine is
called, the camera station coordinates and
orientation matrix are printed on LUN 2.
Leastfit - Determines the least squares solution of the re-
gression coefficients for a linear model to data
with one independent and up to nine dependent
variables. Each time the subroutine is executed,
values of the regression coefficients, standard
deviation, variance-covariance matrix, and Y,Y,
and e for each observation are written on LUN 2.
Matinv - Determines the inverse of a square matrix.
Trncoord - Converts the photographic vector to a unit vector
oriented with the state plane coordinate system.
Grdcoord - Determines the ground coordinates of the unit
vector.
Angles - Determines the angles between the object ray and
the vertical in air and under the water. Deter-
mines the angles between the sun ray and the ob-
ject ray above and below the water surface.
Input data for the program are from five sources. These are the tele-
type, photo coordinates and film densities from LUN 1, ground control co-
ordinates from LUN 3, general information from LUN 5 and waste concentra-
tion as measured by fluorometers with ground coordinates from LUN 19.
Teletype
The following information is to be typed on the teletype after the
hollerith constant is printed during program execution.
No.
1.
Hollerith
Constant
IGO
2.
3.
Bl=
B2 =
Remarks
Type in 1 if the photo values in the array
are to be averaged and the maximum value
printed on the teletype for each section
across the waste field or 2 if this is not
required.
Coefficient for the linear term relating the
photo value to waste concentration.
Coefficient for the squared term relating the
photo value to waste concentration.
194
-------
Hollerith
No. Constant Remarks
4. VEL= Estimated velocity if there were no
current floats.
5. Repeat above items 1-3 for second
flight.
LUN !_
Sample input from LUN 1 is shown in figure B-4. As the input on this
LUN is mostly from the digitizer the Z value (densitometer voltage) is
always recorded but is not always used in the computations. In the
sample input there were two photos in the first flight (lines 1 through
359) and three in the second flight (lines 360 through 1336). In
figure B-4, lines 1 through 33 and lines 360 through 398 are read with
free form input while the other lines are read on a fixed format.
Description of the input data one LUN 1 follows
Line
Item No. Remarks
1. 1 Camera focal length in mm for photo 1 of
flight 1.
2. 2 Photo number in flight (00001), number of
photo control points on the photograph
(0006) and the X, Y, Z photo coordinates of
the principal point.
3. 3-4 Point identification number and the X, Y, Z
values of control points. This series is
repeated six times to input photo coordin-
ates.
4. 5 0.0 to indicate end of current float coor-
dinates (none in this example).
5. 6 Identification number and the X, Y, Z
photo coordinates at the head of the plume
and at a point along the plume. These
points are used to orient the array about
the plume.
6. 8-9 Eighteen film densities on the standard grey
scale.
7. 10-15 Identification number and the X, Y, Z values
195
-------
Line
Item No. Remarks
measured on the grey scale with the red
filter in the densitometer. Only the volt-
age in the Z coordinate is used in computa-
tions.
8. 16-21 Same as lines 10-15 except readings are with
the green filter.
9. 22-27 Same as lines 10-15 except readings are with
the blue filter.
10. 28 Focal length in mm for photo number two of
the first flight.
11. 29 Photo number, number of control points and
X, Y, Z photo coordinates.
12. 30-31 Same as lines 2-4.
13. 33 0.0 to indicate end of current float coor-
dinates (none in this case).
14. 34-70 Film densities for points outside the plume
with one line being required for each point.
The first number on each line is the photo
number followed by the point number which is
less than 200. The point number with the X,
Y, Z values are repeated three times to
input the red, green and blue film density
voltages. The green film density voltage is
the Z value of the center group while the
blue or red can be in either the first or
third group. The red film density voltage
is always larger than the blue value.
15. 71-358 Same as lines 34-70 except the points are in
the waste field and are numbered between 300
and 399.
16. 359 Blank card to indicate end of flight 1.
17. 360 Same as item 1 except for photo 1 of flight
2.
18. 361 Same as item 2.
19. 362-363 Same as item 3.
196
-------
Line
Item No. Remarks
20. 364 Same as item 4.
21. 366-367 Same as item 7.
22. 368-385 Same as items 8, 9 and 10.
23. 386 Same as item 1 except for photo 2 of flight
2.
24. 387 Same as item 2.
25. 388 Same as item 3.
26. 389-390 Point identification number (900 or greater)
and X, Y, Z photo coordinates of current
floats.
27. 392 Same as item 4.
28. 393 Same as item 1 except for photo 3 of flight
2.
29. 394 Same as item 2.
30. 395-396 . Same as item 3.
31. 398 Same as item 4.
32. 399-458 Same -as item 15.
33. 459-1335 Same as item 16.
34. 1336 Blank card to indicate end of input data.
LUN 3^
Sample input from LUN 3 is shown in figure B-5. This LUN contains the
ground coordinates of the photo control stations and some initial
orientation parameters for the five photographs. On the lines contain-
ing four numbers, the numbers are the point identification number, and
the X, Y, Z state plane coordinates for the photo control. The control
data must be listed in the same sequence as the photo coordinates were
listed on LUN 1. Lines in figure B-5 containing three numbers list the
initial approximation of the camera station coordinates (X, Y, Z). The
lines containing 0.0 and 1.0 list the sine and cosine values of the
initial approximation of the photo azimuth.
197
-------
LUN .5
LUN 5 contains the general information required for the program. The
information is read with free form input and is described as follows:
No. Description
1. Number of flights to be processed.
2. Time difference between flights in seconds.
3. Effluent flow rate in gpm.
4. Number of photos in flight 1.
5. Time of day of first flight in hours.
6. Time of day - minutes past even hour.
7. Declination in degrees at 0 hr GCT.
8. Declination - minutes over even degree.
9. Change in declination in minutes per hour.
10. Equation of time in minutes.
11. Equation of time - seconds over even minute.
12. Change in equation of time in seconds per hour,,
13. Longitude of exposure station in degrees.
14. Latitude of exposure station in degrees.
15. Reciprocal of exposure time.
16. F - number of lens setting.
17. Film gamma to base 10.
18. Photo identification for symbolic plot.
19. Day for heading on symbolic plot.
20. Month for heading of symbolic plot.
If two flights are being processed, the following information is
required:
198
-------
No. Description
21. Number of photos in second flight.
22. F - number of lens setting.
23. Film gamma to base 10.
24. Photo identification for symbolic plot.
25. Day for heading on symbolic plot.
26. Month for heading on symbolic plot.
LUN 19_
A partial listing of data on LUN 19 is also shown in figure B-5. Each
line contains the position number, X, Y state plane coordinates of the
boat, waste concentration in milliliters per liter and the sampling
depth. A blank line is inserted after the data to indicate end of
data.
Output from Program
Output from program DIFFUSION is on LUNS 2, 4 and 20. The output on
LUN 2 includes the photo orientation matrix, current float coordinates,
statistical information from subroutine LEASTFIT, symbolic plots, a
plot of difference in concentration between flights and diffusion
coefficients. The output on LUN 4 is used for more detailed statisti-
cal analyses of photo values (R , - R , ) and boat concentrations and
* * ph pho'
ground coordinates are read out on LUN 20.
199
-------
(
START
No. of flights,time
between flights, & / /oc^*
effluent flow rate ' ^0)
I
Time -date (25)
TTYIN - No. of photos
in fli9ht /(53)
Zero arrays (39)
Orient photo
(58)
No
No
Yes
(83) f
Flight 1
Yes
READ Itra Yes
Jtra > 900
Last photo)
(84)
\ No
Compute
currents
(72)
Compute
float
coordinates
(82)
(109)
Compute sun azimuth
& altitude
No
I
FFIN(5)
min.j
day
(113)
Flight
Yes
(145)
(120)
Compute orientation
of array
>—'
( )Program line number
Figure B-l. Flow diagram for computer program DIFFUSION.
200
-------
A
(145)
/FFIN (5) exposure timej fno^ gam/
Compute atmospheric attenuation
Standardize densitometer readings
/Fixed format - READ
/densities outside plume
/ FFINCI) gray)
/scale & voltage/
(200)
I
(231)
Last photo of\ No
flight /
-^Determine equ. for RDno
(266)
/ READ densities in
/plume LUN(1) fixed format)
Determine Rph - RpnQ
(301)
Fill
in array
i<<
©
(340)
D ) ( EHG
"*^--^ ^*
Figure B-l. Flow diagram for computer program DIFFUSION.
201
-------
T (340)
Interpolate missing
values in array
j (410)
•^ /r~> ii f^i^
"^ \J I lUlU I1U. U/
No
'WRITE max. values of
'Rph~ Rpho on teletype
i
(414)
T?EAD boat concentrations
LUN 19 fixed format (457)
Least square fit
of photo values
(458)
WRITE LUN 4 waste
concentrations
& Rph~Rpho values)
/ WRITE regression
"/coefficient teletype
/ TTYIN -coefficient to /
/compute waste concentrations/
i
(477)
Compute waste concentrations
in array
(500)7 WRITE coordinates &
/concentrations LUN 207
Figure B-l. Flow diagram for computer program DIFFUSION.
202
-------
Yes
(595) /Symbolic plot line,
printer - LUN(2) /
\
\Last flight^
No
Compute and WRITE
diffusion coefficients
(673)
Compute and WRITE
differencem concentration
STOP
Figure B-l. Flow diagram for computer program DIFFUSION.
203
-------
PROGRAM DIFFUSION
DIMENSION C<20»->)»XFTS(2»10»2)»XT(?).XS<<3)»DEN(3)»THI(?),BI9)
1 RATIOI2.120.60) >XPG(2) »CAMO(3.5.3) .KADI 31 , XAR(2 > 8 I .
2 08(4,3)
COMMON X(in,200)
INTEGER RATIO.HARDWARE
IF (HARDWARE (2 ) .EO. 1) GO TO 62
CALL EQUIPI2»5HF!LE )
GO TO 63
62 REWIND 2
63 IF (HARDWARES) .EO. 1) GO TO 64
CALL EOUIP(4,5HFILE )
GO TO 65
64 REWIND 4
65 IF (HARDWARE120) .EG). 1) GO TO 6b
CALL FQUIPI20.5HFILE )
GO TO bl
66 REWIND 20
61 IF (HARDWARE!IP) .EO. 1) 68,1000
68 IF (HARDWAREI3) .EO. 1) 69,1000
69 REWIND 3
IF (HARDWARE(l) .EG). 1) 70,1300
70 REWIND 1
IF (HARDWARES) .EG). 1) 71,1000
71 REWIND 5
CALL TIMEIEFIME)
CALL DATE! EDA r~: >
WRITFI02.56) EOATE,ETI ME
56 FORMAT(//////10X.A8.30X.A8//////)
NNXS=120
NNY5=60
Y '•« i o Y = 3 c * N i\i Y s
c NO. OF FLIGHTS OVER AREA, TIME DIFFERENCE •DET^LEN
C FLIGHTS IN SECONDS, AND FLOW RATE OF F.FFLUEMT
Irt'JNM=FF INI 5 )
DTIM = FFIN(5 )
RATE = FFIM5)
RATE = RATE/(7.48*60. )
C ZERO ARRAY
DO 50 LX=1,NNXS
DO 50 LY=1,NNYS
DO 50 <=1,2
RATIO(K,LX,LY)=0
50 CONTINUE
DO 55 1=1,2
DO 55 J=l,10
DO 55 K=l,2
XFTS(I .J.K) =0.
55 CONTINUE
IRUN=1
54 REWIND 19
C NO OF PHOTOS IN THIS FLIGHT
IPMX=FFIN(5)
IPHOT=]
WRITE (02,31 )
KFTS=1
f ORIENT PHOTO
100 CALL RESECT (FL,XP,YP,C)
CAMO!I PHOT,5,1)=XP/1000.
CAMOI I PHOT,5 »?I=YP/1ODO.
DO 105 J=l,3
CAMOIIPHCT,!,JI=r(1,J)
105 CONTINUE
IN GPM
OOC01
00002
00003
00004
OOOP5
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
00011
00012
00013
00014
00015
00016
00017
00018
00019
00020
00021
00022
00023
00024
00025
00026
00027
00028
0002.9
00030
00031
00032
00033
000^4
000:53
00036
00037
00038
00039
00040
00041
00042
00043
00044
00045
00046
00047
00048
00049
00050
00051
00052
00053
00054
00055
00056
00057
00056
00059
00060
00061
00062
00063
Figure B-2. Listing of program.
204
-------
106
107
34
108
130
131
DO 106 J=2,4
DO 106 1=1,3
CAMO( IPHOT.J , I )=C(K »I )
CONTINUE
J = l
ITRA = FFIN( 1)
IF (ITRA-900) 108,107,107
X(2,J)=(FFIN(1)-X=)/1000.
X(1,J) = (FFIN(1)-YP 1/1000.
BB = FFIN(1 I
CALL TRNCOORD (CAMO,XT,J,FL,IPhUT)
CALL GRDCOORD(CAMO»XT»XPG,J, I = H«JT )
WRITE (02,^41 ITRA.XPGI1) ,XPG(2 )
FORMAT (' FLOAT «»I5»2F10.0)
XFTSIIRUN,
-------
IF (J-l) 196,196,198
196 XLOW=XPG(1)
YMID=XPG(2)
198 X(3,J) =XT( 1 )
X(4,J)=XT(2)
?00 CONTINUE
30T=X(3,2)-X(3.1)
TOP=X(4,2)-X F 1 0 . 0 , 5X , ' YM I 0 ' ,r 1 0 . 0 )
SXF=-SINF(AZ )
SYF=-COSF(AZ)
EXPOSURE TIME »F/0» AND FILM GAMMA TO BASE 10
ETIME=FFIN<5)
FNUM=FFIN(5)
GAM=FFIN(51/2.30
CEXP=ETIME»FNUM»*2
OPTICAL THICKNESS 3000 TO 10,000 FT
THI ( 1 ) =0.1 08 + 0. 069*LOGF( C(l,3)/3280.l
THI (2)=THI(11*1.15
THI(3)=THI(11*1.4
RAD(1)=EXPF(-0.252/SINF(H1)
RAD(21=EXPF(-0.331/51NF (HI)
DTHI=-0-024*LOGF(C(1.31/3280. + 1 I
TENR=RAD(i)/RAD(2)
RAD(3)=EXPF(-0.45/SINF(H)1
HI=3.14159/2.-H
SINH=0.75*S1NF(HI1
COSH=SORT(1.0-5INH**2)
TANH=SINH/COSH
ANGLE BETWEEN SUN RAY AND VERTICAL UNDER WATER
HW=ATANF(TANH)
WRITE (C2,3) HW
3 FORMAT!' UNDERWATER SUN ANGLE = ' ,F10.5)
XS!1)=SINF(HW)*(-SXF)
XSI2)=SINF(HW)*(-SYF)
XS(3 )=-COSF(HW)
XS(4)=COSF(H1*(-SXF1
XS( 5 )=COSF(H)*(--?YFI
XSI6)=-SINF(H)
XSI71=-COSF(H)
XS(8)=SINF(SA2)
X5(9)=COSF(SAZ)
READ IN FILM DENSITIES FROM GREY SCALE
DO 215 J = l ,18
X(5,J)=FFIN(1)
XI 1 ,J) =1.0
215 CONTINUE
READ IN VOLTAGES RED GREEN AND BLUE
DO 217 1=1,3
DO 216 J=l,18
ITRA=FFIN(1)
ITRA=FFIN(1)
ITRA=FFIN(1)
X(2 , J) =FFIN(1) /10.
X(3, J)=X(2,J)*X(2,J)
X(4, J) =X(3»J)*X(2,JI
00127
00128
00129
00130
00131
00132
00133
00134
00135
00136
00137
00138
00139
00140
00141
00142
00143
00144
00l4b
00146
00147
00148
00149
00150
001 51
00152
00153
00154
00155
00156
00157
00158
00159
00160
00161
00162
00163
00164
00165
00166
00167
00168
00169
00170
00171
00172
00173
00174
00175
00176
00177
00178
00179
00180
00181
00182
00183
00164
00185
00186
00187
00188
00189
Figure B-2. Listing of program (continued)
206
-------
216 CONTINUE
21 7
71 9
718
720
722
224
225
,218
228
229
35
231
230
CALL LEASTFI T( N » NO » B )
DB( 1 1 1 )=B( 1 )
DB(2»I )=B( 2)
DB(3t I )=B< 3)
DRI4.I ) =P(4)
CONTINUE
IPHOT= IPHOT+1
IF (IPHOT-IPMX) 100.10
J=l
RF ADI 01 ,35) I PHOT ,ITRA»X<2»J)»XI1,J),DF_N1>DFNC?),D-N3
IF (DEN1-DEN3) 222,222,224
DENI 3) =DEN1
OFN( 1 ) = DEN3
GO TO 225
DFNI 1 ) =DEN1
DENI 3)=DEN3
DO 227 1=1,3
DF_N(II=DB(l»l)+OBl2«I>*DEN(I)+DB(^«I)*OEN(I)*Dt:N(I)
+06(4,1 )*DEN( I )**3
CONT INUE
IF (DEN(l)
IF (DENI2)
IF (DENI3)
FORMAT (I5»I4,2F6.3,F5.1»17X,F5.
x< i , j) =xi i ,j (-CAMOI I PHOT, 5 ,2 )
Xt2»J)=X(2,J 1-CAMOl 1?HUT,5>1 )
ANGLE btTWEEN CAMERA AXIS AND
R=SURT (X(],J)*#2+X(2,J)**2)
CAM=ATANF I P/FL )
CALL TRN COORD! CAMO ,XT , J , FL , I PHOT )
CALL ANGLES(XT,X5,FL,J»CAN,CCA,TAB»SUNR)
X ( 10, J )=SUNR
XI 5, J ) =CGSF ( CAN )
X (6 , J ) =DEN( 1 ) -DENI 2 )
X(5,J)=EXPF(X(6,J )/GAM + (DTHI ) /X ( 5, J ) 1/TENR
XI7,J)=EXPF(DEN( 3 ) /GAM ) *CEXP/ COSF ( CAM)**4
X (8 , J ) =CAN
.LE
.LE.
.LE.
0
0
0
.9
.7
.4
•
•
•
OR.
OR.
OR.
DENI
DENI
DENI
1 )
2 )
3)
.GT.
.GT.
. o T .
3
3
3
•
»
•
25)
25)
25)
220,228
220,229
220,231
1,17X,F5.1)
RAY
IF (ITRA-300)
INO=J-2
220,230,230
DO 238 J=l , INO
X ( 1 ,K 1 = 1 .0
X (?,K) =X (8, J )
X(3,K)=X(2,K)*X(?,K)
XI4.K) =1.0/X I 7,J)
WRITE (02,44) XI 1 ,<) ,X( 2,K) ,X ( 3,K) >X ( 4,K)
FORMAT (4E11.3)
44
738 CONTINUE
NO=K-1
N = 4
CALL LEASTFI TIN, NO, B)
A1=B ( 1 )
A2 = B(2 )
A3 = B I 3 )
DO 243 J=1,INO
TRB=A1+A2*X(8,J)+A3*X(
X ( 1 ,J ) =1.
X ( 2 ,J ) =X( 10, J)
,J)*X(8,J)
00190
00191
00192
00193
00194
00195
00196
00197
00198
00199
00200
00201
00202
00203
00204
00205
00206
00207
00208
00209
00210
00211
002] 2
00213
00214
00215
00216
00217
00218
00219
00220
00221
00222
00223
00224
00225
00226
00227
00228
00229
00230
00231
00232
00233
00234
00235
00236
00237
00238
00239
00240
00241
00242
00243
00244
00245
00246
00247
00248
00249
00250
00251
00252
Figure B-2. Listing of program (continued)
207
-------
XM,j)=XI7,J)«TR5
.'.'RITE (02,43) X(l,J),A(2»J]»X(3»Jl»XU«J>
<*3 FORf-'AT 14L11.3)
743 CONTINJE
IV. = 4
N'J= I NO
CALL LEASTFIT (N,NO,b)
HI=B(1 )
002o 2
745 A!-~AD (01,35)
IF ( IPhOT )
244 IF (DEN1-OI--N3)
< ( 2 , J ) , X ( 1 , J ) , D r. N1 , D t N ( 2 )
^ ,322,324
DFN(3)
GO TO 3?5
DEM(i)=0^^!
DO 327 1=1,3
DEN( I ) =03 ( 1, I ) +DB < ? »I ) *DFN( I }+">[
\ +06(4,1)*DEN(I)**3
CONTINUE
IF IDEN(l) .LE. 0.9 .OR. OEN(l)
IF (DENI2) .LE. 1.7 .OR. OENI2)
IF (DENI3) .LE. 0.4 .OR. OENI3)
3T.
.GT.
3.2b) 245,328
3.25) 245,329
3.25) 245,746
?46
747
IFIXI 1 ,J)-XLAST) 260,260,247
XLAST=X( 1 ,J)
X ( 1 ,J) =X( 1 ,J)-CAMO( I PHOT, 5, 2 )
X(2,J)=X(?,J)-i"AMO( IPHOT, 5,1 )
R=SQRT(X(1 ,J)**7+X(2,J)**2)
CAM=ATANF ( R/FL)
CALL TRNCOORD(CAMO,XT,J,FL» IPHOT )
CALL GRDCOORD(CAMO,XT ,XPG,J,IPHOT)
CALL ANGLES (XT, XS,FL,J»CAN»CCA, TAB, SUNi-?)
CALL ROTATE(XPG,XLO*',VMIO»CROTtSROT,J)
COSC=COSF(CAN)
YRRA = CF.XP/COSF(CAM)**4
OEN(1)=EXPF((DEN(1 1-DEN1 2 ) I/GAK+DTHI /COSC)
/TFNR
DEN(3)=EXPF(DEN(3) /GAM) *YRRA
TRB=A1+A2*CAN+A3*CAN*CAN
BLUE=DEN(3)*TRB
X(10,J)=DEN(1 )-81-B2»SUNR-B3*BLUE
IF (J-200) 245,245,260
C FILL IN ARRAY WITH PHOTO VAL'JES
C X AXIS ALONG THE CENTER LINE OF PLUME
260 KK=J-1
DO 285 J=1,KK
LX=X( 1 »J)/60.+0.5
IF (LX .LE. 0 .OR. LX .GT. NNXS ) 285,
LY=(X( 2,J)+YMIDY)/60.+0.5
IF (LY .LE. 0 .OR. LY .GT. NNYS ) 285,264
RATIO! IRUN,LX,LY)=X( 10, J) #1000.
IF (J-l) 280,280.267
DDEN=X(10,J)-X(10,J-1)
DKX=LX-LLX
DKY=LY-LLY
XKX=ABSF(DKX)
YKY=ABSF(DKY )
,262
762
764
267
0 'i 2 6 =5
0 n ? 7 n
Oil ?1
00272
00273
00274
002 75
00276
00277
00273
002 79
00280
00281
00282
00283
00284
00285
00286
0028 7
00288
00289
00290
00291
00292
00293
00294
00295
00296
00297
00298
OC299
00300
00301
00302
00303
00304
00305
00306
00307
00308
00309
00310
00311
00312
00313
00314
00315
Figure B-2. Listing of program (continued)
208
-------
IF ( X t X - V < Y ) 2 6 S » ? 5 9 » ? 5 "•
268 KY=Y. ) 272 ,2 72»2tf'.>
272 DO 275 K.= l ,KY
YYK = K
DE=X(lC»J-l)+DDtN*YY
-------
318
320
302
1
304
362
,I,LLJ)=RATIO(IRUN»I»J)-DIF*AJ/DJ
302 .302 »303
IN ARRAY
1 TO AVERAGE VALUES OR 2 IF NOT')
L L J = J + K
RAT 10( iRUNi
CONTINUE
CONTINLE
IF «NO-6)
KND=10
KDN = 6
GO TO 301
C AVERAGE VALUES
303 WRITE!61.1)
FORMAT ( ' TYPE IN
IGO=TTYIN(4HIGO=)
GO TO (304,380) IGO
ITEST=1
DO 370 1=1,NXS
DO 360 J=2,NY5
GO TO (362,3641,ITEST
X( 1 .J) = ( RATIO!I RUN,!,J)+RAT10(I RUN.I,J-l>+RATIu(lRUN,I,J+l)-
1 RATIO!IRUN. 1 + 1 ,J) 1/4
364 X(2»J) = ( RATIO! I.RUN, I,J)+RATIOt I RUN, I + 1 , J ) +RAT IO ( I RUN , I +2 , J ) -
1 RATIO(IRUN,I+1,J+1 1+RATIO! I RUN,I+ 1 , J-l ) 1/5
360 CONTINUE
ITEST=2
XMAX=0.0
DO 365 J=2,NYS
RATIO! IRUN,I ,J)=X(1,J)
IF (XMAX-XI1»J) ) 361,363,363
XMAX=X(1,J)
XI1,J)=X(2,J I
CONTINUE
WRITE (61,39) XMAX
FORMAT (Ell.3)
CONTINUE
J=l
READ (19,12) FIX,XL,YL,CONL
READ (19,12) FIX.XF.YF.CONF
IF (FIX) 520,520,505
DDEN=CONF-CONL
DKX=(XF-XL)
DKY=(YF-YL)
X
-------
516
13
485
490
520
37
42
31
30
540
CONTINUE
X<1»J)=RATIO(1RUN»LX»I_Y)
X(2.J)=X( 1,J)*X( l.JI
XI3.J) =CONC
WRITE (04.13) (X( 1 »J) . 1 = 1 .31
FORMAT 17E11.3)
522
33
524
IF (J-200)
CONTINUE
XL=XF
485.485.520
CONL'CONF
GO TO 500
NO=J-1
N = 3
CALL LEASTFI Tl N.NO.B)
WRITE (61,37) B( 1 ) .8(2 )
FORMAT ( ' B 1 ' , E 1 1 . 3 . ' B2 • .El 1 . 3 )
WRITE (02,42) XLOW.YM1D.ROT
FORMAT (1H1 ,' XORG=' »F8.0. ' YORG= • »F7.0» '
DO 540 1=1 ,NNXS,20
WRITE (02,31)
FORMAT (1H1)
00 540 J=l ,NNYS
ROTATION
= ' ,F5.3 !
10
53C
WRITE (02,30) (RATIO! IRUN.K.J ) »K=I »KK)
FORMAT (2015)
CONTINUE
ROT=-ROT
SROT=-SINF( ROT )
CROT=-COSF(ROT )
XORG=XLOW
YORG=YMID
XLOW=0.0
YMID=Y"IDY
C3 = TTY INI 4HB1 = )
CA=TTY IM14HB2= )
XSUM=0.
DO 522 J=1.NO
XS'JM = XSUM+(CB*X( 1 , J )+CA*X ( 2 . J ) -X ( 3 • J > 1 **2
CONTINUE
XNG=NO
X5UM=XSUM/XNO
WRITE (61,38) XSUM.NO
FORMAT (' MEAN SQUARE '.Ell. 3.' DF ' . I 5 1
DO 530 I=1,NNX5
DO 530 J=1,NNYS
IF 1 RATIO! IR'JN, I ,J) ) 524,530.524
AJ=J
AI = I
XPG ( 1 ) =A 1*60.
XPG( 2 ) =AJ*60.
CALL ROTATE! XPG, XLOW , YM I D, CROT . SROT , J )
XPGI 1 ) =X ( 1 , J 1+XORG
XPG12 ) =X(2.J)-*-YORG
AXZ=RAT I0( IRUN, I . J)
AXZ=CB*AXZ+CA*AXZ*AXZ
IF (AXZ-C.6) 530,537,537
WRITE(20ilO) I .XPGI 1 ) .XPG ( 2 ) .4XZ
FORMAT! I3.3r15.2)
RAT I0( IRUN. I .J) =AXZ*10.
CONTINUE
J = l
00442
00443
00444
00445
00446
0044"'
00448
00449
00450
00451
00452
00453
00454
C045b
00456
00457
00458
00459
00460
00461
00462
00463
00464
OC465
00466
OC467
00468
00469
00470
00471
00472
00473
00474
00475
00476
00477
00478
00479
00480
004al
OC4o2
00t83
00484
00«*85
00486
00487
00488
00489
00490
00491
00492
00493
00494
00495
00496
00497
00498
00^99
00500
005C1
00302
00503
00504
Figure B-2. Listing of program (continued),
211
-------
^RITE (20,14) J
14 FORMAT ( 55X, I 3)
END FILE 20
WRITE (02,42) XORG»YCRG,ROT
DO 542 I=1,NNXS,20
WRITE (02,31)
DO 542 J=1»NNYS
KK=I+19
WRITE! 02,30) (RATIO(IRUNtK.J),K = I,«!
542 CONTINUE
SUM=-ROT
IDENT IFICATIOIN FOR SYMoOLIC PLOT. PHOTO NOS , JAY MONTH
DIF = FFIN(5 )
FDATE=FF;N(5)
ETIME=FFINI 5 )
DO 602 J=l,8
XI3,J)=0.0
6C2 CONTINUE
WRITE (02,15) SUM,DIF,EDATE,ETIME
15 FORMAT(1H1,///42X'AIRPHOTO ANALYSIS OF OCEAN OUTFALL DISPERSION'
1 /// ,45X , 'VOLUMFTRIC WASTE CONCENTRATION ML PEK L'//,55X,
2'SKETCH ON 60 - FT GR I D'/,49X , 'DIRFCTI ON OF PLUME ',F5.2,
3 ' RADIANS'/,35X»'PHOTO NO . ' »F4.0»30X»'DATE ' , F3.0 , '-' ,F3.0,
4 ' -68'/ I
vJRITE (02,23)
23 FORMAT! 35X,1 CONCENTRATION CODE IN ML/L'/,45X,
1 ' ) 0 - 2 ' , 1 5 X , ' 1
2 ' I I 4 - 6 ' , 1 5 X , ' L L
3'PP 10 - 15' ,14X » 'RS
41 Mf.i 20 - 25 ' , 1 4X , '*»
WRITE (02,45) XORO.YORG
2 - 4'/,71X, • 1'//,45X,
6 - 10 ' / ,445X, 'MM' ,24X»'**'//'/>
45 FORf'AT (60X, ' +
NYS = NNYS-li1
IKS=NNYS/2
KS
DO
DO
AXZ
AXZ
IF
605 XL=
IDO
GO
610 X( 1
X(2
GO
620 X( 1
X(2
X(3
GO
630 X( 1
X(2
X(3
GO
640 X ! 1
X (2
X ( 3
GO
650 X(l
X(2
X ( 3
GO
X=',F8.0,'E
Y=i
.F7.0 , ' N'
=KS-29
700 LX=2,NNXS
690 LY=1»NNYS
= RATIO( IRU"I»LX,LY )
=AXZ/1H.
(AXZ-0.5) 510.610,605
AXZ/2.+l.
=XL
TO (620,630,640,6601,100
,LY)=8H
,LY )=8H
TO 690
,LY ) =8H )
,LY )=8H
,l ) =X(3, 1 1 + 1 .
TO 690
,LY )=8H1
,LY )=8H 1
,2 ) =X( 3i2 1 + 1 .
TO 690
,LY )=8HI I
,LY )=8HI
»3 ) =X(3»3 1 + 1 .
TO 690
,LY)=8hLL
»LY )=8HLL
,4) =X ( 3,4 ) +1 .
TC 690
00505
00506
00507
00508
00509
00510
00511
00512
00513
00514
00515
00516
00517
005i6
00519
00520
00521
00522
00523
00524
00525
00526
00527
00528
00529
00530
00531
00532
00533
00534
00535
00536
00537
00538
00539
00540
00541
00542
00543
00544
00545
00546
00547
00548
00549
00550
00551
00552
00553
00554
00555
00556
00557
00558
00559
00560
00561
00562
00563
00564
00565
00566
00567
Figure B-2. Listing of program (continued)
212
-------
66
A 7
IF (AXZ-10.) 650.650.670
XL=AXZ/5.-l.
IDO=XL
GO TO (675 ,680,685.683) , 100
57^ XI 1 ,LY ) = 6H°P
XI2.LY )=8HPP
XI3.5) =X (3,5 1 + 1 .
GO TC 690
680 X(1,LY)=8HRR
X(2,LY)=8HRR
X( 3,6) =X(3 ,6 1 + 1 .
GO TO 690
685 X(1,LY)=8HMM
X(2»LY )=8HMM
X( 3,7) =X( 3,71 + 1 .
GC TO 690
688 X(1,LY)=8H*»
X(2,LY )=8H»*
X(3,8)=X(3,8 1 + 1.
690 CONTINUE
WRITE (02.24) < X ( 1 , J ) , J= I KS , I EK5 )
WRITF (02,24) 1X12 .J) , J=IKS» IF.KS)
24 FORMAT (70A2)
700 CONTINUE
DO 603 J=l ,8
XAR( IRUN,J)=X ( 3, J 1*3600.
603 CONTINUE
I RUN=IRUN+1
IF( IRUN-IRUNM) 54,54,593
593 AMASS=RATE*60./ABSF ( VEL)
DO 594 I RUN=1 , IRUNM
WRITE! 02 ,18 1 1RUN
18 FORMAT(1H1,47X, 'PRELIMINARY
1 58X, 'FLIGHT NO . ' » I 3 , / / 1 9X ,
2' SECTION WIDTH EFF DEPTH SIGMA
3 ' COEFFICIENT GRO'jNO X GROUND Y
DIFFUSION COMPUTATIONS'//!
Y'
DIFFUSION COEF'/
4 ,2QX, 'FT i ,7X , >FT ', lFT SG PER SEC'//)
GO TO (550,552 1 , IRUN
550
552
56
57
LDST=3
GO TO 554
LDF=10
LDD = 8
LDST=LDFX+3
NXS=NNXS-2
DC 600 I=LDST,NXS,5
DO 560 J=l,NNYS
IF ( RATIO! IRU*1> I »J) > 560,560,570
) CONTINUE
GO T0 600
: JST=J
LNY = 0
DIV=O.C
5UM=0.0
DIF=0.0
DO 580 J = l ,NNYS
AJ=J*60
ACD=(RATIOlIRUN,I,J)+RATIO!IRUi\»I-l,J)+RATIO(I«UN,I+l>J)+
1 RATIO! IRUN,1-2,J1+RATIOI IRUN.I+2.J) 1/50
00568
00569
00570
00571
00572
00573
00574
00575
00576
00577
00578
00579
00580
00581
00582
00583
00584
00585
00586
00587
00588
00589
00590
00391
00592
005^3
00594
00595
00596
00597
00598
00599
00600
00601
00602
00603
00604
00605
00606
00607
00608
00609
00610
00611
00612
00613
00614
00615
00616
00617
00618
00619
00620
00621
00622
00623
00624
00625
00626
00627
00628
00629
00630
Figure B-2. Listing of program (continued)
213
-------
596
; 7
600
26
27
40
41
694
722
724
725
) I . =: J I F -r A C D
) I v,' = 0 I V * A C D * •"• J * A J
IF (RATIC( IRUN, ! , J ) ) 560,580,575
LNY=LNY+]
'. DNT I No't
XM£AN = SJ'''1/D I F
X( 10.L )=OI V/DIF-XHEA,N»xy,EA,\
X(4,L)=LNY*60
X(5,L)=AMASS/(DIF*3.6)
XI6.L)=SORT(X( 10 ,L ) )
X(7,L)=DIF*60./(2.51*X(6,L) )
XPG( 1 ) = 1*60
XPG(2)=XMEAN
J=l
CALL ROTATE!XPG,XLOW,YMID,CROT,SROT,J)
X(S»L)=X(1,J)+XORG
X(9,L)=X(2,J1+YORG
IF (L-l) 585,585,590
DJ = 0.
GO TO 595
nj = AnSF(VFL)*(X(1';,L)-X(lO.L-l))/600.
II -L + 1 5 0
X(LDF,LL)=X(10,L)
X(LDD.LL)=X(4,L)
A'PtTEt 02.17) I, X(4'L),X(5,1 ),X(6,L).X(7.!_),X(8.L).X(9,L),DJ
FORMAT(19X,I6,-°.?,F9.1,8X,2E11.3,2F13.0.E14.3)
L = L + 1
COKT IM'E
WR 1 TLi02 ,26) RATc.VEL
FCRMA1 (///j5A , i FLOrt i-iA TE ' > F5 . 1 . • CFS'»17X,
.'CURRENT VIL 0 CIT r ' » F 4.2 . ' FPS1//)
A'RI TE ( 02 .27) AZ,H
FORMAT ( 35X, ' S'JN AZ FM S.'.F6.3»' RAD'
_>17X,'SJN ALT I ruOE' .F6.3 , ' RAD')
IvRITE (02,40)
FORMAT(47X,'AREA WITHIN EACH CONCENTRATION RANGE'/,
L 56X , 'RANGE' .1 3X, 'AREA'/,55X, 'ML/L' , 13X, 'SO FTi)
WRITE (02,41) (XAR(IRUN,J),J=1,8)
FORMAT(55X,'0 - 2' >8X , E11.3/ , 55X,'2 - 4' . 8X . E11.3/ ,
: 55X,'4 - 6' .8X.E11.3/.55X.'6 -1C' .8X , El1.3/.
! 55X,'10-15' »6X,Ell.3/.55X,'15-20' »8X,E11.3/»
5 55X ,' 20-25' »6X,Ell.3/.55X,'GT 25' ,8X ,E11 . 3)
CONTINUE
AJ=O.C
DIV=0.0
SUM=0.0
AXZ=0.0
WRITE (02,31)
NX5=NNXS-1
DO 728 1=1,NXS
DO 725 J=1,NNYS
DKX=RATIO(2,I»J)-RATIO(1,I,J)
IF (DKX) 722.724,722
DKX=DKX/10.
AJ=AJ+1.
DIV=DIV+DKX
SUM = SUM-»-DKX*DKX
AXZ=AXZ+AB5F(D
-------
D=SQRT (OKY/ ( AJ-1 . ) )
AXZ=AXZ/AJ
AJ=AJ-1.0
WRITE (02,^8) DKX.AXZ.DKY.AJ
48 FORMAT(1H1,////• MEAN DIFFERENCE
IN CONCENTRATION' >F6«2»
I/' ABSOLUTE MEAN DIFFERENCE
2' STANDARD DEVIATION OF THE
3 ' FREEDOM' ,F6.0 )
L = 3
WRITE (02.53)
33 CORMAT iiHi,///20X,'N o N s
1 ' DIFFUSION CO
2 »23Xt 'SECTION' »12X«
? 'C.OEFF 1C IENTS1/ )
L) I V = 0 .
' iF6.2 •/
MEAN'.F6.2,/ '
DEGREES OF
TEADY STATE'
EFFICILNTS'//
l',12X,'WIDTH 2' » 8 X »
3T IM=DTIM*2.
L X F = 1 5 0
L X L = 1 5 0
DJ=(X( 10»LXF)-X(9.LXL) I/DTIM
'v^^ITE (02>52) LiX(7,LXL)»X(8fLXF),DJ
FORMAT (23X. IS,1 ^X,F6.0«l^X,F6.C»lOX.F8.2)
? I V=DI V+l .
LXF=LXF+1
IP(LXF-LL) 730,730,740
40 DIV=SUM/OIV
>\'?irE (0?,60) DIV
60 rc^MATfP^x,' '•' c 1 \ DIFFUSION C C E
"• : ' r- T .3 P
F Ml
- ? I C I T M T ' , F 1 0 . 2 )
00694
00695
00696
00697
00698
00699
00700
00701
00702
00703
00704
00705
00706
00707
00708
00709
C0710
0071 1
00712
00713
00714
00715
00716
00717
00718
00719
00720
00721
00722
00723
00724
0072^
00726
00727
00728
Figure B-2. Listing of program (continued)
215
-------
SUBROUTINE ROTATE12H REFRACTION ,F10.6,
1/16H AZIMUTH OF SUN ,F10.6)
RETURN
END
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
00011
00012
00013
00014
00015
00016
00017
00018
00019
00020
00021
00022
00023
00024
00025
00026
00027
00028
00029
00030
00031
00032
00033
00034
OOOJ5
00036
00037
00038
00039
00040
00041
00042
00043
00044
00045
00046
00047
00048
00049
00050
00051
00052
00053
00054
00055
00056
00057
00058
00059
00060
00061
00062
00063
Figure B-3. Listing of subroutines,
216
-------
10
15
610
SUBROUTINE RESECT (FL.XP.YP.C)
DIMENSION B(15.6).C120.3).P(2.8)>D(6.7>
PHOTO RESECTION PHASE
READ IN REFINED PLATE AND GROUND COORDS OF RESECTION POINTS
IGO=1
FL=FFIN(1)/25.4
FL IS FOCAL LENGTH
IPLATE=FFIN<1)
IMAGE=FFIN<1)
XP=FFIN(1)
YP=FFIN<1)
BB = FFIN( 1 )
DO 10 I=ltIMAGE
B! I,1)=FFIN( 1)
B(I,3)=(FFIN(1)-XP)/1000.
B( I»2) = (FFIN(1 )-YP)/1000.
BB=FFIN(1)
CONTINUE
DO 15 1=1,IMAGE
BB=FFIN(3)
B( I ,4)=FFIN(3 )
B< I ,5)=FFIN(3 )
B( I»6)=FFIN(3 )
CONTINUE
INITIAL APPROXIMATION OF CAMERA PARAMETERS
CC1 ,1)=FFIN(3 )
C(1.2)=FFIN(3 )
C(It 3)=FFIN(3)
2.1 )=FFIN(3)X57.2928
3,1)=COSF(C(2.1)1
2,1)=SINF(C(2,1 ) )
612
C 2,2 ) =FFIN(3)X57.2928
C 3,2)=COSF(C( 2,2) )
2f2 )=SINF(C(2.2) )
C( 2,3 ) =FFIN( 3 ) /5~7.2928
C(3,31=COSF(C(2,3))
C(2,3)=SINF(C(2,3 ) )
ORIENTATION FACTORS IN C ARRAY
C(4, 1 )=C13,2)*C(3,3 )
C(5,1 ) =-C(3,2 )*C(2,3)
C(6,l)=C(2,2)
C( 10,1 ) =-C(2 .2)»C(3.3)
C ( 11 ,1 )=C(2,2)*C(2 ,3)
C(12,l )=C(3,2)
C(10,2)=C(4,1)*C(2 ,1)
C( 11 ,2 ) =C(5, 1 )*C(2,1 )
C( 12,2 )=C(2.1)*C(2,2)
C( 10,3 )=-C(4,l)*C(3f1)
C( 11 .3 ) =-C(5 .1 )»C I 3.1 )
C(12.3)=-C(3,1)*C(2 .2 )
C(4,2)=C(3,1)*C<2»3>+C<12»2>*C<3>3>
C(5,2)=C13,1)*C(3,3)-C(12,2)*C(2,3)
C (6,2)=-C(2.1)*C(3.2)
C(4,3)=C(2»l)*C(2t3)+C(10fl)*C(3fl)
C(5.3)=C(2,1)*C(3.3H-C(11.1)*C(3.1)
C(6f3 ) =C(3 »1)*C(3»2 )
DO 612 1=7,9
C(I,1)=0.
C( I ,2)=-C( 1-3.3 )
C( I,31=C( 1-3 ,2 )
C( 13,1-6)=C(5,1-6)
C ! 14,I-6)=-C(4,1-6)
C(15,1-6 1=0.
00064
00065
00066
00067
00068
00069
OOOVO
00071
00072
00073
00074
00075
00076
00077
00078
00079
00080
00081
00082
00083
00084
00085
00086
00087
00088
00089
00090
00091
00092
00093
00094
00095
00096
00097
00098
00099
00100
00101
00102
00103
00104
00105
00106
00107
00108
00109
00110
00111
00112
00113
00114
00115
00116
00117
00118
00119
00120
00121
00122
00123
00124
00125
00126
Figure B-3. Listing of subroutines (continued)
217
-------
GO TO (613 ,763) »IGO
CLEAR NORMAL EQUATION 0 ARRAY TO ZERO
613 DO 614 1=1,6
DO 614 J=I,7
614 D(I,J)=0.
COMPUTE P TERMS FOR RESECTION PASS POINTS
DO 618 NU=ltIMAGE
DO 619 <=1,3
619 C(16,K)=B(NU,'( + 3>-C( 1 ,K)
K = 4
DO 620 L=17.20
DO 620 1=1,3
CIL.I ) =C«.l ) *C<16,l)+C(K.2)*C<16t2)+C(K»3)*C(16>3)
620 K = K+1
DO 621 1=1,2
DO 622 L=l,4
622 P(I,L)=(B(NU,[+l)»C(L+16,3)-!-FL)»C(L+16,I))/C(17,3)
DO 623 L = 5,7
623 P(I,L)=(-B(NU,I+l)*C(6,L-4)+(-FL)»C(I+3.L-4))*C(1.3)/C(l7,3)
621 P(I»8)=-P(1,11
CONTRIBUTION ~0 NORMAL EQUATIONS
DO 618 1=1,6
DO 618 J=I ,7
DO 618 K=l,2
618 D(I,J)=C>(I,JH-P(K,I + 1)*P(K,J + 1)
FOREWARD SOLUTION
DO 699 1=116
SQR=SQRT(D( I , I ) )
DO 698 J=I,7
698 D(I,J)=D(I,J)/SOR
IF (1-6 1697,696,696
697 IP1=I+1
DO 699 L=IP1 ,6
DO 699 J=L,7
699 D(L,J)=D(L, J)-D( I ,L )*D( I , J )
BACK SOLUTION
696 D(5,7)=D(6,7)/D(6,6)
DO 691 1=1,5
NMI=6-1
NMIP1=NMI+1
DO 690 J = NMIP1 ,6
690 D(NMI,7)=D(NMI,7)-D(J»7]*D(NMI,J)
691 DINMI ,7)=D(MM I ,7)/D(NMI ,NMI )
DO 625 1=4,6
625 D( I ,7 I =D( I ,7 )*C( 1 ,3 )
ADD LEAST SQUARES RESULTS TO CAMERA PARAMETERS IN C AR^AY
DO 626 J=l ,3
C( 1>J)=C( 1,J)+D(J + 3 ,7)
C(4,J)=D(J,7)
C(5,J)=SQRT(1.-C(4,J)*C<4»J)>
C(6»J)=C(2,J)*C(5»J)+C<3»J)*C(4,J)
C(7»J)=C(3»J)*C(5»J)-C(2,J)*C(4»J)
C(2,J)=C(6,J )
626 C(3, J ) =C(7,J )
TEST MAGNITUDE OF CORRECTIONS FOR ORIENTATION PARAMTERES
DO 628 1=1,3
IF (ABS(D(I,7))-.00001)628,628,610
628 CONTINUE
IGO = 2
GO TO 610
CAMERA PARAMETERS OUTPUT
763 WR[TE(02,532)
WRITE(02,527)
00127
00128
00129
00130
00131
00132
00133
00134
00135
00136
00137
00138
00139
00140
00141
00142
00143
00144
00145
00146
00147
00148
00149
00150
00151
00152
00153
00154
00155
00156
00157
00158
00159
00160
00161
00162
00163
00164
00165
00166
00167
00168
00169
00170
00171
00172
00173
00174
00175
00176
00177
00178
00179
00180
00181
00182
00183
00184
OOlbS
00186
00187
00188
00189
Figure B-3. Listing of subroutines (continued)
218
-------
WRITE
WRITE
WRITE
WRITE
WRITE
WRITE
IPLATE,(Cl1 .J),J=1,3)
527
528
529
530
532
533
10
15
20
30
50
IPLATE.(C(2.J),J=1,3)
IPLATE.
-------
6
70
20
60
80
85
100
105
140
200
210
250
260
350
360
370
380
400
450
460
500
550
DIF=X(N»J)-E3TY
WRITE (02.6) X(NiJ) .ESTY.DIF
FORMAT(3F15.7)
CONTINUE
RETURN
END
SUBROUTINE MATINV(A,N,B.M,DETERM)
MATRIX INVERSION WITH ACCOMPANYING SOLUTION OF LINEAR
DIMENSION IPIVOT(IO). AUO.lOlt BUOil). INDEXC10»2)i
DETERM=1.0
DO 20 J=l.N
I PIVOT(J1=0
DO 550 I=1»N
SEARCH FOR PIVOT ELEMENT
AMAX=0.0
105 J=1.N
( IPIVOTIJ)-l )
100 K=1,N
( IPIVOTIKl-l)
EQUATIONS
PIVOT(10)
60. 105, 60
80, 100. 740
85, 100, 100
DO
IF
DO
IF
IF (ABSF(AMAX)-ABSF«U J, K I ) )
IROW=J
ICOLUM=K
AMAX=A(J ,K)
CONTINUE
CONTINUE
IPIVOT ( ICOLUM) = IPIVOTI ICOLUM)+l
INTERCHANGE ROWS TO PUT PIVOT ELEMENT ON DIAGONAL
IF (IROW-ICOLUM) 140. 260. 140
DETERM=-DETERM
DO 200 L=l»N
SWAP=A( IROW.L )
AtIROW.L)=A(ICOLUM.L)
A ( ICOLUM.L) = S'VAP
IF(M) 260, 260. 210
DO 250 L=l, M
SWAP=B(IROW.L)
B(IROW,L)=B(ICOLUM.L)
B ( ICOLUM.L)=SWAP
INDEX! 1,1) = IROW
INDEX! I ,2) = ICOLUM
PIVOT( I )=A(ICOLUM,ICOLUM)
DETERM=DETERM*PIVOT(I)
DIVIDE PIVOT ROW BY PIVOT ELEMENT
A(ICOLUM,ICOLUM)=1.0
DO 350 L = l ,N
A(ICOLUM,L)=A(ICOLUM.L)/PIVOT(I)
IF(M) 380, 380. 360
DO 370 L = 1»M
B( ICOLUM.L)=B( ICOLUM.L)/PIVOTt I )
REDUCE NON-PIVOT ROWS
DO 550 L1=1,N
IF(Ll-ICOLUM) 400, 550, 400
T = A(LI , ICOLUM)
A(L1,ICOLUM)=0.0
DO 450 L=1,N
A(L1.L)=A(L1»L)-A(ICOLUM,L)*T
IF(M) 550, 550, 460
DO 500 L=1,M
B(L1,L)=B(L1,L)-B(ICOLUM,L)*T
CONTINUE
INTERCHANGE COLUMNS
DO 710 1=1,N
L=N+1-I
00253
00254
00255
00256
00257
00258
00259
00260
00261
00262
00263
00264
00265
00266
00267
00268
00269
00270
00271
00272
00273
00274
00275
00276
00277
00278
00279
00280
00281
00282
00283
00284
00285
00286
00287
00288
00289
00290
00291
00292
00293
00294
00295
00296
00297
00298
00299
00300
00301
00302
00303
00304
00305
00306
00307
00308
00309
00310
00311
00312
00313
00314
00315
Figure B-3. Listing of subroutines (continued)
220
-------
IF (INDEX(L»1)-INDEXIL.2)) 630. 710. 630
630 JROW=INDEX(L.I )
JCOLUM=INDEX(L.2)
DO 705 K. = 1.N
SWAP = A «., JROW)
A ( 1C . JROW ) =A( K .JCOLUM)
A(K.JCOLUM)=SWAP
705 CONTINUE
710 CONTINUE
740 RETURN
END
FUNCTION REFLECT IAI.ARI
A=AI-AR
B=AI+AR
C=SINF(A>*»2
D=SINF(B)**2
E=TANF(A)**2
F=TANF(B)»*2
REFLECT=ABS(A/B+C/D)/2.
END
SUBROUTINE TRNCOORDICAMO.XT,J.FL,I PHOT)
DIMENSION XT(3 ) »CAMO(3»5»3)
COMMON X( 10 .200 )
DO 10 K=l,3
10 XTIK. )=CAMO( IPHOT,2«O*X( 1 . J)+CAMO( I PHOT » 3 » K ) *X ( 2, J > +
1 CAMOIIPHOT,4,<)*(-KL>
XDIS=SQRT(XT(1)*»2+XT(2)**2+XT(3)**2)
DO 20 K = l,3
20 XTIK) = XT (K) /XDIS
RETURN
END
SUBROUTINE GRDCOORD 1CAMO . XT.XPG.J» I PHOT)
DIMENSION CAMC(3 » 5 »3)»XT(3)»XPG(2)
XPG(1)=CAMO( IPHOT.l , 1)-XT( 1 )*CAMO( IPHOT.l, 31/XTI3)
XPG(2)=CAMO(IPHOT.1»2)-XT(2)*CAMO(IPHOT.1.3)/XT(3)
RETURN
END
SUBROUTINE ANGLESSUNR)
DIMENSION XT(3) ,XS(9)
DIV=SQRT(XT( 1 )**2 + XT(2)**2)
CAN=ABSF(DIV/XT(3)1
ANGLE 8ETWCE"! RAY IN AIR AND VERTICAL
CAN=ATANF(CAN)
SINC=0.75*5INF(CAN)
COSC=(1.0-SINC*»2)**0.5
TANC=SINC/COSC
ANGLE BETWEEN RAY TO CAMERA AND VERTICAL UNDER WATER
CCA=ATANF1TANC)
FT=-DIV/TANC
XDIS=SQRT(XT(1)**2+XT<2)**2+FT**2>
X1=XT( 1 1/XDIS
X2=XT(2)/XDIS
X3=FT/XDIS
COSB=X1*XS(1)+X2*XSI2)+X3*XS(3I
SINB=5QRT(1.0-COSB*»2I
TANBsSINB/ABSF(COSB)
ANGLE BETWEEN SUN AND CAMERA RAYS UNDERWATER.
B=ATANF(TANB)
3=3.14159265-B
TAB=B-3.14159/2.
COSB=-XS(4)»XT(1)-XS(5)*XT(2)+XS(6)*XT(3)
SIN8=SQRT(1.0-COSb**2)
TANB=SINB/ABSF(COSB)
SUNR=ATANF(TANB)
IF (COSB) 260,261,261
260 SUNR=3.14159-SUNR
261 RETURN
END
Figure B-3. Listing of subroutines (continued)
00316
00317
00318
00319
00320
00321
00322
00323
00324
00325
00326
00327
00328
00329
00330
003J1
003J2
00333
00334
00335
00336
00337
00338
00339
00340
00341
00342
00343
00344
00345
00346
00347
00348
00349
00350
00351
00352
00353
00354
00355
00356
00357
00358
00359
00360
00361
00362
00363
00364
00365
00366
00367
00368
00369
00370
00371
00372
00373
00374
00375
00376
00377
00378
00379
00380
00381
00382
00383
221
-------
fe
- d r*i r> f ^ finc'imf'immmmr'if'ii'if
3OOOOCOor>o:*c5ooooor:i<~'C
^0°>ooc:o0<"l<~>^'"><~><'1'~>'^'r'<~'<~1<-
in*ociP>o— • ™ o o -th-.inrt.-.--.i»)(\j[\j
er^«oona J coa c or .* ^ » in in in ^ """ in m Js*J-t-t-»-»-**J
,».*.».*.».*•** •*-*•»•*-»•»>*•*>»•*
c-oooooooor c ooooooo
!r !r !r S * * *r -o .r ,'^ .0 %r ^ •& x> *• ~o **•
o o o o o n ° "> ~> • -> .-> o -i o o .-> a
?JF.-i^??S::i: jp.?-!1^
o h- i" a iT>o ("• rf> :> .-• a o rv o ,j J (\j IT
,eir'-»'lr>aiLrifnriJ"* — "j in f\t f- fi ,n r-.
^-(\.(7>^^'-rNrrv''T'J'Lriir' r rvj « *t* \r\ *r
r\j-"r*'-ju".rfvj'''lr'''-'1'""1"f'rv-if*11"'1 -* IT n
f>-r-»af-i'rf^r~r~ f-axaf^ar-r-
irmmiru-Lrirt'">u'11* inmiTinirininir
,*,»,»,*-».»•*•*•*-*•»•*•*•* »•*-*-*
jNt»-*-»-»-i»J-»
oo~'OOC ^-i iT o in
c o o O o fj r
<\ O ft n J r f-
•3 T J r ^ 0- —
•> ~> "i o n ,j o
rr o o c ? r,
— ' -i — • ^-. m "1 r^
C IT (?• (\j * O- IT
J -3 n >f -i i/ K
ooo c ooo
a c f o- j c r
(\j a >r — < c --
o - o o col
o- c o o ooo
— _ ^. „ ^__ j-mj-
r-3-^j t>iT-r> tr'*iT
^-"^•o't ?.^7 5^£
* *\j j -^ *n"- Jirr
~ -. -_j — o -5 -i .- o o
o-oo-j c \o tr aTr-
r"-C3j: rv.^cr i cr —
c r- ir o t^cc o Ifi tf\ ~C •C
1 •* -* ^f •* 4 -t
o o o o o o
0 O O 0 0 0
\ •— t oirt fvj •-•
1 i/l
i m * m tn ^ n
-JO Of- •* Oi
o n >f in in IT
* j » m * »-
•* m ^ ru r\j r\j
O O O O O O
* *) 4 in ^ Ifl
O l\) o- (T- *> 0
ft " — •£!& Ul if .
-*7 o o o o o o
/ IT in IP o o c
1 r- o- -a — -» r-
, "] r^ o ,t >C IT
: T T r*. ^ o f^
m ^c o»- -» at
c m *> tr in IT
* j- o m * r--
•f m -* fvj LP in
_£ f * (\i p, (\
— -i ,0 J^ IT J
C O O O C C
r Lf> 01 in o o o
,. ,r^~,r,
J f- — O •£> — JT
| -* m j- -j n *
f -i (T OT- rn
J
\
f*i m r>
ooo
f\J -* 4
(*i a, i*i
•C f t^
* m -*
m » a
Jl f- O
a o c
o o r
•ft JT ^
0 0 O
0 "7- 'U
a-, IT r-
0- 0 O
m J J
tt J <*l
in a- a
r-- r- r-
o c o
TOO
4 r- r-
"" "" ~
I -I 0-
n-oo
Si T
n a- i.
ir.t~- a
-----,
cr o o
£ f- r-
r w: j-
^ (~ i~
j- r- o
a x CT
fl f»- fT>
o o c
coo
c c c
\ o o c
d)
rH
ooo
ooo
ooo
ooo
(C -O
^J 4
QO a:
o m
o .*
in *
O o
--" O
•r- LT
O 0
C 0
*1
ix * "
^ o o
^ C J
r. x
k ss
^
W, --
o o
"
-
o o
c
ooo
000
ooo
o c o
IT.
•&
o
cc
o
- -
fV! fr-
c c
o
ocooocooooooooooooooocooooooooaoc oocooocoooooooco
ooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooc oooooooooooooooa
OCOOOOCCOOOOOOOOO(~OOOOOOOOOOOOOO(~ OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
i
• cooocoor, oooooooooo c oocooooo 1 5" oooooooooocooooo
CM OOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOI OO-OOOOOOOOOOOOOO
c rlou^^S^5<^[?^irccc-i- c occ-i^fSrv, -ji^mir.r>ino'co~^^S'££
\
S «««55R«S=3^3S =,: ««r»7 1 ^S«£»««SgS?
OOOO OOO C) OOOOOOOOOO OO OOOO OOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
i:
TJ
,-1 rvjaj^fT-mj-j-j^inifiircoo — -1--^ oo ooo— .-i^-~.f\j j-^^-tirinLnooo-H^ — -IOJPJ
c
rT 1
• f- ^ - _- - ^ .-.^ ~_J^_,^.4
c4s5U5.s?-**^;i5«»£- ?rs ^rr^M^;??IIHf*H?IMJ
^•ctvrvrnr-r-^'SSu-u-ircccc-.- c o c occc--^rv 1 ^j'Sjifirurrec^-.-fvr
.r- - /
a CTC OOOOCOOQ/ OCOCOCCOOOOOOOOC'1
OCC OC OOCOOOCOO/ OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
• * rvc -ccccccccl coocoococcocococ:/
c»
—
C«
W
pq
a)
S-l
3
222
-------
oooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo
o o 1*1000 oo m« o o moo o o o o «
-roj-oc r""1 ^ *" ^ ^ m "" *" "> r f r~ 11 r- ~i
o 1/1 "• r- o *c o •r*-o-ccrf\jo •ao-r^co •ficr^o «rv(\jf^ccO" ~^\
•~lfv-ir'~f*'u''— •™fru~c^(\J oC'-O'CC o~Ct-ic fvrvtjc-— /A
coooooc »ocoooo -oorr-o «oooc «coocc • ^^
^ — ^^^^^O— — «^0^- —-—^0 — -—^o-^.r-r-.^c ^.
cooooc ooooc ocacr ^o-o o-oo-c '"N
.
ex
a
0)
H
PM
LT1
PQ
Q)
M
3
223
-------
APPENDIX C
PROCESSING 1969 PHOTOGRAPHIC DATA
A general description of the CDC 3300 Computer and special fortran in-
put functions is given in the introduction of Appendix B.
Two main programs were used to process the photos taken in 1969. These
were program EDIT, which used the raw data to find film density differ-
ences, and the program REMOTE, which used the differences generated by
EDIT to find steady and non-steady state diffusion coefficients as well
as providing data for symbolic and contour plots of waste concentra-
tions.
Program EDIT
A flow diagram for program EDIT is shown in figure C-l. The numbers in
parentheses on the diagram refer to the line numbers on the program
listing shown in figure C-2.
The input for the program is arranged on three or four LUNS, depending
on the number of photographic bands available for each exposure. Each
band is on a separate input file. A sample of the coordinate and volt-
age data is shown in figure C-3. This example shows the beginning of
a file of data, with the first three lines being standardization volt-
ages. The format is as listed below.
Column Data
1 Month photo taken
2-3 Day of month photo taken
4 Flight no. of day
5 Photo no. of flight
6 Blank
7-9 Event no. (see code below)
10 Blank
1H4 y-coordinate of photo
15-18 Voltage value from densitometer
The lines 6-18 are repeated six times across the card. The x coordi-
nate is interpolated across the photo by knowing the number of scan
lines and the total distance covered in the x-direction.
224
-------
Event No. Description
40-59 Initial red standardization.
60-79 Initial green standardization.
80-99 Initial blue standardization.
100-119 Initial gold standardization.
120-139 Final red standardization.
140-159 Final green standardization.
160-179 Final blue standardization.
180-199 Final gold standardization.
200-299 Normal red color.
300-399 Normal green color.
400-499 Normal blue color.
500-599 Infra-red red color.
600-699 Infra-red green color.
700-799 Infra-red blue color.
800-899 Infra-red black and white.
900-999 Panchromatic black and white.
In running the program, the maximum and minimum voltages must be typed
in from the teletype. The program proceeds to read the data, checking
to see that it does not read data for a new photo. While reading the
input, the number of scan lines are counted and the standardization
data is stored. When a new photo is reached, the program backspaces
the input LUN to the beginning of the photo. Subroutine LEASTFIT is
called, and a least squares adjustment is made of the densitometer
voltages to the standard grey scale film densities.
The photo coordinates of the principal point and scan limits are read
from LUN 8. The photo coordinate and corresponding voltage are read
from the data LUN which was previously backspaced. The film density
and x coordinate are computed for each sample point. This process is
repeated until one photographic band is completed. The program then
goes to the next input LUN, and repeats the process, until all film
densities are computed for a single photograph.
225
-------
The differences between film densities of adjacent photographic bands
are found, and the extreme differences are rejected. The remaining
differences are printed in an array, from which the general shape of
the plume may be found by locating abrupt changes in film density. An
example of the output is shown in figure C-4, where the non-zero en-
tries in the array are the differences between film densities of ad-
jacent bands for a particular photo.
The program checks to see if there is another photograph to be pro-
cessed and if so, the overall process is repeated.
Program REMOTE
Program REMOTE is the second program used for processing the photo-
graphic data. A flow diagram of program REMOTE is shown in figure C-5.
The numbers in parentheses correspond to the line numbers on the list-
ing of the program in figure C-7. The subroutines are listed in figure
Co
— O.
Differences in film densities from program EDIT are on LUNS 1, 2, or 3.
The boat data is on LUN 4, general information on LUN 7, photo control
coordinates on LUN 8, ground control on LUN 9, and initial orientation
parameters on LUN 10. Sample input data is shown in figure C-9.
The program begins by orienting all of the photos. The current velocity
and orientation of the plume are then computed. After finding the azi-
muth and altitude of the sun at the time the photographs were taken,
sun ray vectors are computed. The waste concentrations as measured
from the boat are read in, and concentration and array indices are
computed at 60-ft intervals along the boat's track. These values are
saved for later use on scratch LUN 5.
Subroutine PROCESS is called, which reads the photo identification,
finds the atmospheric attenuation, and reads in the density difference
between adjacent bands which was the output from program EDIT. Ground
coordinates, array indices , light values and angles are computed, and
the indices , angles, and light values written out. The equation for
the light return which would be present in the open sea (Rpho) is de-
termined. The differences between the open sea values and the values
found by measuring the light return on the photograph for each sample
point are computed and stored. A flow diagram of PROCESS is given in
figure C-6. The subroutine then returns to the main program, which
checks to see if the last band was processed. If not, the solution is
repeated. When the last band is reached, the program compares the
values of waste concentrations found by using various combinations of
the photographic bands with those from the boat data. When a good
combination is found, coefficients relating the light values to the
waste concentrations are typed in, and the waste concentrations for
the array are computed. The data generated is then used to form a
symbolic plot (see figure 28), and can also be saved for making a
226
-------
contour plot of waste concentrations (see figure 29). The diffusion
coefficients for each flight are computed and when the last flight has
been processed, the non-steady state diffusion coefficients are de-
termined.
Input Data Description
The input data for program REMOTE is shown in figure C-9. The data
displayed as LUN 7 is as follows:
Line Description
1-2 Approximate difference in orienta-
tion between Hasselblads and K-17
in degrees.
3-5 Times of three flights in hours and
minutes, P.D.T.
6 Effluent flow rate, gpm.
7-8 Declination of sun, degrees (line 8)
and minutes (line 9).
10 Change of declination of sun, min-
utes per hour.
11-12 Equation of time in minutes (line
11), seconds (line 12) and change
in seconds per hour (line 13).
13 Longitude of outfall.
14 Latitude of outfall.
15 The difference between true north
and grid north in degrees.
16-23 Each line contains the film gamma,
film speed and optical thickness of
the atmosphere for each of eight
spectral bands.
24-26 Speed and aperture settings for
K-17 for three flights.
27-29 Speed and aperture settings for
Hasselblad 1 for three flights.
227
-------
Line Description
30-32 Speed and aperture settings for
Hasselblad 2 for three flights.
33-40 Coefficients for determining atmos-
pheric attenuation from the sea to
the camera station.
41 Number indicating whether or not the
antivignetting filter is on the K-17,
0 = yes, 1 = no.
The input for LUN 8 contains photo coordinates as measured by the co-
ordinatograph and digitizer. The first five digits of each line are
constant data, and represent:
Col. Data
1 Month photo taken.
2~3 Day of month photo taken.
4 Flight number.
5 Photo number of flight.
After the constant data there are three groups of data on each line,
each containing an event number, x-coordinate, y-coordinate, and four
zeros where the voltage is normally recorded. The event numb'er coding
is as follows:
Event No. Description
000 Principal point.
001-019 Ground control points {"numbers must
match those on LUN 9. See below).
020-029 Floats for computing the current
velocity.
030-033 Scan limits on photograph,,
034 Point near head of plume.
035 Point near tail of plume, which,, to-
gether with 034 will give orienta-
tion of waste plume.
228
-------
The ground coordinate data is prepared on LUN 9. Each point listed as
control on LUN 8 must have ground coordinates on LUN 9. Reading across
a line are the point number, the x and y state plane coordinates, and
the approximate elevation above mean sea level.
LUN 10 contains the approximate orientation parameters for the camera
station relative to the state plane coordinate system. Reading across
the line are the photo number, the x and y coordinates, the flying
height, and the rotation angles and the x, y, and z axis. These are
used in subroutine RESECT as initial conditions for a non-linear least
squares solution for the camera station position and orientation.
Subroutines for REMOTE
Subroutine
Process
Resect
Sunlight
Trncoord
Zeroarry
Orimat
Description
Computes array indices for particu-
lar ground coordinates, light values,
and sun angles. It also determines
the equation for light return from
the open sea, and finds the differ-
ence between the light return mea-
sured and that which would be pre-
sent if waste area were open sea.
Determines the orientation of ob-
lique photographs and was modified
from USC and GS program RESECTION.
Each time the subroutine is called,
the camera station coordinates and
orientation matrix are printed on
LUN 20.
Computes the altitude and azimuth of
the sun. Time must be given as
Pacific Daylight Time, and all pert-
inent information dealing with the
equation of time must be read in. A
value for the longitude and latitude
of the area being considered is also
necessary.
Converts the photographic vector to
a unit vector based on the state
plane coordinate system.
Sets IPHOT, X or CAMO array to zero.
Determines orientation matrix.
229
-------
Subroutine Description
Interp Interpolates missing values in
IPHOT array.
Average Averages values in IPHOT array.
Cull Rejects extreme values in array.
Leastfit Determines the least squares solu-
tion of the regression coefficients
for a linear model with one indepen-
dent and up to nine dependent var-
iables. (See lines 351-422 of EDIT
listing andonit lines 393+2, 401+1,
401+2, 405-420).
Matinv Determines the inverse of a square
matrix (see lines 423-490 of EDIT
listing).
230
-------
/PROGRAM^
V EDIT J
TTYIN max. & mm
voltage limits /
I
ILUN = 1
(23)
/READ ILUN event no.,,
y-coordinate, voltage^
End \Yes
data >^ STOP
Event number
Initial grey
scale std
Final grey
scale std.
I
Count scan
lines
(64)
Backspace
ILUN
(75)
Call leastfit adjust
voltage to grey
scale film density
standardization
Figure C-l. Flow diagram for computer program EDIT,
231
-------
(93)
READ ILUN
y-coordinate]
& voltage
(139)
'READ 8 photo
coordinates of
principal point and
scan limits
Compute photo
coordinates and film
densities
No
LUN = ILUN
Compute differences in
densities of adjacent bands
(241)
Reject extremes
in differences
(244)
WRITE differences/
in densities
Figure C-l. Flow diagram for computer program EDIT,
232
-------
10
90
95
100
111
112
114
116
118
120
132
140
PROGRAM EDIT
COMMON 1PHOT(4,60»60) »X(10,60)«B(15»6)»IVT<6> »i3B ( 9 )
INTEGER HARDWARE
ILUN=1
DCOOR=C.C7
XPH=30.
YPH=30.
NXI=60
NYI=60
KGO=1
DO 90 1=1 iNXI
DO 90 J=l ,NYI
DO 90 K=l,4
IPHOT(K,I ,J 1=0
NOL=0
JNO = 0
NOS = 0
VOL1=TTYIN(4H'_VOL )
VOL2=TTYIN!4HHVOL )
LS = 0
READ!ILUN. 1) IMO,IDATE,IFLT,IPH.(IVT(I),X(lO.I),X(9.I).
I 1 = 1,6)
FORMAT (I1,I2,2I1,X,6(I3,F5.3,F4.1))
IF (EOFt ILUN) I GO TO 1000
IF (IVT(1).LT.200) GO TO 120
IF (NOL.GE. 1) GO TO 111
IPLATE=(IFLT-1)*10+IPH
IDENT=IFLT*10+IPH
IBAND= IVT ( 1 ) /100-1
IFIIPLATE .GT. 30) GO TO 111
XPH=TTYIN(4HPHX=)
YPH=TTYIN(4HPHY=)
IF (X(10,2) .GT. X(lO.ll) 112,114
L = l
GO TO 116
L=2
NOL=NCL+1
IF(LS-L) 1 18 ,100.118
NOS = NlOS+l
LS = L
WRITE(61,21) LS,NOS,MOL
FORMAT(315)
GO TO 100
IF( IVT( 1) .GT .119) GO TO 140
DO 132 1 = ] ,6
IF (IVT(I) .EQ.O ) GO TO 132
X( 1 ,K ) =1.0
X(2,K)=X(9, I )
X(3 ,K ) =X(9 , I )*X(9, I )
CONTINUE
GO TO 100
NOL=NOL+1
JNO=JNO+1
DO 142 1=1,6
IF (IVT(I) .FQ.
X(5,KK)=X(9, I )
0) GO TO 142
IF (KK-16)
142 CONTINUE
GO TO 100
142,142,145
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
00011
00012
00013
00014
00015
00016
00017
00018
00019
00020
00021
00022
00023
00024
00025
00026
00027
000^8
00029
00030
00031
00032
OC033
00034
00035
00036
00037
00038
00039
00040
00041
00042
00043
00044
00045
00046
00047
00048
00049
00050
00051
00052
00053
00054
00055
00056
00057
00058
00059
00060
00061
00062
00063
Figure C-2. Listing of program EDIT.
233
-------
145 DO 150 1=1,NOL
BACKSPACE ILUN
15C CONTINUE
X(4,l)=0.0
X(4,2)=0.27
DO 160 1=3,16
X<4, I ) = X(4, 1-1 1+0.20
160 CONTINUE
N = 4
N0=16
IF(K .GT. 16) 170,1000
170 CALL LEASTFIT(N,NO,BB,RES)
6(1,1 )=BB( 1 I
B( 1,2)=BB(?)
B(l ,3) =BB(3)
IFIKK .GT. 16) 180.1000
180 DO 190 1=1,16
X<2»! )=X(5,I )
X( 3. I ) =X(2, I)*X(2.1 )
190 CONTINUE
CALL LEASTFI T (.M , NO.BB , RES )
B(2,l)=BB(1)
B(2,2 1 =BB(2)
BI2.3) = BB(3)
GO TO (195,250),KGO
FIND SCAN LIMITS AND PRINCIPLE PT
195 L=0
K = l
REWIND s
700 RFAD(8,2) I FT,(IVT< I)»X(1,I)»X(2 . I >,I = 1.3>
2 FORMAT!3X.I2»3( I4.2F6.3.7X ) )
IF (EOFI8)) GO TC 1000
IF (IFC-IDENT) 200,210,200
210 DO 223 1=1.3
IF(IVT
-------
XADD=DELX/2.0
DELX=(B( 14,1 1-B M 1 , 1 )+B( 13 , ! 1-n ( 1 ? , 1 1 )/(AJ*2.)
CFLY1M3U4,21-3(11,211/AJ
DELV2=(B(13»2)-R(12»2)1/AJ
? 72
274
27fa
78 '
2S4
286
288
290
300
330
'.v SITE (61 .22) KNO,DELX,OFLY1,DELY2
22 FORMAT ( I1C.3F13.3 )
DC 400 IK=1,KNO
JS=<+1
JE=K+6
READ AND PROCESS ONE SCAN LINE AT A TU-'E
R-AD(IHJN,^)-X(in,J)) 282.264, 286
L = l
GO TO 288
GO TO ( 236,282 ) »L
L=2
IFILS .NE. L) GO TO 300
CONTINUE
K = K + 6
GO TO 400
PROCESS SCAN LINE
L S = L
I ^T = J
IF (J .LT. 12) GO TO 392
DEi\s i TOMETLR SID FOR LINE
DO 310 1=1,3
a(3,I) = 3(l,I) + (B(2,I)-3(l,I))*Ai'M05/AJ
CONTINUE
BDIR=(X(10,3)-X(10,2) 1*100.
II- ( bDIR .LE. 0. ) GO TO 330
PHCTO COORD OF START AND END OF SCAN
YST=B(12,2)+OELY2*ANOS
XEO=B(11,1)+DELX*ANCS+XADD
YED=B(11,2)+DELY1*ANOS
J=IST-3
-------
340 3 J =IS T-1
DELX3=(XED-XS")/BJ
DELV ?=(YED-YST >/BJ
IF (ABSIDELY3) .GT. 0.15) GO TO 392
DO 380 I=JST,J
lX(9,I-l)).GT.10..ANn.ABS(X(9»I-
2.LT.10.) GO TO ^»80
!F(X(9,1).LT.VOL1.OR.XI9,I).GT.VOL2) GO TO
AAJ=I-1
)*X< 9
vp=YST+(X( 10
Y=YP/DC003+YJH+0.5
I F( IBAND.GT.6I DEN = <».0-L>EN
IF(LX.LE.O.OR.LX.GT.NXI) GO TO 330
IF(LY.LE.O.OR.LY.GT.NYI) GO TO 360
I PHOT( !LUN,LX,LY)=DtM*100.
380 CONTINUE
DC 395 J=I5T,IND
395
4CO
XI1C.K ) =X< 1C »J )
X(9»<)=X(9»J1
CONTINUt
CONTINUt
DC 410 1=1 ,JiMO
410 READ!ILUNt1) 1X0
3(7, ILUN) = IFLT
618,ILJN)=IPLATE
8(9i
NXS=NX1-2
NYS=NYI-2
CALL INT"RP(NX[ , NY I »N|X3,NYS,KND»KDN, I LUN )
CALL CULLlNXI,NYI,ILJN)
I LUi\=ILU\+l
I c ( nARDWA:-!£ ( I -_JN ) .EJ. 1) GO TO 95
IK=ILJN-2
DO 500 1 = 1 ,NXI
DO 500 J=1»NYI
DO 500 K = l , IK
Ic(IP-JOT«,I,J).r3T.O.Al\D.IPHOT(K + l.I,J).G'
490 1PHOT(K»I,J)=IPHOT(K,I,J)-IPHOT(K+1»I,J)
GO TO 50':
495 IPHOT « , I ,J)=^
•i"""1 ""ONTINUE
JO 700 K=1,I<
CALL CULL(NX I»NYI »K)
490,495
IFIHARDWAREI L JNO ) .Nb.l ) CALL E3U I P ( LUNO , 5rlF I L t )
WRITE(LUNO,60) IMO.IOATE,?!?,!) ,IPH,R(8,1) ,8(9 ><) ,B(9.K + 1 )
1 ,XPH, YPri.DCOOR
6C FORMAT!2I5,F5.C,I5,5F5.0,F5.3)
U = N X I / 2
DO 650 J=1,NYI
f.50 v'RITb (LJNG.61 ) ( I PHOT ( K, , I , J ) , ! = 1 , I J )
I.J= ! J+l
DO 660 J=l,NYI
660 'ARITE ( LJfMC,61 ) ( I PHOT ( K , I , J ) , I = I J ,NX I )
00190
00191
00192
00193
00194
00195
00196
00197
00198
00199
00200
OOZ01
00202
00203
00204
00205
00206
00207
0020d
00209
00210
00211
00212
00213
00214
002i5
00216
00217
00218
00219
00220
00221
00222
00223
00224
00225
00226
00227
00228
00229
00230
00231
00232
00233
00234
00235
00236
00237
00238
00239
00240
00241
00242
00243
00244
00243
00246
00247
00248
00249
00250
00251
00252
Figure C-2. Listing of program EDIT. (Continued)
236
-------
530
532
51 FORMAT (3014)
TOG CONTINUE;
GO TO 10
STOP
END
FUNCTION STDDEVI SUMI »suM2»AJ >
'^T[-)l)EV = 5QRT( / ( AJ-1. ) )
RETURN
END
SUBROUTINE INTERPINXI ,NY I , NXS »NYS .KND.KDN.KL'JN )
COMMON I PHOT (4.60>60)»X<10,60),B(15»6)tlVT(&),3B<9>
DO 540 1 = 1. NYI
DO 540 J=1»NXS
IF ( IPHOTIKLUN.Jil ) ) 530,540,530
IF ( IPHOT ( KLUN.U+1 » I ) ) 540,532,540
DO 534 K=2, = I PHOT(KLUN,I ,U)-DIF*AU/DU
518 CONTINUE
520 CONTINUE
RETURN
END
SUBROUTINE AVERAGE(NXS,NYS,KLUN)
COMMON IPHOT(4,60»60),X(10,60),B(15»6),IVT(6),JBI9)
DO 570 1 = 1 ,NXS
DO 560 J=2,NYS
GO TO ( 562,564) , ITEST
562 X( 1 ,J) =( IPHOTtKLUNt I tJ) + IDriOT«LUNiI . J~l ) + I PHOT ( KLU1^ , I ,J+1 1 +
1 IPHOTIKLUN, 1+1 ,J) 1/4
564 X( 2. J ) = ( IPHOT (KLUN,I,J) + IPH01 (K.LUN,I + l»J) + IPHOT(KLUNtl 1-2, U) +
1 IPHOT«LUN, 1 + 1 , J+l ) + IPHOT (KLUN, 1 + 1 , J-l ) 1/5
560 CONTINUE:
ITEST=2
00253
00254
00255
00256
00257
00258
00259
00260
00261
00262
00263
00264
00265
00266
00267
00268
00269
00270
00271
00272
00273
00274
00275
00276
00277
00278
00279
00280
00281
00282
00283
00284
00285
00286
00287
00288
002o9
002VO
00291
00292
00293
00294
00295
00296
00297
00298
00299
00300
00301
00302
00303
00304
00305
00306
00307
00308
00309
00310
00311
00312
00313
00314
00315
Figure C-2. Listing of program EDIT. (Continued)
237
-------
DC 565 J = 2,NY'i
I PHOT ( K.LLA, I »J I =X ( 1 • J )
X(1.Ji= X(2.J)
563 CONTINUE
570 CONTINUE
RETURN
END
SUBROUTINE CULL(NX ItNYI,KLUN)
COMMON IPHGTl4,60»60)»X(10,60)»ri(l:j.6)»I\/T(S)>Jb(9)
I5J = 9.
IX = NXI-2
IY=NYI-2
DO 100 1=1 ,IX
DO 100 J = ltl Y
SUM1=0.0
SUV2=0.0
DO 20 IK = 1 ,3
00 20 JK=1»3
IP=I+IK-1
JP=J+JK-1
IF(1PHOTIKLUN,IP.JP) ) 10.100.10
10 AI=IPHOT
Cr=(SUMl-BI1/(BJ-1.)
SIJM1=A I-SUM2
SUM2=AI+SUM2
IF(BI«LT.SUM1.0R.BI.GT.S'JM2) IPhOT(KLUN,I+l,J+l)=CI
100 CONTINUE
RETURN
END
SUBROUTINE Lt^STf;IT ( N ,NO, 38 . RES 1
COWON IPHOTI4.60.60).X(10,60).6(15.6).IVT16)
OT -IF MS I ON Q^( •; ) ,XX( 10.10) ,XY( 10 ) .ZI TX( 10,1 )
N=MO OF VARIA^LES»NO=NO. OF DATA,S=COFF
m < < = f-j - 1
DC 15 J=l»KK
X Y ( J ) = 0 .
DO 10 1=1.NO,1
XY(J)=XY(J)+X(J,I)*XIN,I)
CONTINUE
COiviT INUE
DO 20 K=l iKK.
DO 20 J=l .KK.
XX ( J.K. )=0.
DO 20 1=1,NO
XX(J,<)=XX(J»K)+X(J»I)*X(K,I)
20 CONTINUE
CALL MATINV I XX,KK,ZITX,0,DETERM)
DO ?0 J=1,KK
SSIJ)=0.
DO 30 1 = 1,KK
36(J)=Bo(J) + XX(J, I)*XY(I)
30 CONTINUE
WRITE (20»1)
vRITE (20.5) 4
003b5
00366
00367
00368
00369
00370
00371
00372
00373
003 74
00375
00376
00377
00378
Figure C-2. Listing of program EDIT. (Continued)
238
-------
40 CONTINUE
BXX=0.
DO 50 J=1.KK
BXX = BXX+BF?(J)*XY(J)
50 CONTINUE
17
7
60
13
6
70
12
i ^ *
1 w *
60
83
13'
>-£ST Y' )
RES=( YY-BXX) /IDF
WRITE (20.3) RES. IDF
FORMAT (32H L"AST SJ ESTIMATE OF PARAMETERS )
FORMAT (23H MEAN S3 OF RESIDUALS' , E16« 7 » 5X , 4HDF =
FORVAT (28H V \R I ANCE-COVAR I ANCE VATR1X )
FORMAT (/4E15.5)
WRITE (20,4)
W7ITE (20,5) ( ( XX( I .J) .1 = 1 .K.K) »J = 1 »KK)
WRIT"; (20,7!
WRITE (61,17)
FORKAT ( ' INDEX Y-EST Y« )
FORriAT ( ' Y EST OF Y
DO 70 J=1.NO
ESTY=O.J
DO 60 <=1 » INDX)*X( 2 •> INDX )
WRITE (61,12)
FORMAT (' ANY^JRE CHANGES I 1 FOR YES, 2 FOR NO')
KTRY = TTYIN('thTKY= )
GO TO ( 80 » 14-) ,
-------
100 CONTINUE
1C 5 CONTINUE
I PIVOT(ICOLUM)=IPIVOT! ICOLUKJ+1
INTERCHANGE ROWS TO PUT PIVOT ELEMENT ON DIAGONAL
IF (IROW-ICOLUM) 140. 260. 140
140 DFTERM=-DETER"
00 200 L=1,N
S'A'AP = A(IROW»L)
A
-------
. IT o f~ •-<
cc
n m (vi (v «-i (v rvi «*•• m^mmcvj
ir«-*cir •-- f (T1 IT «-i f-- fi c? tr> •— ' r»-
sfir c»-«-{v tf iT id Iff IT If!
OC
C
.— •-*(VfV.(Vrv.r-l•—
acr cr«- cct' rv »c h- \o ^* •—
IT, IT IT^O -*3" -T C N- OCP— '
cc ca r^nr -*ca^r-vr
\i if c. ~~ — fVifv, r-c X' o r^
h- o rv.1 fV' •-• »- (V. rv.' •-<
il ,f f iT IT
acvr>r^oo
^ o ^ o -^
(v f f
C C — f\ • OJ
ccacrv. <
iTiriro>cc
ooccir--— '
NO >r >€ -t rrrr>
IT
.
lT IT IT IT if! If , \f- IT. If ' IT IT IT IT-
tv
rv rv r- c rvc >ca'cr>tc>ofx.'oc-*ONcru
>*-* jcc-- — (vrri^^iTvCvCf^-
if IT. IT IT tn IT, IT- IT IT \f IT IT LT»
241
-------
ccocccocccooccccccccoccccocccocccco
c c c x f .* ^LT^f^^r^cc >c^irmrvrvf\.fv.mmm'*i.-i.-^c4 c ex-* (vccocc
r\(\rvr\(vr\.fxfvrv(\.f\rvrv(\.rvf\(V(\rvrv—1-C--CC c
ccccfvvf>r*f^erofccr^r -£f, mm.* < c ccc
rvi\jfvr\jr\j(M^forvruojrvjfvJrvf\jrvr\jrvrva.1'-'— cccc cc
cccrjm^^sC^c caLa-r^h-^^^^^DLr^r-rjinmrvcccc or-cccc
N(V(\.f\j(V(\r^(vi\fV'X(xi\.(\rvfva'rvrv.ii\^^^-^cccc
iccji* * x h- <; ^-r-N.jrr--xcc^^-?-*fvom-^fv«-HOac'1^ ~; <~ c. ~
rvfVfvjrVjrxif*"^ r"(\,fVfvrv(X^fV'(\)f\.fvj)\ ^- ^- ^ ^- ^- ^ c — c
c c c rv* **) -* st t^-TirvfVtr-v/i-J^njr^ — -* -* rv a rm^-rx — cc^cccc
r^r-^-rv — "—*r-r^ccc
-^cc oo-a-ximfvfv—'--ccrp-in-*jicccc
mr*im'\iC-£irf\'— CCT-O- O-^tCLTifCOCC
immojfvpj i\)f\JMfv.(\jr\j ^-^-^H*—^*~ir-'
• o- CT-o^ccaDJi-* -*mr\jc aa-tro-r^-*rrcrc CO
>'\jf\jnjf\jfvfvfuf\j'\injf\j '-«—«,-*^.-.~_«o
x£srcccrr*-cc at oer cro'O-fTLrir^mmrv.o ccr od^-*r^\£ccc
rv](\,{VfV(\jrK.rvf\jr\j'\jr\](vm r\.-fv.(\jf\ji\j--oj •— -—(\i •—^-^c
'if*cr^r^r^r-^cc.occxc f •—
mmca ooocr-rn.--ctccc
ifvnjoj^oj — r>jf\j^- — ^-o
rvtvff'CXxacJ-NC-*— ccccc
ir\.ioj^oj«-^^-^^- — — --c
.•-' — ccttr^-r-r-^^ccccc
rvixtvjfv *— »- ^- ^- •— F-
:^-oacc>o^-r^x-* fvcoocc
|f\J — -.->J—.—.r-^-^--,
coccpp-irp-r-irciofp-'-o'(\axxc''^o ^r«ru"TTK4- ccccccc
r^^i—>^-^-^"^H^-I'\J^-^\J^^— ^-t^-^-^-.^^— ^-"CC CO
occoocccccccccccccccccccccccccocccc
o
t,
tT
CL)
Jj
^?
242
-------
REMOTE
Jr
(38)
(53)
/READ 7 initial data/ ^Orient all K-17 photos
8 coordinates of
current floats and
waste field orientation
f 060)
(72)
Check 70mm
orientation
Compute current
orientation of
velocity and
plume
(283)
Compute
sun azimuth
and altitude
i
-(285)
fREAD 7
film gamma, speed,
atmospheric thickness,
exposure time, and FNO
(306)
Compute sun ray
vectors
(337)/ READ 4
boat concentrations
and coordinates
WRITE 5
concentration and
array indices
(375)
I
(349)
Compute concentration
and array indices at
60-ft. intervals along
boat's track
©
Figure C-5. Flow diagram of program REMOTE.
243
-------
(382)
BAND = 1
Call subprogram pracess
No
(471)
(420)
Yes
Establish band combinations
Compare with boat
concentrations
(488)f
TTYIN values of
coefficients
f (516)
Compute waste concentrations
in arrays
(533)/WRITE 20
symbolic plot.
Compute steady state
diffusion coefficients
(627)
I
(618)
WRITE 23
'contour plot
data
Compute nonsteady state
diffusion coefficients
i
END
x.
figure C-5. Flow diagram of program
REMOTE.
244
-------
"SUB\
PROGRAM)
ES^/
(15)
/TTYIN limits on open sea/
/TTYIN density hmits
READ photo
identification
Compute atmospheric
attenuation
. (39)
^
(36)
Orient
70 mm photo
I
(54)
/READ IBAND density
difference between
adj. bands
Compute
ground coordinates
array indices
light values (Rpn)
and angles
(100)
WRITE 21
array indices
R ^ and angles
Figure C-6. Flow diagram of subroutine PROCESS,
245
-------
(109)
Determine equation
for Rpho
(114)
'READ 21 and compute
RA -
(148)
'WRITE (30 + IBAND)
RA
End dataX No
for flight
f Return j
Figure C-6. Flow diagram of subroutine PROCESS.
246
-------
D£FIME OEClAR
COMM3N X(10|300 ) , I PHOT C120,80),CAMO(9lj,6),C(2lJ,3)
COMMON 8(15,6) , P(2,8),ANGHB(4>,VOLL<2,8)
END
DEFINE GROCOORD
X3=CAMO/XT(3)
XG(2)=CAMO(IPLATE,2)-CAMU(IPLATE,3)*XT<2) /XT (3)
END
PROGRAM REMOTE
C INPUT LUNS ARE
C 1. «EO-GREEN FILM DENSITIES
C 2. iREEN-ULUE FILM DENSITIES
C 3. 3LUE-GOLD FILM DENSITIES
c it. JOAT CONCENTRATIONS AND COORDINATES
C 7. GENERAL INFORMATION
C 8. °HOTO COORO. FOR CONTROL, FLOATS, SCAN LIMITS
C ANO WASTE FIELD ORIENTATION
C 9. iROUNJ CONTROL COORDINATES
C 10 APPROXIMATE ORIENTATION PARAMETERS
DIMENSION TIMFLT(3),IE<3),XT(3),XG(2),H<3>,AZ<3>,
1 Xl( 5) , Yl(3) ,130(8) ,3B(9)
INCLJOE OECLAR
INTEiER HARDWARE
IF MARDWARE<7> . EQ. 1) 90,1000
9Q REWINO 7
IF ( «RDWARE(20) .FQ. 1) 94,92
92 CALL EQUIP(20,5HFILE )
94 REWIND 20
FL=6.0
NXX=1Q
NYX=3JO
NXI = TTYIN (l»HNXI=)
NYI = TTYIN((»HNYI = )
IFRA-90
95
100
110
120
ZERO ARRAYS
CALL ZEROARRY ( NX I , NY I , ,MXX , NY X , IFRA , KOR)
READ FROM LUN 7 HASSELBLAO ORIENTATION ANGLES,
OF TH*EE FLIGHTS IN HOURS AND MIN ANO EFFLUENT
FLOW RATE IN GPM
OEL01G=FFIN<7>/57.2958
0 EL PHI = FFIN( 71/57. 2958
DO 95 1=1,3,2
AN3H3 ( I) =QELOMG
ANGH3U+-1) =OELPHI
00133 1=1,3
TIMFLT( I)=FFIN(7)+FFIN(7)/60.
RATE=FFIN(7)/ (7.^8'faa.)
IF (H4RDWARE18) .NE. 1) GO TO 1000
IF MARDWAREC9) . Nh . 1) GO TO 1000
IF ( ^ROWAREdU ) .Nt. 1) GO TO 1000
ORIENT ALL PHOTOS
CALL RESECT (FL, OELOMG, DELPHI)
CALL ZEROARRY (NXI,NYI,NXX,NYX,1,0)
00 I'D 1=1,30
IF C;AMO( i,3»-i.3> 120,120,110
00 123 J=l,3
CAMO( 1*33, J) =CAMO (I, J)
C*HO(I+60,J)=C&MO(I,J)
CONTINUE
REWIND 8
TIME
00001
00002
00003
0000
-------
IGO = 1
105 GO TO ( 132,121*, 126,300) ,IGO
122 KHBL=0
GO TD 136
12*. KHBL=3
GO T3 136
126 KH3L-6
KHBH=10
C CHECK ONE CONTROL PT ON EACH CAMERA
136 XP=0.
J=0
S'Jf 2-0.0
1<»0 REAO<08,1> IFL.IPH, (IE(I) ,X1 (I) ,Y1(I) ,1 = 1,3)
1 FORM4T(.JX,2I1,3(I4,2F6.3,7X) )
IF (EOF(8)) GO TO 253
IF (IFL .GT.KHBL . AND . IFL . LT . KHOH) 150,140
150 DO HO 1 = 1,3
IF .ECU u .ANO.XKI) .GT. 0.1) GO TO 155
IF (IE(I) .GE. 1 .ANO. IE(I) .LT. 20) 160,170
155 XG(1)=X1U>
XG(2) = Y1< I)
K=l
GO TO 180
160 IPTN=IE(I)
XP=X1(I)
YP=Y1 (I)
IF
OY=Y3-XG(2)
WRITE (20,2) IPTN.XGd) ,XG(2)
WRITE (20,3) I,XP,YP
(20,4) IPLATE,OX,DY
00063
00063
00064
00065
00066
00067
00068
00069
00070
00071
00072
00073
00074
00075
00076
00077
00078
00079
00080
00081
00082
00083
00084
00085
00086
00087
00088
00089
OC090
00091
OC092
00093
00094
00095
00096
0009/
00098
00099
00100
00101
00102
00103
OC104
00105
00106
00107
00108
00109
00110
00111
00112
00113
00114
00115
00116
00117
00118
00119
00120
00121
00122
00123
Figure C-7. Program listing for REMOTE. (Continued)
248
-------
X=*,F8.0,* Y=*,F8.0)
X=*,F8.0,* Y=/,F8.Q)
DIFX=*,F5.0,» OIFY=#,F5.0>
2 FORMAT(* HB PT NO.*,13,*
3 FORM4TU GO PT NO.*,13,*
i* FORMAT(* PHOTO NO.*,13,*
DIS=:>IST(OX,OY)
IF MIS-2J.) 136,136,200
200 GO T3 (136,210,210),IGO
210 J=0
K=60
IF (IGO .EQ. 2) K=30
K=IPLATE-K
220 XG(1)=OY*SIN(CAMO(K,6» +QX*COS(CAMO(K,6) )
XG(2)=DY»C03(CAMO(K,6))-OX*SIN(CAMO(K,6))
IF (J .EQ. 1) GO TO 230
OX=XT(1)
OY=XT(2)
Xl(l)=XG(1)
Xl(2)=XG(2)
J = J*-1
GO TO 220
230 SUM1 = XT<*)/OIST(XS<1) ,XT<3))
SUM2=XT(3)/OIST(XG(2),XT(3I)
K=3
IF (IGO .EQ. 2) K=l
ANG-HCK + 1) =ANGriB ( <*•!)-XI (1) * SUMl*SUMl/Cft M0( IPLATE ,3)
ANGH3(K)=ANGHB(K)+ X1(2)*SUM1»SUM2/CAMO(I PLATE,3)/2.
WRITi(20,30) ANGH6(K),ANGHB(K+l)
30 FQRM^T(* OELOMG* ,F7 .3,/* DELPHI* , F7.3)
GO T3 136
250 IGO=IGO*1
REWI-JO 8
GO T3 105
300 FL = 6 . 0
c COMPUTE :JRRENTS AND ORIENTATION OF HASTE FIELD FROM K-I
305 R£AO (8,1) IFL,IPH, ( IE(J) ,X1(J),Yl(J),J=1,3)
IF (zOF(3)) GO TO 350
IF (IFL .Li. 3) 310,305
310 IPLATE=(iFL-i)
03 3
-------
350
352
351*
355
360
370
375
380
COMPJTE ORIENTATION OF WASTE FIELD
00 3oO 1=1,30
IF KGC1>
C (12, 3) =XG<2>
XP=Y1(1)/1300.
YP-Y1(2)/1JOO.
CALL TRNCOORCHXP, YP,FL,XT>
INCLJOE GRDCOORO
XP=Xi(l)-C(12,2)
YP=Xi(2)-C(12,3)
IF (YP) J5<.,355,355
C (13,2) =SIMF(ROT)
C(13,3) =COSF(ROT)
WRIT3(2a,5) ROT,C (12,2) ,G(12 ,3)
FOR<"I4TU1 DOTATION 4NGL E t, Fl 0 . 3, t RAO*/,
* CHIGIN X#,F10.0t/« ORIGIN Y*,F10.0)
GO TO 373
CONTINUE
K=0
00 330 1=1,30
00 343 J=2U,29
IF (IPHOT(I.J)) 330,380,375
XP=I340T (1,2) -I °HOT ( I +30 , J)
YP=I3HOT(I,1)-IPHOT(I,J)
XP=X->/UOO.
YP=Y3/10 JO.
K=I/1 J+l
IF (IPLATE .NE. I) CALL ORIMAT(I)
CALL TRNCOORD (Xa, YP,FL, XT)
IPLATE=I
INCLJOE GRDCOORO
X (J-19,K) =XG(1)
X ( J-19, Kf 30) =XG (2 )
WRITE (23,6) J, I, XG(1) ,XG(2)
FORMATS FLOATS, 13, t PLATE*, 13,* X=*,F10.0,
t Y=*, F10. C)
CONTINUE
00 355 L = 1 , 1 0
XP=X (L, 1) -X(L ,2 I
Y^zX ( L, 31) -X (L, 32)
Xl( 1) =OIST ( XP.YP)
XP=X(L, 1) -X (L ,31
r^=X(L, 31) -X(L, 53)
X (L,1)=OIST(XP, YP)
X°=X (L,2)-X(L,3 I
YP=X(L,32)-X(L, 33)
X (L, 5) =OIST(XP, YP)
X =X1(1)
00186
00187
00188
00189
00190
00191
00192
00193
0019<»
00195
00196
00197
00198
00199
00200
00201
00202
00203
0020<»
00205
00206
00207
00208
00209
00210
00211
00212
00213
0021
-------
385 CONTINUE
COMPJTE AVERAGE CURRENT VELOCITY
X1<1)=)»3600.
Xl<2) =(TIMFLT <2>-TIMFLT-TIMFLT<2)>*3600.
J=0
SUM1=3.0
SUM2=0.0
OIF=3.0
AI=0.0
00 390 L=l,10
00 39J 1=1,3
IF (X(L,I) .LT.10. .OR.X(L.I) .GT.4000. ) GO TO 390
J=J«-i
VEL=X(L,I)/X1(I)
SUM1=SUM1+VEL
SUM2=SUM2+VEL»VEL
K=L+19
H*ITE<20,7) K,I,VEL
7 FO*MAT<* FLOAT NO.*, 13,* I=*,I2,* VEL=*, F5. 2 , *FPS*)
IF (I .NE. 1) GO TO 390
390 CONTINUE
IF (J .EQ. 0) GO TO 394
A J=J
VEL=3UM1/AJ
IF (AJ .GT. l.U) 392, 4UO
392 SUM2=STODEV(SUM1,SUM2,AJ>
WRITE(20,a) VEL,S'JM2
8 FORM4TI* MEAN VEL*,F5.2,* STD OEV*,F5.2>
IF (41 .LE. 0.1) GO TO <*QO
VEL=OIF/AI
GO TO i» 00
39
420 CONTINUE
C READ FROM 7 VALUES OF EXPOSURE TIME AND FNO
C (NINc VALUES K-17 i,2,3;HB-l 4,5,6? HB-2 7,8,9)
DO 430 J=12,20
SUM1=FFIN(7)
SUM2=FFIN(7)
C(J,1)=SUM1*SUM2*SUM2
430 CONTINUE
C READ FROM 7 COEFFS FOR DETERMINING ATMOS ATTEN FROM
C THE SEA TO THE CAMERA STATION
00 440 1=1,8
DO 440 J=l,2
P(J,I)=FFIN<7)
440 CONTINUE
C READ FROM 7 0 IF ANT I VIGNETT ING FILTER ON K-17 1 IF NOT
B(15,6)=FFIN(7)
C 1ETERMINE SUNLIGHT VECTORS
00 450 1=1,3
J = 3 + I
0 (1, J) =SINF(H (I) )
00248
C0249
0 0250
C0251
00252
00253
00254
00255
00256
C0257
00258
00259
00260
00261
00262
00263
00264
00265
00266
00267
00268
C0269
00270
00271
00272
00273
00274
00275
00276
00277
00278
00279
00280
00281
00282
00283
00284
00285
00286
00287
00288
00289
00290
00291
00292
00293
0 0294
00295
00296
00297
00298
00299
C0300
00301
00302
00303
00"504
00305
00306
00307
00.? 08
00309
Figure C-7. Program listing for REMOTE. (Continued)
251
-------
B(2, J)=COSF(H (I) )
3 (13, J) =-SIN(AZ (I) )
Bdf*, J)=-COSF(flZ(I) )
9(3, J)=l. J/n(l, J)
BU, J)=B(2,J)»B(13,J)
8(5, J)=B(2,J)*B/1.33
3(7, J)»SQRT (1.0-8(8, J)*B (8, J))
3(9,J)=1.0/B(7, J)
3(10, J) = B(8, J>»B(13,J)
BUI, J)-B<8, J! »B(li4,J)
8(12,J)=-3(7,J)
SUM2=ATAN(8(8»J)/B(7,J) )
SUHl=1.5703-HtI)
B(15,I)=REFLECT(SUM1,SUM2)
i*5Q CONTINUE
8(15, <•)=!. 33*1. 33
IF ( HARDWARE ( i'.i ) .ECU 1) i»60,i»55
<*55 CALL EQUIP(21,5HFILE )
i*60 IF MAROHARE(22) .EQ. 1) i*6i*,i»62
i»62 CALL EQUIP(22,5HFILE )
<*(>i* IF ( -IAROHAREC*) .EQ. 1) ^70,1000
k7Q REHINO <•
IF (HAROHAR£(5.) .EQ. 1) GO TO <»80
CALL EQUIP(5,S.HFILE )
GO TO 600
9 FORM4T(F7.1,2Fllf.O,F10. 1)
IF (FIX-0.1) 53G,50a,5U5
505 DO£'N=CONF-CONL
0
XG(1)=X(K,1)»C(13,2)*X(K,2)*C(13,3)
XG(2)=-X(K,1)*C(13,3)+X(K,2)»C(13,2)
LX = Xi (D/60. + 0.5
00310
00311
00312
00313
00311*
00315
00316
00317
00318
00319
00320
00321
00322
00323
00321*
00325
00326
00327
00328
00329
00330
00331
00332
00333
00331*
00335
00336
d0337
00338
00339
003i»0
C03<»1
0031*2
0031*3
003<*i*
0031*5
Q03i*6
0031*7
00348
0031*9
00350
00351
00352
00353
00351*
00355
00356
00357
00358
00359
00360
00361
00362
00363
00361.
00365
00366
00367
00368
00369
00370
00371
Figure C-7. Program listing for REMOTE. (Continued)
252
-------
IFflX .LE. 0 .OR. LX .GT. NXI) GO TO 51*0
LY=«i/60.*0.5
IF C_Y .LE. 0 .OR. LY .GT. NYI) GO TO 5i»0
^ (5,10) LX,LY,X«,3)
10
5<«3
600
602
613
CONTINUE
XL-XC
Yl = YF
CONL=CONF
GO TO 503
JJFL=1
FL=6.3
IF «FLT .GT. 3) FL = 150./25.i»
CALL PROCESS (KFLT.JJFL, ILUN , FL , NXI , NYI)
31) K,KFLT,ILUN
FOR1U(3I10)
ILUN=ILUN+1
KFLT=KFLT+3
GO TO (610,610,610,6^0) , ILUN
IF « .EQ. Q) 6'»2,6<»'»
L=l
GO T3 901
K = 0
00 653 1=1,8
I9D(I)=0
ILUN=I+30
IF (H4ROWARE(ILUN) .NE. 1) GO TO 660
REWIND ILUN
655
11
660
I30«l =
J = l
REflDf ILUN, 11) X(K,J)
FORM4T(Fd.O)
IF (^OF (ILUN) ) GO TO 660
J=J-H
IF (J .LT. 300) 655, 66J
CONTINUE
IF « .LE. 0) GO TO 6<*2
NO=J-1
659 K=KK
32 FORMITI* TYPE IN 1 IF YOU WANT TO USE A PRODUCT, 2 IF NOT*/,
1* TH; FOLLOWING BANDS ARE US ED I * / , 911*)
«GO=TTYINC»HRAT=)
GOT! (661,663) ,KKGO
661 K=K»1
WRITK61.33)
33 F3RM4T(* TTYIN NO. OF THE TWO TERMS 1 3 ETC*)
= TTYIN(1*H1ST=)
DO 6"i2 J=1,NO
X(K,J>=X(KTOP,J)*X(KBOT,J)
662 CONTINUE
0037Z
00373
0037<»
00375
00376
00377
00378
00379
00380
00381
00382
00383
00381*
00385
00386
00387
00388
00389
00390
00391
00392
00393
0039<»
00395
00396
00397
00398
00399
001*00
001*01
00402
001*03
00i*0i*
001*05
001*06
001*07
00408
OQi»09
001*10
OQi*ll
001*12
001*13
00i*li*
00415
00i*16
001*17
00<*18
001.19
001*20
001*21
00422
001*23
00i*2i*
001*25
001*26
001*27
C0<*28
001*29
001*30
Oflt.31
001.32
00433
Figure C-7. Program listing for REMOTE. (Continued)
253
-------
663 W3IT£<61,34) K
3<* FORMATS THERE ARE*, 13,* VARIABLES USED IN THE EQ*/,
1* TTYIN I IF YJU WANT A SQUARED TERM 2 IF NOT*)
KIE,0 = TTYIN(4HS3U=)
GO TO (66*., 6661 ,KIGO
66<* WRIT£(61,3S)
35 FO?H4T(* WHAT TERM IS TO BE SQUARED**)
ISOU=TTYIN(4HSQU=>
K=K*1
Ka=K
00 6o5 J=1,NO
665 X(K, JMXUSQU, J)»X(ISQUtJ)
666 K=K*1
67
GO T J <672,674» ,ITRY
REWIMO 5
00 6S7 J=1,NO
REftO(5,12»X(K, J)
12 FORM4T<8X,F6.2I
667 CONTINUE
00 678 J=1,NO
00 676 1=1, NKN
IF(AiS(X(I, J) ) .LT..001) GO TO 678
676 CONTINUE
DO 677 1=1, N
X (I, <>=X(I, J)
677 CONTINUE
X(9f <)=X(N,J)
678 CONTINUE
N0=<
GO TO 671
67<» 00 675 J=1,NO
X(N,J)=X(9,J)
675 CONTIMUE
671 CALL LEASTFIT(M,NO,BB,RES)
KCO=S-1
WRIT^(61,37) (33(1) ,1=1, KCO)
WRIT^(61,36) RES
36 FORhm<* MEAN 3a/,F10.3,/* IS THIS OK*
1* TTV1N 1 FOR YES 2 FOR NO.*)
IGO = TTYIN(<»HIGO = )
*/,
GO TO (668,659) , I GO
668 CALL ZEROARRY (NXI , NY 1 , 1 , 0,1, 0)
IF(H4ROWARE (2i*l .NE.l) CALL EQUIP <2
-------
LY=0
LOWX-0
00 63<» 1 = 1, KK
ILUN=IBD(I)-20
REAO( ILUN, 13)
FORM4T(X,20F6.0>
IF {£OF X (KK+1, J)=X(KTOP,J)*X(KBOT,J)
IF«IGO.ECI.l) X(K2,J)=X(ISQU,J)»X(ISQU, J)
CONTINUE
LY=LY»1
IF .LE. 0.001)
SUM1 = SU'H+BB(I)*X(I,J)
CONTINUE
LX=LOHX+J
IF (SDMI .L.T. 0. .OR. SDMI .GT.
IP-IOT (LX.LY) =SUM1*10.
CONTINUE
GO T3 683
00 7J2 J=l,3
X(3,J)=0.a
CONTINUE
GO TO 692
30.) SUM1=0.
68?
13
684
686
688
690
692
700
702
CALL INTERP(NXI,NYI,NXS,NY3,KNO,KDN)
COLL CULL (NXI, NYI)
C4LL AVERAGE(NXS^YS)
W^ITE SYMBOLIC PLOT
04 REWIND 8
REflO{Q8,l'») MO.IOflTE
1<» FORM1T (11,12)
WRIT-: (20,15) ROT,JJFL,MO,IDATE
15 FORMAT (1H1,///1»2X, ^AIRPHOTO ANALYSIS OF OCEAN OUTFALL t
l,#DIS(lERSION*///,f»5X,#VOLUMETRIC HASTE CONCENTRATION*
2,* H ML/LITER*//, 55X,//,<»5X,
23 - 25*,1<«X,**»» GT 25 */ ,<»5X, *HHM*, 2<»X, *••*#////)
WRIT£(20,17) C(12,2) ,C(12,3)
17 FORM4T<&aX,*+ X=*,F8.0,*E, Y=* ,F7. 0 ,
00496
00497
00<»98
001*99
00500
00501
00502
00503
00504
00505
00506
00507
00508
00509
00510
00511
00512
00513
0051'*
00515
00516
00517
00518
00519
00520
00521
00522
00523
0052
-------
= IPHOT(LX,L.Y)
IF (4XZ-1.0) 710,710,705
705 XL=AXZ/2.*1.
IDO=XL
GOTO (720,730,7<»0,760) ,100
710 X(1,LYI=3H
X(2,LY)=8H
GO TO 790
720 X(1,LY)=8H)
X(2,LY)=3H )
X(3,1)=X(3,1)«1.
GO TO 790
730 X(1,LY)=8H1 1
X<3,>>=X(3,2>*1.
GO TO 79J
71,0 X(1,LY)=8HIII
X(3,J)= X<3,3)<
GO TO 790
750 X(1,LY)=3HLLL
X (3,<*)=X<3,<*)+!.
GO TO 790
760 IF CVXZ-13.) 750,750,770
770 XL=AXZ/5.-l.
IOO=Xl
GO TO (775,780,785,788),100
775 X(l,cY)=8HPPP
X (2,LY)=8HPPP
GO TO 790
780 X(1,LY)=8HRRR
X (,?,LY) =8HRRR
X(3,i)=:X(3,6)+l.
GO TO 790
785 X(t,l_Y) -3HMMM
X(2,LY)=8HMMM
X(3,7)=X(3,7)+1.
GO TO 790
788 XU.I.Y) =8H*»*
X(3,3)=X(3,8)+1.
790 CONTINUE
IF(K30.NE.<») GO TO 795
WRITE (61, <«2> (X(1,J),J = 1,NYI,3)
795 WRITE (2U,18) (X(1,J),J=IKS,IEKS)
WRTT'T (20,18) (X(2,J) ,J=IKS, IEKS)
18 FORMAT (1MW,50A3)
600 CONTINUE
HRIT£ (61,1*3)
t ARE THE COEFFICIENTS OK* TTYIN 1-YES, 2-NO*)
GO TO (802,670),KCO
802 IF(H4l
39
TTYIN 1 IF WANT OATA FOR CONTOUR PLOT Z NO*)
= TTYINUHPLOT)
00558
00559
00560
00561
00562
00563
0056<»
00565
00566
00567
00568
00569
00570
00571
00572
00573
00571*
00575
00576
00577
00578
00579
00580
00581
00582
00583
00581,
00585
00586
00587
00588
00589
00590
00591
00592
00593
00594
00595
00596
00597
00598
00599
00600
00601
00602
00603
00601,
00605
00606
00607
00608
00609
00610
00611
00612
00613
0061<»
00615
00616
00617
00618
00619
Figure C-7. Program listing for REMOTE. (Continued)
256
-------
GO T0(701,704),JGO
701 00 733 1=1,NXI
K=NXI-I»1
WRITE (23,28)(J,K,IPHOT(I,J),J=1,NYI)
28 FORMAT(24(15I4/))
703 CONTINUE
END FILE 23
C COMPJTE DIFFUSION COEFFICIENTS
SUM2=0.0
00 S10 J=l,8
X(3,J)=X(3,J)»3600.
810 CONTINUE
AMASS=RATE*60./VEL
GO TO (812,820,820) ,JJFL
812 00 81*. 1 = 1., 6
00 814 J=61,90
CAMO( J,I)=0.0
811. CONTINUE
820 HRITE(20,19) JJFL ,MO , IOATE
19 FORM4T(1H1,44X,*PRELIMINARY DIFFUSION COMPUTATIONS*/
1,47X,*FLIGHT*,I3, 12X,I2,*/*,I2,#/69*/,19X,
2* SEC. WIDTH EFF DEPTH SIGMA Y COEFFICIENT
3#X*,3X,*Y OIFF. COtFF.*/,22X,*NO. FT*,7X,
4*FT*,20X,*PPT*,7X, ESTATE PLANE COORD FT SQ/SEC*/)
L=l
LOST=2.+(TIMFLT ( J JFL ) -TIMFLT (1))*VEL+0.5
DO 930 I=LOST,NXS,5
JST=1
LNY=3
DIV=3.0
SUH1=U.O
DIF=3.0
00 810 J=JST,NYI
AJ=J*60
ACO=IPHOT(I,J) *IPriOT ( 1-1, J)*I PHOT ( 1-3, J)»IPMOT(J*lfJ)*
1 IPH3T(I+2,J)
ACD=4CD/50.
IF(A30.LT.1.)GO TO 880
SUM1=SUM1+ACD*AJ
DIF=OIF+ACO
DIV=OIV+ACO*AJ*flJ
IF(I?HOT (I, J) .ST. 9) LNY=LNY*1
880 CONTINUE
IFCOIF.LT.l.) 881, 382
881 X(10,L) =0.0
X (5,L) = 0. 0
GO T3 895
882 XHEAN=SUM1/OIF
X(10tL)=OI\//DIF-XMEAN*XMEAN
X(<»,L)=LNY*60
X(5,U)=AHASS/(OIF*3.6)
X (6,L)=SQRT(X(10,L) )
X(7,L)=OIF»60./(2.51*X(6,L))
RGX=I»60
00620
00621
00622
00623
00621.
0062?
00626
00637
00638
00639
00630
00631
00633
00633
0063".
00635
00636
00637
00636
00639
XG(1) =»RGX»C(13,2)-RGY*C(13,3)
XG(2) =»RGX»C(13,3) *RGY»C(13,2)
X (8,L)=XG(1)*C(12,2)
X (9,L> = XG(2) *C(12,3)
IF(L .EQ. 1) 885,890
00641
006<»2
00643
0061*1*
00645
00646
00647
00648
00649
00650
00651
00652
00653
00654
00655
00656
00657
00658
00659
00660
00661
00663
00663
00664
00665
00666
00667
00668
00669
00670
00671
00672
00673
00674
00675
00676
00677
00678
00679
00680
00681
Figure C-7. Program listing for REMOTE. (Continued)
257
-------
885 OJ=O.D
GO TO 895
890 OJ=veL».GT.O. ,ANO.X(5,L) . LT. 20 . ) 896, 897
896 HRITE(20,20> I, (X
23 FORMAT(65X,*0 - 2* , 8X ,£11. 2/ ,65X ,*2 - If* ,8X, Ell. 2/,
1 65X,*i» - 6*,8X,E11.2/,65X,*6 -1 0* , 8X ,E11.2/ ,
2 65X, *10-15*,8X,E11.2/,65X,*15-20*,8X,E11.2/,
3 65X,*20-25*,8X,E11.2/,65X,*GT 25* , 8X, E11.2)
901 JJFL=JJFL+1
KFLT=JJFL
DO 910 1=11,18
IF MAROWARECI)
CALL UNEQUIP(I)
NE.l) GO TO 905
905
IF MARDWARE(K).NE.l) GO TO 910
CALL UNEtJUIP(K)
910 CONTINUE
H(JJFL-1)=L-1
GO T0(602,602,602,920),JJFL
920 WRIT£(20,24>
24 FORMAT(1H1,///20X,*N ONSTEAOY STAT E*,
1* DIFFUSION COEFFICIENT S*//)
1=1
KK=6
K=2
N0=l
IF (L .LT. H(2» L = H(2)
IF (L .LT. H(3)) L=H(3)
926 OTIM=(TIMFLT(K)-TIMFLT(I))*120.
OIV=0.
SUM1=0.
00 930 J=1,L
JK=J+60
KJ=K*3
IF(C4HO(JK,KJ) .LT.l. .AND. CAMO{JK,KI) .LT.l.)
1 GO TO 928
X(NO, J) = )/OTIM
SUM1=SUM1+X(NO, J)
XCNO*3,J)=1.0
GO TO 930
00682
00683
00681*
00689
00686
00687
00688
00669
00690
00691
00692
00693
0069<»
00695
00696
00697
00698
00699
00700
00701
00702
00703
0070<4
00705
00706
00707
00708
00709
00710
00711
00712
00713
00714
00715
00716
00717
00718
00719
00720
00721
00722
00723
00721.
00725
00726
00727
00728
00729
00730
00731
00732
00733
00734
00735
00736
00737
00738
00739
0071*0
00741
00742
00743
Figure C-7. Program listing for REMOTE. (Continued)
258
-------
928 X(NO ,J)=0.
930 CONTINUE 007«»5
X(NO*<»,1> =SUM1/DIV 007«»6
GO TO <932,93<»,9<*0) ,NO 007*7
932 NO=NO*1 007l»8
K=3 007i»9
1=1 00750
GO TO 926 00751
93<» K=3 00752
1=3 00753
NO=NO»1 0075<»
GO TO 926 00755
9<»a M«ITE(20,25) (TIMFLT(I) ,1 = 1,3) ,MO,IDATE 00756
ZS FORM»T(20X, 00760
00 950 I*1,L 00761
K=2*5»(I-1) 00762
MRITE(20t26> K,(X 00767
1000 STOP 00768
END 00769
Figure C-7. Program listing for REMOTE. (Continued)
259
-------
89
95
100
101
150
200
?1 !
DEFINE DECLAR
COMMON X<10 .300). IPHJTI 120.80) .CAMOI90.6) »C< 20,3 1
COMMON B(15.6)»P(2.8).ANGHBI4).VOLLI2,8)
END
DEFINE GRDCOORD
XG(1 )=CA.MO( I PLAT E.I )-CAMG< IPLATE»?)*XT(1)/XT(3)
XG(2)=CAMO(IPLATE.2 1-CAMOI IPLATE.')*XT(2I/XT(3)
END
SUBROUTINE PROCESSK.FLT,JFLT.ILUN.FL . NX I ,NYI )
DIMENSION IVT!6).3B:9),XTi?).XG(2)
INCLUDE O^'CLAR
INTEGER HARDWARE
REWIND 21
ISEY1=TTYIN(4HSEY1)
ISEY2=TTYIN(4HSEY2)
ISEAX=TTYIN(4HSEAX)
IDHX=TTYIN(4HDHOX)
IPLATE=(KFLT-11*10+1
= TTYIN(4H->NL=)
=TTYINI4HOMH=)
IEND=1
1 NK = 0
READ(ILUN, 1) IMO.IDATE,IFLT.IPH,IPLT2,IBD1,IBD2»
1 XPH.YPH.DCOOR
FORMAT!7I5.2F5.0.F5.3)
IFIEOF! ILUN) ) GO TO 1000
IFIKFLT.NE.IFLT ) GO TO 1000
IF! IPLATE-IPLT2 ) 100,200,150
BACKSPACE ILUN
!FND=3
GO TO 400
IENO=2
BACKSPACE ILUN
GO TO 400
CALL ORIMAT! IPLATE )
IBAND= I6D1
SUMl=CAiViO( IP LATE.3 1/3260.
ATN1=P(1,IBD1)+ALUG
-------
YP = X (9 , ! )
CALL TRNCOORDI XP.YP.FL.XT )
INCLUDE GRDCOORO
RGX=XG< i i-cc 12.2 i
RGY=XG(2 )-C( 12.3 )
XG(I)=RGX*C(13,2 I+RGY*C( 13 »3 I
XG(2)=-RGX*C(13»3)+RGY*C<13,2)
LX=XG( 1 ) /60.+0.5
IFILX .LE. 0 .OR. LX .GT. NXI) GO TO 300
LY=(XG(2)+C( 14,2) 1/60.+0.5
IF ILY .LE. 0 .OR. LY .GT. NY I ) GO TO 300
CAM = ATANF < SORT (XP*XP+YP*YP)/FL)
C ANGLE BETWEEN RAY IN AIR AND VERTICAL
DIV=SQRT(XT( 1 ) *XT ( 1 )+XT(2)*XT(2) )
CAN=ATAN(-OIV/XT(3) )
r_ ANGLE BETWEEN RAY AND VERTICAL UNDERWATE-
SINC=0.75*SINF(CAN>
COSC=5QRT(1.0-SINC*SINC)
C RAY V-CTOR UNDERWATER
FT=-DI V*COSC/SINC
75
260
3
290
300
400
410
50
580
1 1/1.34
IF ISINC.GT. 1 . ) SINC = 1.
FT=SQRT(1.0-SINC*SINC)
TAB=ATAN ( - T/S INC )
CAN=1.0/COS( CAN)
FT=X(10»I)/C(IBD1+3,1)+ATN2+ATN1*CAN
DtNS=EXP ( FT ) #1 HOO.
IF ( I .FO.ISEAX.AND.IPH.EQ. IPHX) GO TO 250
GO TC (260,751) ,KGO
IP (INK.LT.30P) INK = INK+1
X ( 1 » I N K ) = 1 . 0
X ( 2, INK) =CA\1
X ( 3, I NK ) =TAB
X < 4» I NK ) =CAN
X ( 5, I NK) =DENS
«RJTE(21.3)LX,LY,CAM, TAB.CANtDENS
FORXAT 1 2 1 5,5tu . 3 1
K=K+1
CONTINUE
i PLATE = IPLATE + I
GO TO 95
IF(INK.EO.O) GO TO 1100
N0= INK
N = 5
CALL LEASTFI T ( N.NO.BBtRES )
END FILE 21
REWIND 21
READ(21,3) LX.LY.CAMiTAfl. CAN. DEWS
IF ( EOF (211) GO TO 500
IPHCT(LX,LY)=DtMS-(BS(l)+BB(2 )*CAM+B8( 3)*TAB+6b(4)
1 *CAN)
GO TO 410
KND=4
KDN = 4
NXS=NX 1-2
NYS = NY 1-2
CALL INTERPINXI , NYI .NXS»NYS.
-------
595
9
10
598
?n"
1C33
1100
I MA x = C
00 583 J=1,NYI
IF(ABS(IPnOT(!,J
CON TIN1 IE
WRITE!61,10) I^AX
CONTINUt
OG 590 1=1,NXI,20
DO 590 J=1,NYI
KK=I+19
/.'RITE! LUN0.8 I ( I PHOT ( K , J ) , K. = I
FORMAT(X,20I6)
CONTINUE
END FILE LUNO
GT.ABS ( I MAX ) ) I MAX= I PHOT ( I . J )
IF ( HARDWARE ( Lj^lO) .E3. 1) GO T 0 592
CALL ECw'JIP ( L JM0.5HF ILE )
RE A'! NO LLNO
REWINO 5
RcAu(5,9) LX.LY
FORi'AT(2U)
I F ( EOF( 5)1 GO TO 598
v»KI TE( L'JN'_.,10> IPhOT (LX.LY )
FOR'-'AT ( lb )
GO TO 595
E'JO FILL LUNO
TO (90"!, 900,1 ICO), IEND
L Z^ROARRY ( NX I ,NYI ,] ,0,1 ,0 )
v'INO 21
TO 8°
-------
DEF I ME L3ECLAR
COMMON X(10»300),IPHOT(12n,80),CAMO(90,6)»C(20,3)
COMMON B(15,6)»P(2.8)»ANGHB(4I»VOLL(2.8)
END
DEFINE GRDCOORD
XG(1)=CAMO(IPLATE»1I-CAMOIIPLATE»3)»XT<1)/XT<3)
XG(2)=CAMO(IPLATE.21-CAMOIIPLATE,3)*XT<2)/XT(3)
END
SUBROUTINE RFSECT(FLtDELOMGiDcLPnl)
DI'-'ENSION 0(6.7)
INCLUDE OECLAR
IEND-1
REWIND 8
5 IGO=0
1 = 1
f READ PHOTO CONTROL COORDINATES
10 READ (08.1) I-L,TPH. ( IPHOTI100,J),X(10.U) ,X(9,U) ,U = 1 ,3 )
1 FORMAT<3X,2I1>3(I4,2F6.3,7XI)
IF (EOF(8)) 15.20
15 IEND=2
GO TO 40
20 IPLT =(IFL-1)*10 +IPH
IF (1-1) 21,21.23
21 IPLATE=IPLT
23 IF(IPLT-IPLATE) 24,25.24
24 BACKSPACE 8
GO TO 40
25 DO 38 U=l,3
IF( IPHOT I 100 ,j ) . E(J. 0 .AND. X(10,J).GT. 0.) GO TO 26
IF( IPHOT(100>U),GT. 0 .AND.IPHOT(100,U),LE.191GO TO 26
IF1 IPHOT(100,U).LE.33 .AND.I PHOT(100»J).GT.29)GO TO 30
GO TC 38
26 XP=X(10.U)
YP=X(9,J)
GO TO 38
28 B( I ,1 > = IPHOT(100.U)
8(I,2)=X(9.J)
e< I,3 > =X<10.J)
1 = 1 + 1
GO TO 38
30 K=IPHOT(100.U1-29
XI1 ,K)=X( 10,J)
X (2 .K) =X(9.U)
38 CONTINUE
GO TO 10
40 IMAGEM-1
IF (IMAGE-3) 1002.50,50
50 IF (IPLATE-30) 55.55,52
52 XP=(X(l,l)+X(l,2)+X(l,3)+X(l,4).)/4.
YP=(X(2»l)+X<2»;>)+X(2«3)+X(2»4))/4.
55 DO 57 I = 1,I*!AGH
611,2) =YP-B( 1,2)
B( I .3 ) =XP-3( 1,3)
57 CONTINUE
C READ GROUND CONTROL
DO 100 I=1,IM*GE
REWIND 9
K=B(1,1)
60 U=FFIN(9)
IF(EOF!9)) GO TO 1004
IF (K-J) 70,80,70
70 DO 75 J=1.3
TRASH=FFIN(9)
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
0001 1
00012
00013
00014
00015
00016
00017
00018
00019
00020
00021
00022
00023
00024
00025
00026
00027
000^9
00030
00031
00032
00033
00034
00035
00036
00037
00038
00039
00040
00041
00042
00043
00044
00045
00046
00047
00048
00049
00050
00051
00052
00053
00054
00055
00056
00057
00058
00059
00060
00061
00062
00063
Figure C-8. Subroutines used with program REMOTE. (Continued)
263
-------
75 CONTINUE
GO TO 60
80 DO 90 J = 4,6
B( I»J)= FFINI 9)
90 CONTINUE
100 CONTINUE
C READ INITIAL RARAMETERS FOR CAMERA PHOTO NO.. X.Y.Z IN FT
C AND OMEGA, PHI , KAPPA IN DEGREES
REWIND 10
<=(IPLATE-1)/30+1
GO TO ( 102 ,104,106),K
]0? IPLT2=IPLATE
DEL1=0.
DEL2=0.
GO TO 108
104 IPLT2=IPLATE-30
DEL1=DELOMG
DE12=DEIPHI
GO TO 108
106 IPLT2=IPLATE-60
DEL1=DELOMG
DE12=DELPHI
108 IPLT=FFIN(10)
IF (EOF(IO)) GO TO 1006
IF (IPLT-IPLT2) 110.120,110
110 DO 115 1=1,6
TRASH=FFIN(10)
115 CONTINUE
GO TO 108
120 DO 125 J=l,3
C<1,J)=FFIN(10)
125 CONTINUE
C(2,l)=FFIN(10)/57.2953+DELl
C(2,2)=FFIN(10)/57.2958+DEL2
C(2,3)=FFIN(10 ) '57.2958
DO 130 1=1,3
C13,I)=COSF(C(2,I ) )
C(2,I )=SINF(C(2 , I ) )
130 CONTINUE
C ORIENTATION FACTORS IN C ARRAY
610 C ( 4,1 ) =C(3,2)*C(3 ,3 >
C(5,1)=-C<3>2)*C(2 .3)
C(6,1)=C(2 .2 )
C(10,1)=-C(2.2)*C(3.3)
C(ll,1)=C(2,2)*Cf2.3)
C(12 ,1 )=C(3,2 )
C(1C,2 )=C(4,1)*C( 2,1 1
C <11,2)=C< 5.1)*C(2.1 )
C(12.2)=C(2.1)*C(2»2 1
C(10,3)=-C(4,l )*C(3.1)
C(11,3)= -C(5,1)*C(3,1 )
C(1?,3)=-C(3.1)*C(2»2)
C(4,2)=C(3.1)*C(2»3)+C(12»2)*C(3,3)
C(5,2)=C(3,1)*C(3.3)-C(12»2)*CI2.3)
C(6,2)=-C(2,1)*C(3.2)
C(4,3)=C(2,1)*C(2,3)+C(10,1)*C(3,1)
C(5,3)=C(2,1)*C(3,3)+C(11,1)*C13,1)
C(6,3)=C(3,1)*C(3,2 1
DO 612 1=7,9
C(I,1)=0.
C(I ,2)=-C( 1-3,3)
C( I,3)=C( 1-3 ,2 )
C(13,I-6)=C(5, 1-6 )
00064
000&5
00066
00067
00068
00069
00070
00071
00072
00073
00074
00075
00076
00077
00078
00079
00080
00081
00082
00083
00084
00085
00086
00087
00088
00089
00090
00091
00092
00093
00094
00095
00096
00097
00098
00099
00100
00101
00102
00103
001U4
00105
00106
00107
00108
00109
00110
00111
00112
00113
00114
00115
00116
00117
00118
00119
00120
00121
00122
00123
00124
00125
00126
Figure C-8. Subroutines used with program REMOTE. (Continued)
264
-------
C( 14, I -6) =-C (4,1-6)
612 C( 15 .1 -6 ) =0.
GO TO (613.763 )» IGO
CLEAR NORMAL EQUATION D ARRAY TO ZERO
613 DO 614 1=1 ,6
00 614 J=I ,7
614 D( I . J ) =0.
COMPUTE P TERMS FOR RESECTION PASS POINTS
PO 618 NU=1 • IMAGE
DO 619 K=l ,3
619 C ( 16.K. ) =B( NU »K + 3 ) -C ( 1 »K)
K>4
^0 620 L-17,20
DO 620 1=1,3
C(L,I)=C = <-B(NU, J + l )*C(6»L-4)+<-FL ) *f ( 1 + 3 . L-4 ) ) *C ( 1 . 3 ) /C ( 1 7 » 3 )
P( I ,8 ) =-P( I.I)
CONTRIBUTION TO NORMAL EQUATIONS
DO 618 1=1,6
DO 618 J=I ,7
DO 618 K = l ,2
D(I,J)=D(I,J)+P(K,I+1)*P(K»J+1)
FOREWARD SOLUTION
DO 699 1=1 ,6
SQR = SQRT (D( I , I ) )
DO 698 J=I ,7
D ( I . J ) =D ( I , J ) /SOR
IF (1-6 )6Q7,696,696
IP1=I+1
DO 699 L= I PI ,6
DO 699 J=L>7
D(L, J ) =D(L, J)-D( I ,L )*D( I , J)
BACK SOLUTION
D(6 ,7 ) =0( 6,7 ) /0( 6 .6 )
DO 691 1=1,5
NMI =6- I
PARAMETERS I .N C ARRAY
DO 690 J = NMI PI .6
690 D(NMI,7)=D(NMI»7)-D(J»7)*D(NMI»J)
691 D(NMI,7)=D(NMI,7)/D(NMI,NMI)
DO 625 1=4,6
625 D( I ,7 ) =D( I ,7 )*C( 1 ,3 )
ADD LE-AST SQUARES RESULTS TO CAMERA
DO 626 J = i ,3
C ( 1 , J ) =C ( 1 SJ }+D( J+3,7)
C ( 4, J ) =D ( J ,7 )
C( 5, J) =SQST( 1 .-C ( 4, J)*C( 4. J) )
C(6,J)=C(2,J)-k-C(5,J)+C(3,J)*C(4,J)
C(7,J)=C(3,J)*C(5,J)-C(2,J)*C(4»J)
C!2,J)=C(6,J)
626 C ( 3, J ) =C( 7,J)
TEST MAGNITUDE OF CORRECTIONS FOR ORIENTATION PARAMTERES
DO 628 1=1,3
IF ( ABSIDI I .7) )-. 00001 1628 ,628, 610
628 CONTINUE
IGO = 2
GO TO 610
CAMERA PARAMETERS OUTPUT
00127
00128
00129
00130
00131
00132
00133
00134
00135
00136
00137
00138
00139
00140
00141
00142
00143
00144
00145
00146
00147
00148
00149
00150
00151
00152
00153
00154
00155
00156
00157
00158
00159
00160
00161
00162
00163
00164
00165
00166
00167
00168
00169
00170
00171
00172
00173
00174
00175
00176
00177
00178
00179
00180
00181
00182
00183
00184
00185
00186
00187
00188
00189
Figure C-8. Subroutines used with program REMOTE. (Continued)
265
-------
[PLATE,( C( 1 »J) »J = l,3 >
IPLATE.(C(2.J)tJ=l.3)
IPLATE. (C(3,J> »J = 1 .3)
IPLATE
< (C( I , J) ,J=l .3).I=4.6)
XO
763 WRITE(20,532)
WRITE!20,527)
WRITE (20,528)
WRITE (20,529)
WRITE (20,528)
WRITE (20,528)
WRITE (20,530)
WRITE (20.533)
527 FORMATI/49H PLATE
528 FORMAT (17,3(2x,Ei<*.7i i
529 FORMAT1/bOH PLATE OMEoA Pril
530 FORMATI/30H ORIENTATION IATRIX ^ J3 PLATE ,17)
532 FORMATI/5CH OKIPNTATION P AK A."'E T i ^ COKKECTION L T-1 I T 1
533 FORMAT ( 1 X , 3! >X,F14.7) I
DO 710 1 = ] J3
CAXO!IPLATE,I ) =C ( 1 »I )
TAN=ATANF(C!2,I)/C(3,I))
IF (C(3 . I ) ) 702,704.70^
702 TAN = 3.1415 ? + T A N
704 CAXO( I PLATE, 1 + 3 I=TAN
710 CONTINUE ,
GO TO (5 ,1100 ) ,I END
1C02 rtRITE(20,1003) IPLATE
1003 FORMAT!" INEFFICIENT CONTROL , DL T ' , I 6 )
GO TO (5,1 100 I ,I END
1004 WRITE (20,1005) <
1005 FORMAT!' GRD CONTROL MISSING',16)
GO TO < 5,1 100 > »IFN3
I'106 WRITE (20,1007) IPLATE
10C7 FORMAT!' INITIAL PARAMETERS NOT ON FILF' ,I 51
GO TO!5,11OC),IFM)
HOC RETURN
END
Figure C-8. Subroutines used with program REMOTE. (Continued)
266
-------
SUBROUTINE SUNLITE(TIMFLT,H,AZ)
DIMENSION HI •*) ,AZ C* ) .TIMFLT (3)
C COMPUTE THF ALTITUDE AND AZIMUTH OF THE SUN
r TIMF IS PACIFIC DAYLIGHT TIMF
c READ IN DECLINATION OF SUN i\ DEGREES
-------
SUBROUTINE TRNCOCROIXP.YP.FL.XT )
DIMENSION XT(3)
INCLUDE DECLAR
DO 10 K=l,3
10 CONTINUE
XDIS=SQRT(XT(1)*XT(1)+XT(?)»XT(2)+XTCM*XT<3))
DO 20 K=l .3
XT ( K ) = XT ( K) /XD1 S
20 CONTINUE
RETURN
END
SUBROUTINE ZFROARRYINXI ,NY I ,,MXX .NYX i IFRA.KOR)
INCLUDE DFCLAR
DO 100 1=1 ,NXI
DO 100 J=1»NYI
I PHOT! I ,J)=0
ioc CONTINUE
DO 200 1 = 1 .NXX
DO 200 J = l ,NYX
X( I , J) =0.0
200 CONTINUE
DO 300 1=1 tlF^A
DO 300 J=1,KCH
CAMOI I ,J ) =0.0
^CC CONTINUE
RETURN
END
SUBROUTINE OR I MAT ( I PLATE )
I^CLUOF DtCLAR
DIMENSION AC ( 3 ,3 ) ,RC( 3 »3 )
IF (IPLATE.GT. 30 .AND . I PL ATE .LE .60 ) GO TO 100
IF (IPLATE.GT. 60 . AND . I PL AT E . L E . 90 ) GO TO 200
IGO=1
K=IPLATF.
GO TO 30C
100 IGO = 2
K=IPLATE-30
GO TO 300
200 IGO=3
K=IPLATE-60
TOO SINW=SINF ( CAMO 1 K , 4 ))
COSW=COSF(CAMO(K,4) )
SINP = S INF ( CAMO (,< , 5 ) )
COSP=COSF( CAMO(K,5 ) )
SINK = SINF (CAMO(K,6> )
COS:< = COSF ( CAMO ( K ->b ) )
c ( i » i ) =COSP*CO,;K
C ( 1 ,2 ) =COSW*SIN< + SIN/i*SINP»COSK
C(1.3)=SINW*SINK-COSvV*SINP*COSK
C(2 »1 ) =-f05P*SINK
C(2 >2 ) =COSW*COSK-SINW*SINP*SIN<
C(2 .3) =SINW*COSK + COSW*SINP*SINK
C( 3.1 ) =SINP
C( 3 .2 ) =-SINW*COSP
C(3»3) =COSW*C05P
GO TO ( 1000.^00,500t60'1) , I GO
400 CAMO(90.4)=ANGHB( 1 )
CAMO(90»5) =ANGHB(2)
CAMOI90. 61=0.1
410 DO 420 1=1.3
DO 420 J=l .3
AC( I , J )=C( I , J)
cocc°
00010
0001 1
00012
0001?
00014
0001 5
00016
00017
oooia
00019
00020
00021
00022
00023
00024
00025
00026
00027
00028
00029
00030
00031
00032
00033
00034
00035
00036
00037
00038
00039
00040
00041
00042
00043
00044
00045
00046
00047
00048
00049
00050
00051
00052
00053
00054
00055
00056
00057
00058
00059
00060
00061
00062
00063
00064
00065
00066
00067
00068
00069
00070
00071
Figure C-8. Subroutines used with program REMOTE. (Continued)
268
-------
42
CCNT ! N'jE
< = ° 0
I GO = 4
GO TO 300
CA' =A\GHS ( 3 1
CAMC ( 90 « 5 ) = A"JGn:3 ! 4 )
CAMO(90»6)=0.0
30 TC 4lC
00 620 1 = 1,3
'30 620 J = l ,3
3C ( I f J ) =CI I i J)
CONTINUE
00 700 1=1,3
DO 730 J=l ,3
r ( I , J ) = 0 .
DO 700 <=1 ,3
CU,U)=C(I,J)+AC(K,J]*<3C( I.K)
CONT INUE
RETURN
END
-U\CT I ON 01 ST ( XP , YP )
DI 5T =SQRT (XP*XP+YP*YP)
RETURN
END
FUNCTION ST''DEVt SU^il . SUX2»AJ)
(,StJM?-'iUMl*SUMl/AJ)/(AJ-l.)
FUNCTION RF.FLFCTI AI . AR >
A=A i -AR
B=AI+AR
C=SINF ( A )
0=SI NF ( b )
•:=C/COSr (A)
F=0/COSF(R)
538
540
51
DO 540 1=1, NYI
DO 540 J=1,NXS
IF (IPHOT(U.D) 530.540,530
IF t I PHUT ( J+l , I ) ) 540,532,540
DC 534 *, =
IF (K.J-MXI) 533»533»540
IF ( IPHOT ( KU , I ) ) 536,534,536
CONTINUE
GO TO 540
LU=KU-U-1
DJ=KU-U
D1F = IPHGT(U, I ) -IPHOT «J, I )
DO 538 K=l ,LJ
AU = K
LLJ=U+K
IPHOT I LLJ, I ) = I PHOT ) 510,520,510
\f ( IPHOT I I , J+l ] ) 520,512,520
00072
00073
00074
00075
00076
00077
000 Iti
000 ^9
OC080
00081
00082
00033
00084
00085
000 8 6
00087
00088
00089
00090
00091
00092
00093
00094
00095
00096
00097
00098
00099
00100
00101
00102
00103
00104
00105
00106
00107
00108
00109
00110
00111
00112
001 13
001 14
00115
00116
001 17
OOliS
00119
00120
00121
00122
00123
00124
00125
00126
00127
00128
00129
00130
00131
00132
00133
00134
Figure C-8. Subroutines used with program REMOTE. (Continued)
269
-------
*:? DO -14 K = 7 , K 3 N
: t> • 5 .4 , 5 1 b
514 CONTINUE
GO TO 520
M6 LJ = +
i i PHOT 11 + 1 ,j+ii + IPHOTI1 + 1,j-iii/5
560 CONTINUE
ITEST=2
DO 565 J=2,NYS
IPHOTI I tJ)=X(1,J)
X(1 , J) =X(2 .J)
565 CONTINUE
570 CONTIMUF:
RETURN
FNO
SUBROUTINf: CULLtNXI ,.NYI )
INCLUDE DFCLAR
BJ = 9.
IX=NXI-2
I Y = N Y I - 2
DO 100 1=1,IX
DO 100 J = l»I V
SUM1=0.0
5UN'2=C.O
DO 20 IK = 1 , 3
DO 20 JK = 1 »3
JP=J+JK-1
A I = 1 PHOT( I P.JP)
SUM1=SUMH-AI
SUM?=SUM2+AI*AI
20 CONTINUE
SUM2=STDDEV(SUM1 ,5UM2 >BJ)
A I=SUM1/BJ
BI=IPHOT(1+1
-------
c c
c o
c c
cc
ir rv
-3 p*-
\r-\i
cc
S?
— rv
p*- -?
•» r-«
crv
oc
oc
oo
CO
CO
r*^
rv-*
mrv
>t —
oo
o c
c c
c c
c c
•* -C
*J p*-
X r-
c c
«— t O
f ft
a a.
c c
M in
C^ f")
o o
c c
o o
c o
o o
rv <*
oc .*
oc c
rv •»
0 O
c c
0 C
c c
c c
rvm
cc —
cr .*
c c.
c r
•f. -a
r r
c rv
oo
c c
0 O
o c
0 C
4 O
rv CT
•* »f
•* —
o o
*-*~* o o IP m
•f. IT.
rv c
crv •& m cc *o
oc
O 0
0 C
c
c
c
0
c
ry
(V
o
^
a
c
o
c
o
o
o
r*
c
^*
fr-
o
o
cv.
m
c
c
c
c
c
rv
OC1
r
0
i'
^
^
c
o
c
o
c
c
rv
—
m
^
c
IP
o
J1
o
c c
c c
c c
c c
— cc
o rv
T >fipmcc-^
»->-tf»£^»— r*~— •3rrrrmp^
ooooocoooooc
OKCT--* — CCTipi^rvrviCT
ccrvf-— p'-if.^cc^—^CT
c rvj om o c •— P^ <£> P >*> ^
occoocccoooc
c
c
c
c
c
^
c
*
rv
c
c c
o o
c o
c c
IT —
*C IP
m -±
f^ m
o o
— ^
»c f^
c
c
c
c
CC
^
£-
j
r
c
e
o
o
c
^
c
fh.
rv
o
„
c
c
c
c
o
-
c
c
rv
r
c
c c
0 0
0 0
c o
If P--
cc m
•^ •$
rv ex
0 0
— i rvi
m c
c c
c c
c c
0 C
* c m rv
rv rv rv
o o o
CT K ry
* c *
so— j3-*^>/)-orv>oipvo
O 0
—.— — mmm
ooooooooooco
m rv
o o
o
rv
m
O
C 0
c m
m m
o o
ceo
C mi —
O O 0
coo
rv c m
m m m
o o o
oo o o o o
tnir IT IP IT IT
•»•».»•»•*•»
ii ill i
cc c c o c
oo o o o o
oo o o o o
cc o o c c
m,» -» run m
oo o o o o
oo o o o o
ceo in cc o o
inir m IP •» rv
f~r- i-- r- f-
mm m
cc o o c c
oo o o o o
c ir »n IT
(\j ^ fxj
>t
oooo> — rvjoaor>'H'-<'*c\)^irv)-*i~<'*r\jr-tf\i-* •-<-* r\i
o— mm c — i m m o c>c orvmccc comcmcmcr-cm cr- cmcm
op ooooooooooooocoooooooooooooooooo
.
0,0 cccccccccocccccccccccccccccccccc
ccco ocacccccccccoccooccoocacccccocccccocaDccccccccccccccccccccccoccc
o
m rv IT
^ -* h-
O O •
>c -*
t^ui
IT m
r> r-
m m
c c
"<-*
m iri
CT- CT
•c *
c o
IP o- —
cr m r--
-c p^ f-
m m m
— CT *
IP -* O
a a -c
rv M m
f r^ r-
c o c
ft
ct)
ON
I
Q)
M
3
bO
•- -* CT C —
rv— crv
OOCr-COII
-------
APPENDIX D
PROCESSING OF 1970-71 PHOTOGRAPHIC DATA
A general description of the CDC 3300 Computer and special foitran in-
put functions is given in the introduction of Appendix B.
The program used for processing the data collected in 1970 and 1971
was program INSHORE. The program delineates the plume outline fi-om co-
ordinates measured from the aerial photography and determines the area
of the waste field. The direction and velocity of the current: and the
uiiiusion coefficients are determined from che dye paten. I a LUC pro-
cess, state plane coordinates of the points around the plume were com-
p-';;f „ a-;l these were saved for later plotting on the Tektro^jx graphic-
scope. See figure D-l for a flow diagram of program INSHORE. The num-
bers in parentheses on the flow diagram correspond tc line numbers en
the program listing in figure D-2.
Program
I^-o^^ii. miiC.J.2 fir^t orients tLt phcto fcu^c ri, UIT. f" \.j . "_.-..0
RESECT2, a version of the subroutine RESECT used in processing the data
in 1968 and 1969, After the orientation is completed, the coordinates
of the points on the photograph are read in, and the state plane co-
ordinates of each point are computed. As this is done, the data is
sorted according to the event number so that it is known whether the
point is a plume point, a point in the foam or kelp, a dye patch point,
or a point representing the apparent position of the outfall.
If the point is on the plume, a code number is assigned to indicate that
a continuous line is to be drawn from the previous point when the data
is plotted. Therefore, IDO is set to equal 1. If the point is the
first point, a line from the origin to that point is not desired, and
IPEN = 0. For all other plume points, the line is required and IPEN
= 1. When the last plume point is reached, the area of the plume is
computed by calling subroutine SECPROP. The area is converted to
acres, and is stored for later print out. As each point is assigned the
proper code, the code and the coordinate are written on LUN 23.
The points indicating the foam, kelp, and the outfall are coded sep-
arately, and are also written out with their respective coordinates
and codes.
The dye points are read, and as the last point is reached, section
properties needed for the computation of diffusion coefficients are
calculated. This is also done by subroutine SECPROP.
After the end of file has been reached on LUN 8, the time elapsed be-
tween flights is typed in. If there are two photos on file, the cur-
rent velocity and direction are computed, using section properties of
272
-------
the dye patch. A current vector is then generated, and the coordi-
nates needed to plot the vector are written on LUN 23.
Diffusion coefficients are then computed and all of the general infor-
mation is written on LUN 20.
Normally the data on LUN 23 is saved to be used as input for the plot-
ting program. The data on LUN 20 is sent to the line printer and is
used for reference purposes.
Input Description
The input on LUN 8 consists of photo coordinates, with the format being
the same as in the previous year (see Appendix C, figure C-8). As
shown below, the event number coding differs from that listed iu Ap
pendix C.
Event No. Description
000 Principal point.
001-019 Ground control.
100-498 Plume points.
499 Last plume point (always).
500-599 Foam points.
600-699 Kelp points.
700-898 Dye patch points.
899 Last dye patch point (always).
999 Outfall.
It should be noted that the control point numbers must correspond to
the ground control numbers on LUN 9.
Data on LUNS 8 and 9 are exactly the same as listed in Appendix C.
The data on LUN 9 is ground control, listing the point number, the x
and y coordinates and the elevation above mean sea level. LUN 10 con-
tains the initial orientation parameters for the camera station, and
are arranged as follows: photo number, x and y coordinates, state plane
coordinates, flying height, omega, phi and kappa rotation angles in
degrees.
Output Description
The major output is a listing of coordinates for each point which is
273
-------
to be plotted, along with a title for the plot. This is all written on
LUN 23, and saved for later plotting. General information such as orien-
tation for the photo, dye patch centroids, date, area of plume, current
velocity, and diffusion coefficients are written on LUN 20, and are not
saved except as hard copy. The area of the plume and date are also
written on the teletype so that the operator may have a check to see if
the program is operating correctly.
Plotting of_ Data
The data is plotted using a program which utilizes the Tektronix
T-4002 slope. A grid is drawn and the axes are labeled. The data is
then plotted and the plot labeled. A polaroid photograph is taken of
the plot for a permanent record. Examples of these plots are shown in
Section X.
274
-------
/"PROGRAM^
VINSHORE7
(08)
Call resect2
orient photos
READ photo control,]
ground control,
initial orientation
Backspace
LUN 8
READ event no.,
photo coordinates
time
flight
End
data
First
point on
next
photo
Compute velocity and
azimuth of current
(87)
Generate current vector
T
(102)
WRITE month, day,/(124^
area of plume
Compute diffusion
coefficients for dye patch
STOP
y
I
(140)
1
/WRITE diffusion
coefficients /
Figure D-l Flow diagram for computer program INSHORE.
275
-------
(18)
Compute state plane
coordinates
I
(28)
100-499
Plume
*
IDO-1
IPEN-1
«-T.
Event no. code
500-599
Foam
^
IDO -2
IPEN^O
t
600-699
Kelp
f
IDO =3
IPEN-0
f
999
Outfall
f
IDO- 4
IPEN^O
t .
700-899
Dye
Compute area
of plume
f (63)
Yes
WRITE (23)
point no, coordinates,
IPEN, IDO
T (56)
Compute
section properties
of dye patch
Figure D-l. Flow diagram for computer program INSHORE.
276
-------
30
210
SHORE.
C<20,3> , IP (3) ,XF (3) , YF(3)
XPL(2jO,2),Xd(20j,2),XT(3>,OYE<15,2,6> , VEL(15) ,AZI(15)
100 CALL *£S£CT2(FL,XP, YP)
110 R£AJ< 5, II IPLATE, ( IP< J) ,XF< J) ,YF( J) ,J=1,3>
1 F,0*»nT(4X,Il,3°AC£ 8
GO T D 1J3
1U 00 J J J J=l,3
IF( I»(J) .ta.O.ANO.XFt J) .EQ.O.) GO TO 110
223
Y1=X3-XF(J)
03 210 <=1,3
XT(K) =C(^,K>*X1+C (5,K)*Y1+C(6,K) * (-FL)
X JIS=SaRT (XT(l)»XT(l)iXT(2)*XT(a)+XT(3)»XT(3)J
00 2? j K = l, -5
XT(K) =XT (K) /XOIS
X°G 1=0(1, 1)-XT(1)*C(1,3)/XT(3)
X°32 = C(1,2)-XT(1_>>*C<1,.5)/XT(3)
IG3=IP( J) /100
GO TO (2J,20,cJ,2D,3J,'»0|bOf 50,63) IGO
XPL (I 10,1) -XPG1
XPLEN=0
GO TO 300
50 XOd^LAli, 1)=XPU1
XO(IrLAG,2) =XHG?
IFuAj^IFLAG+1
IFd^MJ) .NE.899) GO TO 20U
N=IFLAG-1
IF(I-»LftTc.liT.5) IFLT = 2
IF(Ii-'LT.Nt.LFLT) ICHECK =1
CALL SECPROP(X3,N,ICHECK,IFLT,OYE)
LFLT-IFLT
IFLA,=1
GO T) 2 '00
6J IPE.N=3
00001
00002
00003
QOOQ<«
CC005
C0006
GOOQ7
OCQ08
01)009
00010
OOC11
00012
00013
COCl
-------
330 WRIT£(23,2)IP(J) , XPG1,XPG2,IPEN, 100
2 FORM1T(X, 15, 2F1J. 0,215)
2u3 CONTINUE
GO TJ 11J
10JG WRIT€-OYEU,1,1>)
Y3ISr=
IF(XDIST.GT.50.) GO TO 370
V£L (I)-U.O
GO TO 390
IF(XJIST.LT.500u. ) GO TO 33u
GO TT <*00
VEL(I) =X3IST/TIME
CALL ARROW(tf£L(I),DYE(I,l,l),OYE(I,l,2l,*2I{I))
(I)
VEIN ) =
CONTINUE
REHI 40 8
= J.Q
4 FORTU(2I2)
WRIT-: (61,5)
5 FO/# OAY*,I6,/* AREA* ,E11.3,* SQ. FT.*,/
IF( V^LNO.GT.0.1) GO TO <*ia
HRIT^ (23,8)AC,MO,JOAY ,IYR
d FORMU(* AREA OF PLUME*, F6.1,* ACRES* ,20X, 2 (12 , */* I , 12)
GO T 3 <»23
1.10 WRIT£(23,1<*)AC,V!£LM,MO,IDAY,IYR
1-* FORMATf* AREA OF PLUMt * , F6 .1, * ACRES*,
1* VELOCITY*,F5.2,* FPS *, 2(12,*/<), 12)
<*2u END -ILE 23
9 FOR11TC* OYE PATCH DATA*)
51=1, ICOUNT)
12 FORM1TU NO*,I2,/* XCENTROID-1*, F1Q . 0 ,/* YCENTROIO-1*,F10. 0, /
C* ARZ4-1*,F15.2,/* XCtNTROIO-2*,F10.0,/* 1CC.HJROIO-Z*,F10. 0, /
C* AR£4-2*,F15.2,/* VELOCITY*, F13. 2, *FPS*,/* AZI1UTH*
C*FR01 NO
-------
oo <* ;: 1 = 1, ICOJNI
RATIOS l2RT?J WRIT^(2u,15) 3X,'JY,RTA1,RTA2,RT81,RTB2
15 FORMAT{///* OIFFJSION STUD Y*/
It OX- *,Flj.2f* FT S3 / StC*/
3* 41=*,Fo.j»*» A2=*,F6.0,#, B1 = *,F6 • 0»<»
END CILE 2J
STO3
END
SJLlRJ'JT INC ARROW(SCAF,XDYt,YOYE,BZI)
C 1MMJN/OATA/A
OIHC4SION A(10,2)
1-Uu. , -3J . , J. , 0. , Ib J 0. , 9uC. , tJCO. ,90^. , 1000. ,9JO.,dOC., 900.,
21 J 0 3 . )
A H =-3ZI
S=SIJ(AZI)
30 1J J=l,2
00 1) I=1,1J
10 4 (I, J)=A(I,J)*SCAF
00
1=1,10
X=XOfc-A(1,2)*3+A(I,1)*C
IF( I. Ntl. 1) IPEN=1
2J WRIT £(23,1) X,Y, IPtN,130
1
END
SUSP, OJTINE SECP='00(X,N,NO,IFLT,OYE)
C PROG
-------
X1=XI1,1)
YI=XIN,2>
Y1=X<1,2>
T2Y=YI+YH
00 3 1=1,N
IF(I.NE.N)GO TO 1
G 3 TO 2
1 1=1*1
2 XL=XI
XI = X'1
X1=X(M,1»
...XL=X(1-1), XI=X(I), XM=X(I*1), Y*S SIMILAR.
T1X=T2X
T2X=*T2X
= AX 'JAR/6.
AY3A i=AY3AR/6.
X !AR~ AXBAR/A
Y3AR=AYBAR/A
IX=I
-------
3YEUO,IFLT,4)=A3S(IMAX)
0 Y r i -I G. IF L, 1 , "7 > = A B S ( 111N )
OYE(JO,IFLT,6)=THETA
WRITE(20,S) IX,IY,IGX,I&Y,IXY,IbXY,Tl,T2,T3
' F,->RM}T(tl3.4>
WRIT;(20,C>)(NO,IFLT,I,OYE=*,F18.2)
RETIMN
ftii
5J3^JJTINt RESECT2 (FL,XP,YP)
COMMON C(2J,3), IP(3), XF(3), YF(3)
L)l*, YF(J), J = l,3)
1 FORMAT CtX, II,3( I .LT. 21) GO TO 25
Li A . -N , ,- A 0 >_ 8
GO TO 40
25 DO 11 J = 1 ,3
i vi' ,„, . ..A. " .ANO. XF(J) .GT. d.JOl) GO TO 26
IFd3 (J) .Ed. d) GO TO 36
GO TO 28
1 '-'=/'• t J)
G ) TO 38
B (I, ')=YF(J)
B (I,J)=XF(J)
I =!+•!
33 CONTINUE
GO TO 10
IF(I HGE.LT.3) GO TO 10J2
00 57 1 = 1,IMAGE
8(1,3)=YP-3(I,2)
3(1,3)=XP-8(1,3)
57 CONTINUE
C REAO 3ROJNO CONTROL
00 1J3 1 = 1, IMA3E
REHI -10 9
60 J=FFIN(9)
IF(EOF(q») GO TO 1004
IF «-J) 70,8C,7J
70 00 75 J=l,3
OC2<»8
75 CONTINUE
GOT) 6U
80 90 9J J=U,6
3 (I , J)=FFIN(9)
90 CONTINUF.
C REAO INITIAL RARAMETERS FOK CAMERA PHOTO
C AND 0-1EGA, PHI , KAPPA IN DEGREES
NO., X,Y,Z IN FT
OC25Q
00251
00252
00253
0025i«
00255
00256
00257
00258
00259
00260
00261
00262
00263
00264
00265
00266
00267
00268
00269
00270
00271
00272
00273
0027<»
00275
00276
00277
00278
00279
00280
00281
00282
00283
0028<»
00285
00286
00287
00288
00289
00290
00291
OC292
00293
0029<»
00295
00296
00297
00298
00299
00300
00301
00302
00303
00304
003Q5
00306
00307
00308
OC309
Figure D-2. Listing of program INSHORE. (Continued)
281
-------
108
11J
115
12Q
125
s i w 1 4 o i a
IPLT=FFIN< 10)
IF (EOF(IO)) GO
IF (IPLT-I^L
DO 115 1=1,6
130
613
612
613
619
TO IdOb
r£) 110,120,11U
I
CONTINUE
GO Tl 103
DO 125 J=l,3
C(1|JI=FFI*(1!])
CONTINUE
C (2,U=FFIN(10)/57.2958
C(2,i)=FFIN(l(])/57.2958
C (2. 5l=FFIM(li)» /5 7. 2953
DO 1JQ 1=1,3
C (7, I)=COSF(C <2,I ) >
C(2,I) = SINF(C(2,D)
CONTINUE
ORIENTATION FACTORS IN C ARRAY
C <<»,1>=C(3,2>*C(3,3)
C (5,1)=-C(3,2>»C(2,3)
C (b, 1) =C(2,2)
C (1 J, 1) =-C (2,2) *C (3,3)
C (11, 1) =C(2,2)*C(2,3)
C (12, 1) =C (3,2)
C (10 , 2) =C (<*,!) *C( 2, 1)
C (11,2) =C(5,1) *C(2,1)
C (12,2) =C<2,1) »C(2,2)
C (10, 3) = -C(1 =-C (1-3,3)
C ( t, J)=C(I-3,2)
CCL3, 1-6) =C(5,I-6)
C (!<*, 1-6) =-CC*, 1-6)
C(15,I-6)=fl.
GO T3 (613,763) , IGO
CLfA^ NORMAL EQUATION J ARRAY TO ZERO
00 61i* 1 = 1,6
00 61> 3 L = 5, r
00310
00311
00312
00313
00311*
00315
00316
G0317
00318
00319
00320
C0321
00382
00323
003ZJ*
00325
00336
00327
00328
00329
00330
00331
00332
00333
00331*
00335
00336
00337
00338
00339
003<*0
CDS'*!
C03<*2
G 03 it 3
003<»5
003i»6
003<»7
003
-------
623 P(I,u.) = <-3M-FL)»C-
621
76!
527
52^
529
53u
532
533
1QJ2
1005
1005
1006
1U07
1100
G J T 3 6 1 J
CA"LI TE ( 20 , 527)
WRIT-; (21,528) IPLATE, (C(l, J) , J = l,3)
w R r T ; < 2 u, 5 ? 9)
HRIT-: (23,528) I PL A T E , ( C ( 2 , J ) , J= 1, 3 )
^RIT: (2j,528> IPLATE , , j=i,3)
HRIT; (jj,530) IPLATE
^RIT-I (2j,5J3) ( (C ( I , J) , J = l, 3) ,I = i»,6
FOR^AT(/t9H PLATE XO
FORfHT(I7, 5(2X,Llt.7))
FJR^U(/5jrl PLATE OMtGA
F3R-^Af
-------
APPENDIX E
Streamlines For A Source In A Uniform Flow
A general description of the CDC 3300 Computer and special fortran in-
put functions is given in the introduction of Appendix B.
Program FLOWNET was used for generating the coordinates for plotting a
flownet for a line source oriented perpendicular to a uniform stream.
The program used the equation:
i); = -UY+ a [ (Y + |) 0X
-(Y - fe 9. - Xln -±) }
2
which was derived in Section XI as equation 112.
The variables in the equation correspond to those shown in figure 96.
A flow diagram for program FLOWNET is shown in figure E-l and the num-
bers in parentheses correspond to line numbers in the program listing
of figure E-2.
Program
Program FLOWNET requires that the velocity and azimuth from the north
of the uniform flow, as well as the flow rate, estimated dilution over
the outfall, the depth of the waste field and the length of the dif-
fuser section be typed in. The maximum value of fy is then computed and
the y coordinate for a point 6000 ft downstream on the outermost stream-
line is determined. Using this as a starting point, the coordinates
for successive points along one half of a stream line are computed by
incrementing 0 and checking the new y value against the estimated value
of y. After one side of a streamline is generated, the coordinates
are rotated and the mirror image is computed. These are written on
LUN 2 and the process is repeated for the next streamline until three
streamlines and the centerline are computed.
The data on LUN 2 is saved and used as input for a plotting program
which utilizes the Tektronix T-4002 graphic-scope. Two examples of
plots generated using program FLOWNET are shown in figure 97 (a and b)
with uniform flow velocities of 0.1 and 0.5 ft/sec respectively.
284
-------
(FLOWNET)
(6)
fTTYIN
DIL, DEPTH,ALEN
= 0.
= Q*DIL/(DEPTH*2)
(27)
=1
= -6000.
Y1-(Hl|J-({J)/VEL
0izATAN(X(l)/AY)
(54)
ABS(Y(I)-Y1)
.GT. limit
'WRITE 2
streamline coordinates
t (97)
Rotate and translate
streamline coordinates
Compute and WRITE 2
coordinates of outfall
(132),
STOP
Figure E-l. Flow diagram of program FLOWNET.
285
-------
Don
3
is
so
70
90
'1
or MEM SIGN x (?e>c> »Y (?so> » TPFN (?so>
U«TTYTN(4HVEL=)
RCT«TTYTN(4HAZ= )
Q«TTYINUHCFS=)
HIL=TTYIN(4HD[L=)
r>FPTH=TTYlN<4HI>EP«)
ALEM=TTYin<4HLEN=)
OPST=HPSI/3.
1 = 1
Yl = M=>SI-AK SI I /ll
Yl 1^ = 1.'.
IPFN|(T>=1
IF(T.ST.T) Rn TO *0
R"T = AlFiJ2 + Yl
TMF.TSS-ATAU (x d > /HCTI
IF mCT.PT.O) THFTH = "?.l4lt;Q + THFTR
IF(THFT(t.LT.O.) THFTR = 6.?'l3m + THFT'3
or TO 7o
X(f) =-SIrg(THFTH)/CCS(THETt')
x ( i> =x (T i * (YI + ALFMJ>)
THETAsATANIX (I) /RCT)
IFITHFTA.LT.O.) THFT A=ThFT A* 8 . ?R11 H
S T N D = ^ 1 1 ( T H E T H )
C"^c;T' = AHS (STMR/qlMA)
C^fJ':* = THFTA*THrTrt-3.14lS'^
1 ALCG(CCMSI2) ) ) /( 1 . +C3NST*(THFTA-THFTR) )
Yr»IFsY(I)-Yl
If- (ft=
-------
Yl »YMr>*OIF2«ABS(DIF4/(DlFT-DlF4) )
C,Z TC 50
97 Yl»YST-t'IF2«AHS.6T«C'..AMD.X(T' .LT.POOO.) 1 = 1*1
110 THET^-THETb-0.05
THEL-THF.TA
IF(K.ST.S) PC TO l?n
120 Yl«Y(T-l)»DY
130 IPEN(1>«0
210 Or 100 I«1»K
FACf"l«X
-------
1 Acct^s^ion /Vurnber
w
2
Sllbjei ( Flrtd & Group
SELECTED WATER RESOURCES ABSTRACTS
INPUT TRANSACTION FORM
I Organization
Oregon State University, Corvallis, Oregon 97331
Title
AIRPHOTO ANALYSIS OF OCEAN OUTFALL DISPERSION
I Q Author(s)
Burgess, Fred J.
James, Wesley P.
16
21
Project Designation
16070 ENS, Federal
Water Quality Office
Note
22
Citation
Water pollution Control Research Series 16070 ENS,
WQO, EPA. June 1971. 102 figs, 12 tables, 47 ref. 312 p.
23
Descriptors (Starred First)
* Aerial photography/ *Waste water disposal/ *0ceans/ *Coasts/
* Remote sensing/ industrial waste/ sewage effluents/ outlets/
mixing/ diffusion/ currents (water).
25
Identifiers (Starred First)
*0cean outfall/ *Marine disposal
TV Abstract
Aerial photography was taken of the ocean outfall waste plume at Newport, Oregon,
during the summers of 1968, 1969, and the period extending from September, 1970
through May 1971. This remote sensing system involving multispectral photography was
utilized to compute waste concentrations, water currents and diffusion coefficients
in the outfall area. Conventional boat sampling of the waste field was conducted
concurrently with the photography during the 1968 and 1969 field seasons. The waste
concentrations determined by the two methods were compared by matching ground co-
ordinates. The correlation coefficient for the comparison ranged from 0.85 to 0,95.
The water current velocity was found to be the dominant factor in the surface plume
pattern. The steady state form of the Fickian diffusion equation with a unidirec-
tional transport velocity was not applicable to the majority of the observations.
The equation for a line source in a uniform stream provided the x and y velocity
components for a two-dimensional diffusion model with the losses to the lower layers
being considered by including a decay coefficient. This second model was found to
be more applicable to the diffusion process. Characteristic airphoto pattern ele-
ments are given for visual interpretation of the photography. Wind velocity, sea
state, current velocity wave height and diffusion coefficients can be estimated
from the aerial photography.
Abstractor
Institution
Oregon State University
WR 102 (REV JULY 1969}
WRSI C
SEND, WITH COPY OF DOCUMENT, TO: WATER RESOURCES SCIENTIFIC INFORMATION CENTER
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
WASHINGTON. D. C, 20240
«>US. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 1972.i84.482/33 1-3
------- |